Dell Configuration Guide for the S6000 System 9.11(0.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your product. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. Copyright © 2016 Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Dell, EMC, and other trademarks are trademarks of Dell Inc. or its subsidiaries.
Contents 1 About this Guide...........................................................................................................................................35 Audience........................................................................................................................................................................... 35 Conventions.....................................................................................................................................................
Configuring Privilege Levels........................................................................................................................................... 57 Creating a Custom Privilege Level.......................................................................................................................... 58 Removing a Command from EXEC Mode..............................................................................................................
Recovering from a Failed Start on the S6000............................................................................................................. 79 Restoring the Factory Default Settings........................................................................................................................ 80 Important Points to Remember...............................................................................................................................
IP Fragment Handling..................................................................................................................................................... 114 IP Fragments ACL Examples................................................................................................................................... 114 Layer 4 ACL Rules Examples...................................................................................................................................
Troubleshooting BFD............................................................................................................................................... 162 9 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4).................................................................................................... 164 Autonomous Systems (AS)...........................................................................................................................................164 Sessions and Peers..................
Configuring the local System or a Different System to be the Next Hop for BGP-Learned Routes............201 Changing the WEIGHT Attribute...........................................................................................................................202 Enabling Multipath...................................................................................................................................................202 Filtering BGP Routes...........................................................
Ethernet Enhancements in Data Center Bridging..................................................................................................... 239 Priority-Based Flow Control...................................................................................................................................240 Enhanced Transmission Selection..........................................................................................................................
Configuring the Dynamic Buffer Method................................................................................................................... 277 Sample DCB Configuration...........................................................................................................................................278 PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples.............................................................................................. 280 13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)..
Support for ECMP in host table............................................................................................................................ 306 Support for moving /128 IPv6 Prefixes and /32 IPv4 Prefixes ....................................................................... 306 RTAG7.............................................................................................................................................................................306 Flow-based Hashing for ECMP........
Ring Status............................................................................................................................................................... 333 Multiple FRRP Rings................................................................................................................................................333 Important FRRP Points...........................................................................................................................................
Removing a Group-Port Association.....................................................................................................................357 Disabling Multicast Flooding...................................................................................................................................358 Specifying a Port as Connected to a Multicast Router......................................................................................358 Configuring the Switch as Querier....................
Interfaces in Port Channels.....................................................................................................................................381 Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces................................................................................................382 Creating a Port Channel.........................................................................................................................................
Configuration Tasks for IP Addresses......................................................................................................................... 415 Assigning IP Addresses to an Interface....................................................................................................................... 415 Configuring Static Routes.............................................................................................................................................
ICMPv6........................................................................................................................................................................... 437 Path MTU Discovery.....................................................................................................................................................438 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery........................................................................................................................................
Implementation Information.......................................................................................................................................... 461 Configuration Information.............................................................................................................................................462 Configuration Tasks for IS-IS.................................................................................................................................
Setting Station Move Violation Actions................................................................................................................502 Recovering from Learning Limit and Station Move Violations.......................................................................... 502 Disabling MAC Address Learning on the System................................................................................................ 503 NIC Teaming.................................................................
29 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP)........................................................................................ 535 Protocol Overview........................................................................................................................................................ 535 Anycast RP.....................................................................................................................................................................
Router 1 Running-ConfigurationRouter 2 Running-ConfigurationRouter 3 RunningConfigurationSFTOS Example Running-Configuration.......................................................................................567 Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations........................................................................................................570 31 Multicast Features.............................................................................................................................
Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6)............................................................................................. 624 Enabling IPv6 Unicast Routing...............................................................................................................................625 Applying cost for OSPFv3......................................................................................................................................625 Assigning IPv6 Addresses on an Interface..
Enabling PIM-SSM........................................................................................................................................................ 657 Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts................................................................................................................657 Configuring PIM-SSM with IGMPv2....................................................................................................................
Configuring Port-Based Rate Shaping................................................................................................................. 693 Policy-Based QoS Configurations............................................................................................................................... 694 Classify Traffic.........................................................................................................................................................
Configuring the RMON Collection History........................................................................................................... 739 42 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)..................................................................................................... 741 Protocol Overview..........................................................................................................................................................741 Configuring Rapid Spanning Tree...........
Configuring the SSH Client Cipher List.................................................................................................................774 Secure Shell Authentication................................................................................................................................... 775 Troubleshooting SSH...............................................................................................................................................777 Telnet......................
Implementation Information...........................................................................................................................................811 Important Points to Remember..............................................................................................................................812 Enabling Extended sFlow..............................................................................................................................................
MIB Support for PFC Storm Control.......................................................................................................................... 838 MIB Support for PFC no-drop-priority L2Dlf Drop................................................................................................... 840 MIB Support for Monitoring the overall buffer usage for lossy and lossless traffic per XPE..............................840 SNMP Support for WRED Green/Yellow/Red Drop Counters.........................
Creating a Virtual Stack Unit on a Stack.............................................................................................................. 872 Displaying Information about a Stack....................................................................................................................872 Influencing Management Unit Selection on a Stack........................................................................................... 875 Managing Redundancy on a Stack...........................
Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard........................................................................................ 901 Configuring SupportAssist Manually............................................................................................................................901 Configuring SupportAssist Activity............................................................................................................................. 903 Configuring SupportAssist Company......
Assigning an IP Address to a VLAN.......................................................................................................................928 Configuring Native VLANs........................................................................................................................................... 928 Enabling Null VLAN as the Default VLAN...................................................................................................................929 56 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT).
PVLAN Operations When a VLT Peer is Restarted............................................................................................ 982 Interoperation of VLT Nodes in a PVLAN with ARP Requests......................................................................... 982 Scenarios for VLAN Membership and MAC Synchronization With VLT Nodes in PVLAN........................... 982 Configuring a VLT VLAN or LAG in a PVLAN.......................................................................................
Static Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN)..................................................................................................................... 1016 Configuring Static VXLAN.....................................................................................................................................1016 Limitations on Static VXLAN ................................................................................................................................
Troubleshoot an Over-temperature Condition...................................................................................................1069 Recognize an Under-Voltage Condition..............................................................................................................1069 Troubleshoot an Under-Voltage Condition.........................................................................................................1069 Buffer Tuning.....................................................
Configuring revocation behavior..........................................................................................................................1098 Configuring OSCP responder preference...........................................................................................................1098 Verifying certificates....................................................................................................................................................1098 Verifying Server certificates.
1 About this Guide This guide describes the protocols and features the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports and provides configuration instructions and examples for implementing them. For complete information about all the CLI commands, see the Dell Command Line Reference Guide for your system. The S6000 platform is available with Dell Networking OS version 9.0(2.0) and beyond. Though this guide contains information about protocols, it is not intended to be a complete reference.
2 Configuration Fundamentals The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interface (CLI) is a text-based interface you can use to configure interfaces and protocols. The CLI is largely the same for each platform except for some commands and command outputs. The CLI is structured in modes for security and management purposes. Different sets of commands are available in each mode, and you can limit user access to modes using privilege levels.
You can set user access rights to commands and command modes using privilege levels. The Dell Networking OS CLI is divided into three major mode levels: • EXEC mode is the default mode and has a privilege level of 1, which is the most restricted level. Only a limited selection of commands is available, notably the show commands, which allow you to view system information.
PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP PREFIX-LIST PRIORITY-GROUP PROTOCOL GVRP QOS POLICY RSTP ROUTE-MAP ROUTER BGP BGP ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER ISIS ISIS ADDRESS-FAMILY ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFV3 ROUTER RIP SPANNING TREE SUPPORTASSIST TRACE-LIST VLT DOMAIN VRRP UPLINK STATE GROUP uBoot Navigating CLI Modes The Dell Networking OS prompt changes to indicate the CLI mode. The following table lists the CLI mode, its prompt, and information about how to access and exit the CLI mode.
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command Interface Group Dell(conf-if-group)# interface(INTERFACE modes) Interface Range Dell(conf-if-range)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Loopback Interface Dell(conf-if-lo-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Management Ethernet Interface Dell(conf-if-ma-0/0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Null Interface Dell(conf-if-nu-0)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Port-channel Interface Dell(conf-if-po-1)# interface (INTERFACE modes) Tunnel Interface Dell(conf-if-tu-1)# int
CLI Command Mode Prompt Access Command SPANNING TREE Dell(config-span)# protocol spanning-tree 0 TRACE-LIST Dell(conf-trace-acl)# ip trace-list CLASS-MAP Dell(config-class-map)# class-map CONTROL-PLANE Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)# control-plane-cpuqos DHCP Dell(config-dhcp)# ip dhcp server DHCP POOL Dell(config-dhcp-pool-name)# pool (DHCP Mode) ECMP Dell(conf-ecmp-group-ecmpgroup-id)# ecmp-group EIS Dell(conf-mgmt-eis)# management egress-interfaceselection FRRP Dell(conf-frrp-ring-
The do Command You can enter an EXEC mode command from any CONFIGURATION mode (CONFIGURATION, INTERFACE, SPANNING TREE, and so on.) without having to return to EXEC mode by preceding the EXEC mode command with the do command. The following example shows the output of the do command.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/17 no ip address no shutdown Layer 2 protocols are disabled by default. To enable Layer 2 protocols, use the no disable command. For example, in PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode, enter no disable to enable Spanning Tree. Obtaining Help Obtain a list of keywords and a brief functional description of those keywords at any CLI mode using the ? or help command: • To list the keywords available in the current mode, enter ? at the prompt or after a keyword.
Short-Cut Key Combination Action CNTL-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the command line. CNTL-L Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-N Return to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with CTRL-P or the UP arrow key. CNTL-P Recalls commands, beginning with the last command. CNTL-R Re-enters the previous command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line.
NOTE: Dell Networking OS accepts a space or no space before and after the pipe. To filter a phrase with spaces, underscores, or ranges, enclose the phrase with double quotation marks. The except keyword displays text that does not match the specified text. The following example shows this command used in combination with the show system brief command.
3 Getting Started This chapter describes how you start configuring your system. When you power up the chassis, the system performs a power-on self test (POST) and system then loads the Dell Networking Operating System. Boot messages scroll up the terminal window during this process. No user interaction is required if the boot process proceeds without interruption. When the boot process completes, the system status LEDs remain online (green) and the console monitor displays the EXEC mode prompt.
Console Access The device has two management ports available for system access: a serial RS-232 /RJ-45 console port and an out-of-band (OOB) Ethernet port to manage the switch with an IP address. Serial Console The RJ-45/RS-232 console port is labeled on the upper right-hand side, as you face the I/O side of the chassis. Figure 1.
Table 2.
2 Configure a management route with a default gateway. Configure a Management Route 3 Configure a username and password. Configure a Username and Password Configure the Management Port IP Address To access the system remotely, assign IP addresses to the management ports. 1 Enter INTERFACE mode for the Management port. CONFIGURATION mode interface ManagementEthernet slot/port 2 Assign an IP address to the interface.
Configuring the Enable Password Access EXEC Privilege mode using the enable command. EXEC Privilege mode is unrestricted by default. Configure a password as a basic security measure. There are three types of enable passwords: • enable password is stored in the running/startup configuration using a DES encryption method. • enable secret is stored in the running/startup configuration using MD5 encryption method.
Location source-file-url Syntax destination-file-url Syntax copy tftp://{hostip | hostname}/filepath/ filename tftp://{hostip | hostname}/ filepath/filename FTP server For a remote file location: TFTP server For a remote file location: SCP server copy scp://{hostip | hostname}/ scp://{hostip | hostname}/ filepath/ filename filepath/filename Important Points to Remember • You may not copy a file from one remote system to another. • You may not copy a file from one location to the same location.
the mount command is saved to the startup configuration. As a result, each time the device re-boots, the NFS file system is mounted during start up. Table 5. Forming a copy Command Location source-file-url Syntax destination-file-url Syntax For a remote file location: copy nfsmount://{}/filepath/filename} username:password tftp://{hostip | hostname}/ filepath/filename NFS File System Important Points to Remember • You cannot copy a file from one remote system to another.
225 bytes successfully copied Dell# Save the Running-Configuration The running-configuration contains the current system configuration. Dell Networking recommends coping your running-configuration to the startup-configuration. The commands in this section follow the same format as those commands in the Copy Files to and from the System section but use the filenames startup-configuration and running-configuration.
Example of the dir Command The output of the dir command also shows the read/write privileges, size (in bytes), and date of modification for each file.
You can change the default file system so that file management commands apply to a particular device or memory. To change the default directory, use the following command. • Change the default directory. EXEC Privilege mode cd directory View Command History The command-history trace feature captures all commands entered by all users of the system with a time stamp and writes these messages to a dedicated trace log buffer. The system generates a trace message for each executed command.
However, these changes are backward-compatible and do not affect existing behavior; meaning, you can still use the ip http source- interface command to communicate with a particular interface even if no VRF is configured on that interface NOTE: If the HTTP service is not VRF-aware, then it uses the global routing table to perform the look-up. To enable an HTTP client to look up the VRF table corresponding to either management VRF or any nondefault VRF, use the ip http vrf command in CONFIGURATION mode.
SHA256 Dell# verify sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin SHA256 hash for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin: e6328c06faf814e6899ceead219afbf9360e986d692988023b749e6b2093e933 Examples: Entering the Hash Value for Verification MD5 Dell# verify md5 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin 275ceb73a4f3118e1d6bcf7d75753459 MD5 hash VERIFIED for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin SHA256 Dell# verify sha256 flash://FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.bin e6328c06faf814e6899ceead219afbf9360e986d692988023b749e6b2093e933 SHA256 hash VERIFIED for FTOS-SE-9.5.0.0.
4 Management This chapter describes the different protocols or services used to manage the Dell Networking system.
Creating a Custom Privilege Level Custom privilege levels start with the default EXEC mode command set. You can then customize privilege levels 2-14 by: • restricting access to an EXEC mode command • moving commands from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode • restricting access A user can access all commands at his privilege level and below.
• removes the resequence command from EXEC mode by requiring a minimum of privilege level 4 • • moves the capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size command from EXEC Privilege to EXEC mode by requiring a minimum privilege level 3, which is the configured level for VTY 0 allows access to CONFIGURATION mode with the banner command • allows access to INTERFACE tengigabitethernet and LINE modes are allowed with no commands • Remove a command from the list of available commands in EXEC mode.
exit Exit from configuration mode interface Select an interface to configure line Configure a terminal line linecard Set line card type Dell(conf)#interface ? fastethernet Fast Ethernet interface gigabitethernet Gigabit Ethernet interface loopback Loopback interface managementethernet Management Ethernet interface null Null interface port-channel Port-channel interface range Configure interface range sonet SONET interface tengigabitethernet TenGigabit Ethernet interface vlan VLAN interface Dell(conf)#interf
• the internal buffer • console and terminal lines • any configured syslog servers To disable logging, use the following commands. • Disable all logging except on the console. CONFIGURATION mode no logging on • Disable logging to the logging buffer. CONFIGURATION mode no logging buffer • Disable logging to terminal lines. CONFIGURATION mode no logging monitor • Disable console logging.
The security log contains security events and information. RBAC restricts access to audit and security logs based on the CLI sessions’ user roles. The types of information in this log consist of the following: • Establishment of secure traffic flows, such as SSH. • Violations on secure flows or certificate issues. • Adding and deleting of users.
Configuring Logging Format To display syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format, use the logging version {0 | 1} command in CONFIGURATION mode. By default, the system log version is set to 0.
Pre-requisites To configure a secure connection from the switch to the syslog server: 1 On the switch, enable the SSH server Dell(conf)#ip ssh server enable 2 On the syslog server, create a reverse SSH tunnel from the syslog server to the Dell OS switch, using following syntax: ssh -R :: user@remote_host -nNf In the following example the syslog server IP address is 10.156.166.48 and the listening port is 5141. The switch IP address is 10.16.131.
Sending System Messages to a Syslog Server To send system messages to a specified syslog server, use the following command. The following syslog standards are supported: RFC 5424 The SYSLOG Protocol, R.Gerhards and Adiscon GmbH, March 2009, obsoletes RFC 3164 and RFC 5426 Transmission of Syslog Messages over UDP. • Specify the server to which you want to send system messages. You can configure up to eight syslog servers.
After enabling login statistics, the system stores the login activity details for the last 30 days. 2 (Optional) Configure the number of days for which the system stores the user login statistics. The range is from 1 to 30. CONFIGURATION mode login statistics time-period days Example of Configuring Login Activity Tracking The following example enables login activity tracking. The system stores the login activity details for the last 30 days.
Unsuccessful login attempt(s) since the last successful login: 0 Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 3 Successful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------User: admin3 Last login time: 13:18:42 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
• Users can clear their existing sessions only if the system is configured with the login concurrent-session clear-line enable command. Configuring Concurrent Session Limit To configure concurrent session limit, follow this procedure: • Limit the number of concurrent sessions for all users. CONFIGURATION mode login concurrent-session limit number-of-sessions Example of Configuring Concurrent Session Limit The following example limits the permitted number of concurrent login sessions to 4.
Current sessions for user admin: Line Location 2 vty 0 10.14.1.97 3 vty 1 10.14.1.97 4 vty 2 10.14.1.97 5 vty 3 10.14.1.97 Kill existing session? [line number/Enter to cancel]: Enabling Secured CLI Mode The secured CLI mode prevents the users from enhancing the permissions or promoting the privilege levels. • Enter the following command to enable the secured CLI mode: CONFIGURATION Mode secure-cli enable After entering the command, save the running-configuration.
• Specify the number of messages that Dell Networking OS saves to its logging history table. CONFIGURATION mode logging history size size To view the logging buffer and configuration, use the show logging command in EXEC privilege mode, as shown in the example for Display the Logging Buffer and the Logging Configuration. To view the logging configuration, use the show running-config logging command in privilege mode, as shown in the example for Configure a UNIX Logging Facility Level.
• Specify one of the following parameters.
Synchronizing Log Messages You can configure Dell Networking OS to filter and consolidate the system messages for a specific line by synchronizing the message output. Only the messages with a severity at or below the set level appear. This feature works on the terminal and console connections available on the system. 1 Enter LINE mode.
File Transfer Services With Dell Networking OS, you can configure the system to transfer files over the network using the file transfer protocol (FTP). One FTP application is copying the system image files over an interface on to the system; however, FTP is not supported on virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. The FTP and TFTP services are enhanced to support the VRF-aware functionality.
• The default is the internal flash directory. Specify a user name for all FTP users and configure either a plain text or encrypted password. CONFIGURATION mode ftp-server username username password [encryption-type] password Configure the following optional and required parameters: • username: enter a text string. • encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. • password: enter a text string.
Denying and Permitting Access to a Terminal Line Dell Networking recommends applying only standard access control lists (ACLs) to deny and permit access to VTY lines. • Layer 3 ACLs deny all traffic that is not explicitly permitted, but in the case of VTY lines, an ACL with no rules does not deny traffic. • You cannot use the show ip accounting access-list command to display the contents of an ACL that is applied only to a VTY line.
exec-timeout 0 0 access-class testpermit ipv4 access-class testv6deny ipv6 ! Configuring Login Authentication for Terminal Lines You can use any combination of up to six authentication methods to authenticate a user on a terminal line. A combination of authentication methods is called a method list. If the user fails the first authentication method, Dell Networking OS prompts the next method until all methods are exhausted, at which point the connection is terminated.
Setting Timeout for EXEC Privilege Mode EXEC timeout is a basic security feature that returns Dell Networking OS to EXEC mode after a period of inactivity on the terminal lines. To set timeout, use the following commands. • Set the number of minutes and seconds. The default is 10 minutes on the console and 30 minutes on VTY. Disable EXEC time out by setting the timeout period to 0. LINE mode exec-timeout minutes [seconds] • Return to the default timeout values.
login: admin Dell# Lock CONFIGURATION Mode Dell Networking OS allows multiple users to make configurations at the same time. You can lock CONFIGURATION mode so that only one user can be in CONFIGURATION mode at any time (Message 2). You can set two types of lockst: auto and manual. • Set auto-lock using the configuration mode exclusive auto command from CONFIGURATION mode. When you set autolock, every time a user is in CONFIGURATION mode, all other users are denied access.
4 At the BLI prompt, set the system parameter to ignore the enable password and reload the system: BOOT_USER# ignore enable-password BOOT_USER# reload NOTE: You must manually enter each CLI command. The system rejects a command if you copy and paste it in the command line. 5 Configure a new password. CONFIGURATION mode enable {secret | password} 6 Save the change in the running configuration to the startup configuration.
BOOT_USER mode BOOT_USER# boot change primary You are prompted to enter a valid boot device (for example, ftp o r tftp or flash) and a path or filename for the Dell Networking OS image that you want to use. 4 (Optional) Set the secondary and default boot locations by entering the following commands: BOOT_USER mode BOOT_USER# boot change secondary BOOT_USER# boot change default 5 Reboot the chassis.
Restoring Factory Default Environment Variables The Boot line determines the location of the image that is used to boot up the chassis after restoring factory default settings. Ideally, these locations contain valid images, using which the chassis boots up. When you restore factory-default settings, you can either use a flash boot procedure or a network boot procedure to boot the switch. Important Points to Remember • The Chassis remains in boot prompt if none of the partitions contain valid images.
BOOT_USER # interface management ethernet ip address ip_address_with_mask For example, 10.16.150.106/16. 5 Assign an IP address as the default gateway for the system. default-gateway gateway_ip_address For example, 10.16.150.254. 6 The environment variables are auto saved. 7 Reload the system.
5 802.1X 802.1X is a port-based Network Access Control (PNAC) that provides an authentication mechanism to devices wishing to attach to a LAN or WLAN. A device connected to a port that is enabled with 802.1X is disallowed from sending or receiving packets on the network until its identity is verified (through a username and password, for example). 802.
Figure 4. EAP Frames Encapsulated in Ethernet and RADUIS The authentication process involves three devices: • The device attempting to access the network is the supplicant. The supplicant is not allowed to communicate on the network until the authenticator authorizes the port. It can only communicate with the authenticator in response to 802.1X requests. • The device with which the supplicant communicates is the authenticator. The authenticator is the gate keeper of the network.
• Configuring Timeouts • Configuring Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication • Guest and Authentication-Fail VLANs Port-Authentication Process The authentication process begins when the authenticator senses that a link status has changed from down to up: 1 When the authenticator senses a link state change, it requests that the supplicant identify itself using an EAP Identity Request frame. 2 The supplicant responds with its identity in an EAP Response Identity frame.
Figure 6. EAP Over RADIUS RADIUS Attributes for 802.1X Support Dell Networking systems include the following RADIUS attributes in all 802.1X-triggered Access-Request messages: Attribute 31 Calling-station-id: relays the supplicant MAC address to the authentication server. Attribute 41 NAS-Port-Type: NAS-port physical port type. 15 indicates Ethernet. Attribute 61 NAS-Port: the physical port number by which the authenticator is connected to the supplicant.
Enabling 802.1X Enable 802.1X globally. Figure 7. 802.1X Enabled 1 Enable 802.1X globally. CONFIGURATION mode dot1x authentication 2 Enter INTERFACE mode on an interface or a range of interfaces. INTERFACE mode interface [range] 3 Enable 802.1X on the supplicant interface only. INTERFACE mode dot1x authentication Examples of Verifying that 802.1X is Enabled Globally and on an Interface Verify that 802.
In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled. Dell#show running-config | find dot1x dot1x authentication ! [output omitted] ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address dot1x authentication no shutdown ! Dell# To view 802.1X configuration information for an interface, use the show dot1x interface command. In the following example, the bold lines show that 802.1X is enabled on all ports unauthorized by default. Dell#show dot1x interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1/ 802.
802.1x profile information ----------------------------Dot1x Profile test Profile MACs 00:00:00:00:01:11 Configuring MAC addresses for a do1x Profile To configure a list of MAC addresses for a dot1x profile, use the mac command. You can configure 1 to 6 MAC addresses. • Configure a list of MAC addresses for a dot1x profile. DOT1X PROFILE CONFIG (conf-dot1x-profile) mac mac-address mac-address — Enter the keyword mac and type up to the 48– bit MAC addresses using the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
Untagged VLAN id: Guest VLAN: Guest VLAN id: Auth-Fail VLAN: Auth-Fail VLAN id: Auth-Fail Max-Attempts:3 Critical VLAN: Critical VLAN id: Mac-Auth-Bypass Only: Static-MAB: Static-MAB Profile: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: None Enable 100 Enable 200 Enable 300 Disable Enable Sample 90 seconds 120 seconds 10 30 seconds 30 seconds 7200 seconds 10 SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle Configuring Criti
Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 2 SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle Configuring Request Identity Re-Transmissions When the authenticator sends a Request Identity frame and the supplicant does not respond, the authenticator waits for 30 seconds and then re-transmits the frame.
Example of Configuring and Verifying Port Authentication The following example shows configuration information for a port for which the authenticator re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame: • after 90 seconds and a maximum of 10 times for an unresponsive supplicant • re-transmits an EAP Request Identity frame The bold lines show the new re-transmit interval, new quiet period, and new maximum re-transmissions.
Port Control: Port Auth Status: Re-Authentication: Untagged VLAN id: Tx Period: Quiet Period: ReAuth Max: Supplicant Timeout: Server Timeout: Re-Auth Interval: Max-EAP-Req: Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Auth PAE State: Backend State: FORCE_AUTHORIZED UNAUTHORIZED Disable None 90 seconds 120 seconds 2 30 seconds 30 seconds 3600 seconds 10 SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Initialize Initialize Re-Authenticating a Port You can configure the authenticator for periodic re-authentication.
Auth Type: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Auth PAE State: Backend State: SINGLE_HOST Initialize Initialize Initialize Initialize Configuring Timeouts If the supplicant or the authentication server is unresponsive, the authenticator terminates the authentication process after 30 seconds by default. You can configure the amount of time the authenticator waits for a response.
Configuring Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication Dell Networking OS supports dynamic VLAN assignment when using 802.1X. The basis for VLAN assignment is RADIUS attribute 81, Tunnel-Private-Group-ID.
5 Verify that the port has been authorized and placed in the desired VLAN (refer to the illustration in Dynamic VLAN Assignment with Port Authentication). Guest and Authentication-Fail VLANs Typically, the authenticator (the Dell system) denies the supplicant access to the network until the supplicant is authenticated.
Example of Configuring Maximum Authentication Attempts Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#dot1x guest-vlan 200 Dell(conf-if-Te 2/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x authentication dot1x guest-vlan 200 no shutdown Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)# Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-attempts 5 Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 switchport dot1x authentication dot1x guest-vlan 200 dot1x auth-fail-vlan 100 max-attempts 5 no shutdown Dell(conf-if-Te-2/1)# Exam
6 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. Optimizing CAM Utilization During the Attachment of ACLs to VLANs To minimize the number of entries in CAM, enable and configure the ACL CAM feature. Use this feature when you apply ACLs to a VLAN (or a set of VLANs) and when you apply ACLs to a set of ports.
• The ACL VLAN group is deleted and it does not contain VLAN members. • The ACL is applied or removed from a group and the ACL group does not contain a VLAN member. • The description of the ACL group is added or removed. Guidelines for Configuring ACL VLAN Groups Keep the following points in mind when you configure ACL VLAN groups: • The interfaces where you apply the ACL VLAN group function as restricted interfaces.
description description 3 Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit 4 Add VLAN member(s) to an ACL VLAN group. CONFIGURATION (conf-acl-vl-grp) mode member vlan {VLAN-range} 5 Display all the ACL VLAN groups or display a specific ACL VLAN group, identified by name.
EXEC Privilege mode Dell#show cam-usage switch Stackunit|Portpipe| CAM Partition | Total CAM | Used CAM |Available CAM ========|========|=================|============|============|============= 1 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | 1536 | 0 | 1536 | | OUT-L2 ACL | 206 | 9 | 197 Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%. Viewing CAM Usage View the amount of CAM space available, used, and remaining in each partition (including IPv4Flow and Layer 2 ACL sub- partitions) using the show cam-usage command in EXEC Privilege mode.
2 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | | IN-L3 ACL | | IN-V6 ACL | | OUT-L2 ACL | | OUT-L3 ACL | | OUT-V6 ACL 3 | 0 | IN-L2 ACL | | IN-L3 ACL | | IN-V6 ACL | | OUT-L2 ACL | | OUT-L3 ACL | | OUT-V6 ACL Codes: * - cam usage is above 90%.
To reset the number of FP blocks to the default, use the no version of these commands. By default, zero groups are allocated for the ACL in VCAP. ACL VLAN groups or CAM optimization is not enabled by default. You must also allocate the slices for CAM optimization. To display the number of FP blocks that is allocated for the different VLAN services, use the show cam-acl-vlan command. After you configure the ACL VLAN groups, reboot the system to store the settings in nonvolatile storage.
7 Access Control Lists (ACLs) This chapter describes access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps. At their simplest, access control lists (ACLs), prefix lists, and route-maps permit or deny traffic based on MAC and/or IP addresses. This chapter describes implementing IP ACLs, IP prefix lists and route-maps. For MAC ACLS, refer to Layer 2.
Topics: • IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) • Important Points to Remember • IP Fragment Handling • Configure a Standard IP ACL • Configure an Extended IP ACL • Configure Layer 2 and Layer 3 ACLs • Assign an IP ACL to an Interface • Applying an IP ACL • Configure Ingress ACLs • Configure Egress ACLs • IP Prefix Lists • ACL Resequencing • Route Maps • Flow-Based Monitoring Support for ACLs • Configuring UDF ACL • Configuring IP Mirror Access Group IP Access Control Lists (ACLs) I
CAM Usage The following section describes CAM allocation and CAM optimization. • User Configurable CAM Allocation • CAM Optimization User Configurable CAM Allocation Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs by using the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode. The CAM space is allotted in filter processor (FP) blocks. The total space allocated must equal 13 FP blocks. (There are 16 FP blocks, but System Flow requires three blocks that cannot be reallocated.
If counters are enabled on ACL rules that are already configured, those counters are reset when a new rule which is inserted or prepended or appended requires a hardware shift in the flow table. Resetting the counters to 0 is transient as the proginal counter values are retained after a few seconds. If there is no need to shift the flow in the hardware, the counters are not affected.
Dell(conf-policy-map-in)#service-queue 4 class-map cmap2 Dell(conf-policy-map-in)#exit Dell(conf)#interface te 10/1 Dell(conf-if-te-10/1)#service-policy input pmap Important Points to Remember • For route-maps with more than one match clause: • Two or more match clauses within the same route-map sequence have the same match commands (though the values are different), matching a packet against these clauses is a logical OR operation.
You can create multiple instances of this route map by using the sequence number option to place the route maps in the correct order. Dell Networking OS processes the route maps with the lowest sequence number first. When a configured route map is applied to a command, such as redistribute, traffic passes through all instances of that route map until a match is found. The following is an example with two instances of a route map. The following example shows matching instances of a route-map.
Example of the match Command to Match Any of Several Values The following example shows using the match command to match any of several values. Dell(conf)#route-map force permit 10 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 1000 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 2000 Dell(config-route-map)#match tag 3000 Example of the match Command to Match All Specified Values In the next example, there is a match only if a route has both of the specified characteristics.
• • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Match destination routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ip address prefix-list-name • Match destination routes specified in a prefix list (IPv6). CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode match ipv6 address prefix-list-name • Match next-hop routes specified in a prefix list (IPv4).
• Generate a tag to be added to redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set automatic-tag • Specify an OSPF area or ISIS level for redistributed routes. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set level {backbone | level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2 | stub-area} • Specify a value for the BGP route’s LOCAL_PREF attribute. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set local-preference value • Specify a value for redistributed routes.
Route maps add to that redistribution capability by allowing you to match specific routes and set or change more attributes when redistributing those routes. In the following example, the redistribute command calls the route map static ospf to redistribute only certain static routes into OSPF. According to the route map static ospf, only routes that have a next hop of Tengigabitethernet interface 1/1 and that have a metric of 255 are redistributed into the OSPF backbone area.
IP Fragment Handling Dell Networking OS supports a configurable option to explicitly deny IP fragmented packets, particularly second and subsequent packets. It extends the existing ACL command syntax with the fragments keyword for all Layer 3 rules applicable to all Layer protocols (permit/ deny ip/tcp/udp/icmp). • Both standard and extended ACLs support IP fragments. • Second and subsequent fragments are allowed because a Layer 4 rule cannot be applied to these fragments.
Example of Permitting All Packets from a Specified Host In this first example, TCP packets from host 10.1.1.1 with TCP destination port equal to 24 are permitted. All others are denied. Dell(conf)#ip access-list extended ABC Dell(conf-ext-nacl)#permit tcp host 10.1.1.
Example of Viewing the Rules of a Specific ACL on an Interface The following is an example of viewing the rules of a specific ACL on an interface. Dell#show ip accounting access-list ToOspf interface gig 1/6 Standard IP access list ToOspf seq 5 deny any seq 10 deny 10.2.0.0 /16 seq 15 deny 10.3.0.0 /16 seq 20 deny 10.4.0.0 /16 seq 25 deny 10.5.0.0 /16 seq 30 deny 10.6.0.0 /16 seq 35 deny 10.7.0.0 /16 seq 40 deny 10.8.0.0 /16 seq 45 deny 10.9.0.0 /16 seq 50 deny 10.10.0.
To view all configured IP ACLs, use the show ip accounting access-list command in EXEC Privilege mode. The following examples shows how to view a standard ACL filter sequence for an interface. Dell#show ip accounting access example interface gig 4/12 Extended IP access list example seq 15 deny udp any any eq 111 seq 20 deny udp any any eq 2049 seq 25 deny udp any any eq 31337 seq 30 deny tcp any any range 12345 12346 seq 35 permit udp host 10.21.126.225 10.4.5.0 /28 monitor 300 seq 40 permit udp host 10.21.
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] Configure Filters, UDP Packets To create a filter for UDP packets with a specified sequence number, use the following commands. 1 Create an extended IP ACL and assign it a unique name. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list extended access-list-name 2 Configure an extended IP ACL filter for UDP packets.
{deny | permit} udp {source mask | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte]] [order] [monitor [session-id]] [fragments] When you use the log keyword, the CP logs details about the packets that match. Depending on how many packets match the log entry and at what rate, the CP may become busy as it has to log these packets’ details. The following example shows an extended IP ACL in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software.
Assign an IP ACL to an Interface To pass traffic through a configured IP ACL, assign that ACL to a physical interface, a port channel interface, or a VLAN. The IP ACL is applied to all traffic entering a physical or port channel interface and the traffic is either forwarded or dropped depending on the criteria and actions specified in the ACL. The same ACL may be applied to different interfaces and that changes its functionality.
Counting ACL Hits You can view the number of packets matching the ACL by using the count option when creating ACL entries. 1 Create an ACL that uses rules with the count option. Refer to Configure a Standard IP ACL Filter. 2 Apply the ACL as an inbound or outbound ACL on an interface. 3 show ip accounting access-list EXEC Privilege mode View the number of packets matching the ACL. Configure Ingress ACLs Ingress ACLs are applied to interfaces and to traffic entering the system.
To create an egress ACL, use the ip access-group command in EXEC Privilege mode. The example shows viewing the configuration, applying rules to the newly created access group, and viewing the access list. NOTE: VRF based ACL configurations are not supported on the egress traffic. Example of Applying ACL Rules to Egress Traffic and Viewing ACL Configuration To specify ingress, use the out keyword. Begin applying rules to the ACL with the ip access-list extended abcd command.
3 Create a Layer 3 ACL using permit rules with the count option to describe the desired CPU traffic. CONFIG-NACL mode permit ip {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} count [monitor [session-id]] Dell Networking OS Behavior: Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) hellos and internet group management protocol (IGMP) packets are not affected when you enable egress ACL filtering for CPU traffic.
Creating a Prefix List To create a prefix list, use the following commands. 1 Create a prefix list and assign it a unique name. You are in PREFIX LIST mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip prefix-list prefix-name 2 Create a prefix list with a sequence number and a deny or permit action. CONFIG-NPREFIXL mode seq sequence-number {deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: • ge min-prefix-length: the minimum prefix length to match (from 0 to 32).
{deny | permit} ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] The optional parameters are: • ge min-prefix-length: is the minimum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32). • le max-prefix-length: is the maximum prefix length to be matched (0 to 32). Example of Creating a Filter with Dell Networking OS-Assigned Sequence Numbers The example shows a prefix list in which the sequence numbers were assigned by the software.
count: 4, range entries: 1, sequences: 5 - 10 Dell> Applying a Prefix List for Route Redistribution To pass traffic through a configured prefix list, use the prefix list in a route redistribution command. Apply the prefix list to all traffic redistributed into the routing process. The traffic is either forwarded or dropped, depending on the criteria and actions specified in the prefix list. To apply a filter to routes in RIP, use the following commands. • Enter RIP mode.
distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | rip | static] Example of Viewing Configured Prefix Lists (ROUTER OSPF mode) To view the configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER OSPF mode, or the show running-config ospf command in EXEC mode. Dell(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 34 network 10.2.1.1 255.255.255.255 area 0.0.0.
EXEC mode resequence prefix-list {ipv4 | ipv6} {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-Increment} Examples of Resequencing ACLs When Remarks and Rules Have the Same Number or Different Numbers Remarks and rules that originally have the same sequence number have the same sequence number after you apply the resequence command. The example shows the resequencing of an IPv4 access-list beginning with the number 2 and incrementing by 2.
Route Maps Although route maps are similar to ACLs and prefix lists in that they consist of a series of commands that contain a matching criterion and an action, route maps can modify parameters in matching packets. Implementation Information ACLs and prefix lists can only drop or forward the packet or traffic. Route maps process routes for route redistribution. For example, a route map can be called to filter only specific routes and to add a metric. Route maps also have an “implicit deny.
seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address} [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [log [threshold-in-msgs count]] [monitor session-ID] If the number of monitoring sessions increases, inter-process communication (IPC) bandwidth utilization will be high. The ACL manager might require a large bandwidth when you assign an ACL, with many entries, to an interface.
Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring is supported on the S6000 platform. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You can specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. 1 Enable flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session.
Dell# Configuring UDF ACL To configure a User Defined Field (UDF) ACL: 1 Enable UDF ACL feature on a switch. CONFIGURATION mode feature udf-acl Dell(conf)#feature udf-acl 2 Change the default CAM allocation settings or reconfigure new CAM allocation settings and enable IPV4 UDF.
VmanQos : EcfmAcl : FcoeAcl : iscsiOptAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 0 2 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Dell# 4 Create a UDF packet format in the UDF TCAM table. CONFIGURATION mode udf-tcam name seq number Dell(conf)#udf-tcam ipnip seq 1 5 Configure a UDF ID to parse packet headers using the specified number of offset and required bytes.
udf-id 1-12 value mask Dell(conf-udf-tcam-qual-val)#udf-id 1 aa ff 11 Associate the UDF qualifier value with a UDF packet profile in an IP access list. CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST mode CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST mode permit ip {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} udf-pkt-format name udf-qualifier-value name Dell(config-ext-nacl)#permit ip any any udf-pkt-format ipinip udf-qualifier-value ipnip_val1 12 View the UDF TCAM configuration.
5 Associate the IP access list to an interface. INTERFACE mode ip mirror-access-group access-list-name {in | out} [implicit-permit] [vlan vlan-id] [optimized] Dell(conf-if-te-0/4)#ip mirror-access-group acl3 in To view which IP mirror-access-group is applied to an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode, or use the show running-config command in EXEC mode.
8 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) BFD is a protocol that is used to rapidly detect communication failures between two adjacent systems. It is a simple and lightweight replacement for existing routing protocol link state detection mechanisms. It also provides a failure detection solution for links on which no routing protocol is used. BFD is a simple hello mechanism. Two neighboring systems running BFD establish a session using a three-way handshake.
BFD Packet Format Control packets are encapsulated in user datagram protocol (UDP) packets. The following illustration shows the complete encapsulation of a BFD control packet inside an IPv4 packet. Figure 9. BFD in IPv4 Packet Format Field Description Diagnostic Code The reason that the last session failed. State The current local session state. Refer to BFD Sessions. Flag A bit that indicates packet function.
Field Description Detection Multiplier The number of packets that must be missed in order to declare a session down. Length The entire length of the BFD packet. My Discriminator A random number generated by the local system to identify the session. Your Discriminator A random number generated by the remote system to identify the session. Discriminator values are necessary to identify the session to which a control packet belongs because there can be many sessions running on a single interface.
Demand mode If one system requests Demand mode, the other system stops sending periodic control packets; it only sends a response to status inquiries from the Demand mode initiator. Either system (but not both) can request Demand mode at any time. NOTE: Dell Networking OS supports Asynchronous mode only. A session can have four states: Administratively Down, Down, Init, and Up. State Description Administratively Down The local system does not participate in a particular session.
Figure 10.
Session State Changes The following illustration shows how the session state on a system changes based on the status notification it receives from the remote system. For example, if a session on a system is down and it receives a Down status notification from the remote system, the session state on the local system changes to Init. Figure 11.
• • • • • Configure BFD for IS-IS Configure BFD for BGP Configure BFD for VRRP Configuring Protocol Liveness Troubleshooting BFD Configure BFD for Physical Ports Configuring BFD for physical ports is supported on the C-Series and E-Series platforms only. BFD on physical ports is useful when you do not enable the routing protocol. Without BFD, if the remote system fails, the local system does not remove the connected route until the first failed attempt to send a packet.
Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 2.2.2.1 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:09:c3:e5 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
2 Configure static routes on both routers on the system (either local or remote). 3 Configure an IP route to connect BFD on the static routes using the ip route bfd command. Related Configuration Tasks • Changing Static Route Session Parameters • Disabling BFD for Static Routes Establishing Sessions for Static Routes Sessions are established for all neighbors that are the next hop of a static route. Figure 12.
Establishing Static Route Sessions on Specific Neighbors You can selectively enable BFD sessions on specific neighbors based on a destination prefix-list. When you establish a BFD session using the ip route bfd command, all the next-hop neighbors in the static route become part of the BFD session. Starting with Dell Networking OS release 9.11.0.0, you can enable BFD sessions on specific next-hop neighbors. You can specify the next-hop neighbors to be part of a BFD session by including them in a prefix-list.
CONFIGURATION mode ip route bfd [prefix-list prefix-list-name] interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] To view session parameters, use the show bfd neighbors detail command, as shown in the examples in Displaying BFD for BGP Information Disabling BFD for Static Routes If you disable BFD, all static route BFD sessions are torn down. A final Admin Down packet is sent to all neighbors on the remote systems, and those neighbors change to the Down state.
Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors BFD sessions can be established with all OSPF neighbors at once or sessions can be established with all neighbors out of a specific interface. Sessions are only established when the OSPF adjacency is in the Full state. Figure 13. Establishing Sessions with OSPF Neighbors To establish BFD with all OSPF neighbors or with OSPF neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all OSPF neighbors.
The bold line shows the OSPF BFD sessions. R2(conf-router_ospf)#bfd all-neighbors R2(conf-router_ospf)#do show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 * 2.2.3.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 O 2.2.3.2 Te 2/2 Up 100 100 3 O Changing OSPF Session Parameters Configure BFD sessions with default intervals and a default role.
Configure BFD for OSPFv3 BFD for OSPFv3 provides support for IPV6. Configuring BFD for OSPFv3 is a two-step process: 1 Enable BFD globally. 2 Establish sessions with OSPFv3 neighbors. NOTE: BFD for OSPFv3 with ECMP is not supported. Related Configuration Tasks • Changing OSPFv3 Session Parameters • Disabling BFD for OSPFv3 Establishing Sessions with OSPFv3 Neighbors You can establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors at once or with all neighbors out of a specific interface.
INTERFACE mode ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors interval milliseconds min_rx milliseconds multiplier value role [active | passive] Disabling BFD for OSPFv3 If you disable BFD globally, all sessions are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state. If you disable BFD on an interface, sessions on the interface are torn down and sessions on the remote system are placed in a Down state.
Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all IS-IS neighbors at once or sessions can be established for all neighbors out of a specific interface. Figure 14. Establishing Sessions with IS-IS Neighbors To establish BFD with all IS-IS neighbors or with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface, use the following commands. • Establish sessions with all IS-IS neighbors. ROUTER-ISIS mode • bfd all-neighbors Establish sessions with IS-IS neighbors on a single interface.
Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr * 2.2.2.2 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.2.1 Te 2/1 Up 100 100 3 I Changing IS-IS Session Parameters BFD sessions are configured with default intervals and a default role. The parameters that you can configure are: Desired TX Interval, Required Min RX Interval, Detection Multiplier, and system role. These parameters are configured for all IS-IS sessions or all IS-IS sessions out of an interface.
Prerequisites Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure the following settings: 1 Configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect, as described in Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4). 2 Enable fast fall-over for BGP neighbors to reduce convergence time (the neighbor fall-over command), as described in BGP Fast Fall-Over. Establishing Sessions with BGP Neighbors Before configuring BFD for BGP, you must first configure BGP on the routers that you want to interconnect.
BFD notifies BGP of any failure conditions that it detects on the link. Recovery actions are initiated by BGP. BFD for BGP is supported only on directly-connected BGP neighbors and only in BGP IPv4 networks. Up to 128 simultaneous BFD sessions are supported As long as each BFD for BGP neighbor receives a BFD control packet within the configured BFD interval for failure detection, the BFD session remains up and BGP maintains its adjacencies.
The BGP link with the neighbor returns to normal operation and uses the BFD session parameters globally configured with the bfd allneighbors command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. • Disable a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor. ROUTER BGP mode neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} bfd disable • Remove the disabled state of a BFD for BGP session with a specified neighbor.
EXEC Privilege mode show ip bgp neighbors [ip-address] Examples of Verifying BGP Information The following example shows verifying a BGP configuration. R2# show running-config bgp ! router bgp 2 neighbor 1.1.1.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 1.1.1.2 no shutdown neighbor 2.2.2.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 2.2.2.2 no shutdown neighbor 3.3.3.2 remote-as 1 neighbor 3.3.3.2 no shutdown bfd all-neighbors The following example shows viewing all BFD neighbors.
Session Discriminator: 10 Neighbor Discriminator: 11 Local Addr: 2.2.2.3 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:66:da:34 Remote Addr: 2.2.2.
BGP table version is 0, main routing table version 0 BFD is enabled, Interval 100 Min_rx 100 Multiplier 3 Role Active 3 neighbor(s) using 24168 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 1.1.1.2 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.2 0 0 0 1 1 1 282 273 282 281 273 281 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) 0 00:38:12 04:32:26 00:38:12 The following example shows viewing BFD information for a specified neighbor.
R2# show ip bgp neighbors 2.2.2.4 BGP neighbor is 2.2.2.4, remote AS 1, external link Member of peer-group pg1 for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 12.0.0.4 BGP state ESTABLISHED, in this state for 00:05:33 ... Neighbor is using BGP peer-group mode BFD configuration Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization ... Configure BFD for VRRP When using BFD with VRRP, the VRRP protocol registers with the BFD manager on the route processor module (RPM).
Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors BFD sessions can be established for all VRRP neighbors at once, or a session can be established with a particular neighbor. Figure 16. Establishing Sessions with All VRRP Neighbors To establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors, use the following command. • Establish sessions with all VRRP neighbors.
The bold line shows that VRRP BFD sessions are enabled. Dell(conf-if-te-4/25)#vrrp bfd all-neighbors Dell(conf-if-te-4/25)#do show bfd neighbor * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) V - VRRP LocalAddr * 2.2.5.1 RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult Clients 2.2.5.2 Te 4/25 Down 1000 1000 3 V To view session state information, use the show vrrp command. The bold line shows the VRRP BFD session.
To disable all VRRP sessions on an interface, sessions for a particular VRRP group, or for a particular VRRP session on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable all VRRP sessions on an interface. INTERFACE mode • no vrrp bfd all-neighbors Disable all VRRP sessions in a VRRP group. VRRP mode • bfd disable Disable a particular VRRP session on an interface.
00:54:38: %RPM0-P:RP2 %BFDMGR-1-BFD_STATE_CHANGE: Changed session state to Up for neighbor 2.2.2.2 on interface Te 4/24 (diag: 0) The following example shows hexadecimal output from the debug bfd packet command. RX packet dump: 20 c0 03 18 00 00 00 05 00 00 00 04 00 01 86 a0 00 01 86 a0 00 00 00 00 00:34:13 : Sent packet for session with neighbor 2.2.2.2 on Te 4/24 TX packet dump: 20 c0 03 18 00 00 00 04 00 00 00 05 00 01 86 a0 00 01 86 a0 00 00 00 00 00:34:14 : Received packet for session with neighbor 2.
9 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) This chapter provides a general description of BGPv4 as it is supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). BGP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter. BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). The primary function of the BGP is to exchange network reachability information with other BGP systems.
Protocol). IBGP provides routers inside the AS with the knowledge to reach routers external to the AS. EBGP routers exchange information with other EBGP routers as well as IBGP routers to maintain connectivity and accessibility. Figure 17. Internal BGP BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and aggregate routes and AS paths. BGP is a path vector protocol — a computer network in which BGP maintains the path that updated information takes as it diffuses through the network.
Figure 18. BGP Routers in Full Mesh The number of BGP speakers each BGP peer must maintain increases exponentially. Network management quickly becomes impossible. Sessions and Peers When two routers communicate using the BGP protocol, a BGP session is started. The two end-points of that session are Peers. A Peer is also called a Neighbor. Establish a Session Information exchange between peers is driven by events and timers. The focus in BGP is on the traffic routing policies.
State Description Idle BGP initializes all resources, refuses all inbound BGP connection attempts, and initiates a TCP connection to the peer. Connect In this state the router waits for the TCP connection to complete, transitioning to the OpenSent state if successful. If that transition is not successful, BGP resets the ConnectRetry timer and transitions to the Active state when the timer expires. Active The router resets the ConnectRetry timer to zero and returns to the Connect state.
Figure 19. BGP Router Rules 1 Router B receives an advertisement from Router A through eBGP. Because the route is learned through eBGP, Router B advertises it to all its iBGP peers: Routers C and D. 2 Router C receives the advertisement but does not advertise it to any peer because its only other peer is Router D, an iBGP peer, and Router D has already learned it through iBGP from Router B.
Best Path Selection Criteria Paths for active routes are grouped in ascending order according to their neighboring external AS number (BGP best path selection is deterministic by default, which means the bgp non-deterministic-med command is NOT applied). The best path in each group is selected based on specific criteria. Only one “best path” is selected at a time. If any of the criteria results in more than one path, BGP moves on to the next option in the list.
a An AS_SET has a path length of 1, no matter how many ASs are in the set. b A path with no AS_PATH configured has a path length of 0. c AS_CONFED_SET is not included in the AS_PATH length. d AS_CONFED_SEQUENCE has a path length of 1, no matter how many ASs are in the AS_CONFED_SEQUENCE. 5 Prefer the path with the lowest ORIGIN type (IGP is lower than EGP, and EGP is lower than INCOMPLETE). 6 Prefer the path with the lowest multi-exit discriminator (MED) attribute.
shorter (one hop instead of two), the LOCAL_PREF settings have the preferred path go through Router B and AS300. This is advertised to all routers within AS100, causing all BGP speakers to prefer the path through Router B. Figure 21. BGP Local Preference Multi-Exit Discriminators (MEDs) If two ASs connect in more than one place, a multi-exit discriminator (MED) can be used to assign a preference to a preferred path.
Figure 22. Multi-Exit Discriminators NOTE: Configuring the set metric-type internal command in a route-map advertises the IGP cost as MED to outbound EBGP peers when redistributing routes. The configured set metric value overwrites the default IGP cost. If the outbound route-map uses MED, it overwrites IGP MED. Origin The origin indicates the origin of the prefix, or how the prefix came into BGP. There are three origin codes: IGP, EGP, INCOMPLETE.
AS Path The AS path is the list of all ASs that all the prefixes listed in the update have passed through. The local AS number is added by the BGP speaker when advertising to a eBGP neighbor. NOTE: Any update that contains the AS path number 0 is valid. The AS path is shown in the following example. The origin attribute is shown following the AS path information (shown in bold).
MBGP uses either an IPv4 address configured on the interface (which is used to establish the IPv6 session) or a stable IPv4 address that is available in the box as the next-hop address. As a result, while advertising an IPv6 network, exchange of IPv4 routes does not lead to martian next-hop message logs. NOTE: It is possible to configure BGP peers that exchange both unicast and multicast network layer reachability information (NLRI), but you cannot connect multiprotocol BGP with BGP.
Ignore Router-ID in Best-Path Calculation You can avoid unnecessary BGP best-path transitions between external paths under certain conditions. The bgp bestpath routerid ignore command reduces network disruption caused by routing and forwarding plane changes and allows for faster convergence. Four-Byte AS Numbers You can use the 4-Byte (32-bit) format when configuring autonomous system numbers (ASNs). The 4-Byte support is advertised as a new BGP capability (4-BYTE-AS) in the OPEN message.
ASDOT representation combines the ASPLAIN and ASDOT+ representations. AS numbers less than 65536 appear in integer format (asplain); AS numbers equal to or greater than 65536 appear in the decimal format (asdot+). For example, the AS number 65526 appears as 65526 and the AS number 65546 appears as 1.10. Dynamic AS Number Notation Application Dell Networking OS applies the ASN notation type change dynamically to the running-config statements.
Dell(conf-router_bgp)#sho conf ! router bgp 100 neighbor 172.30.1.250 local-as 65057 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do show ip bgp BGP table version is 28093, local router ID is 172.30.1.57 AS Number Migration With this feature you can transparently change the AS number of an entire BGP network and ensure that the routes are propagated throughout the network while the migration is in progress.
3 Prepend "65001 65002" to as-path. Local-AS is prepended before the route-map to give an impression that update passed through a router in AS 200 before it reached Router B. BGP4 Management Information Base (MIB) The FORCE10-BGP4-V2-MIB enhances support for BGP management information base (MIB) with many new simple network management protocol (SNMP) objects and notifications (traps) defined in draft-ietf-idr-bgp4-mibv2-05. To see these enhancements, download the MIB from the Dell website.
• Multiple BPG process instances are not supported. Thus, the f10BgpM2PeerInstance field in various tables is not used to locate a peer. • Multiple instances of the same NLRI in the BGP RIB are not supported and are set to zero in the SNMP query response. • The f10BgpM2NlriIndex and f10BgpM2AdjRibsOutIndex fields are not used. • Carrying MPLS labels in BGP is not supported. The f10BgpM2NlriOpaqueType and f10BgpM2NlriOpaquePointer fields are set to zero. • 4-byte ASN is supported.
Item Default suppress = 2000 max-suppress-time = 60 minutes external distance = 20 Distance internal distance = 200 local distance = 200 keepalive = 60 seconds Timers holdtime = 180 seconds Add-path Disabled Enabling BGP By default, BGP is not enabled on the system. Dell Networking OS supports one autonomous system (AS) and assigns the AS number (ASN). To establish BGP sessions and route traffic, configure at least one BGP neighbor or peer.
Disable 4-Byte support and return to the default 2-Byte format by using the no bgp four-octet-as-support command. You cannot disable 4-Byte support if you currently have a 4-Byte ASN configured. b Disabling 4-Byte AS numbers also disables ASDOT and ASDOT+ number representation. All AS numbers are displayed in ASPLAIN format. Enable IPv4 multicast or IPv6 mode. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode address-family [ipv4 | ipv6} vrf Use this command to enter BGP for IPv6 mode (CONF-ROUTER_BGPv6_AF).
The following example shows the show ip bgp summary command output (4–byte AS number displays). R2#show ip bgp summary BGP router identifier 192.168.10.2, local AS number 48735.
BGP state IDLE, in this state for 17:12:40 Last read 17:12:40, hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 0 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue Sent 0 messages, 0 notifications, 0 in queue Received 0 updates, Sent 0 updates Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 0, neighbor version 0 0 accepted prefixes consume 0 bytes Prefix advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 0; dropped 0 Last reset never No activ
To configure AS4 number representations, use the following commands. • Enable ASPLAIN AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asplain NOTE: ASPLAIN is the default method Dell Networking OS uses and does not appear in the configuration display. • Enable ASDOT AS Number representation. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp asnotation asdot • Enable ASDOT+ AS Number representation.
Configuring Peer Groups To configure multiple BGP neighbors at one time, create and populate a BGP peer group. An advantage of peer groups is that members of a peer group inherit the configuration properties of the group and share same update policy. A maximum of 256 peer groups are allowed on the system. Create a peer group by assigning it a name, then adding members to the peer group. After you create a peer group, you can configure route policies for it.
When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is zanzibar, peer-group internal, Number of peers in this group 26 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 10.68.160.1 10.68.161.1 10.68.162.1 10.68.163.1 10.68.164.1 10.68.165.1 10.68.166.1 10.68.167.1 10.68.168.1 10.68.169.1 10.68.170.1 10.68.171.1 10.68.172.1 10.68.173.1 10.68.174.1 10.68.175.1 10.68.176.1 10.68.177.1 10.68.178.1 10.68.179.1 10.68.180.1 10.68.181.1 10.68.182.1 10.68.183.
BGP neighbor is 100.100.100.100, remote AS 65517, internal link Member of peer-group test for session parameters BGP version 4, remote router ID 30.30.30.
neighbor 100.100.100.100 no shutdown Dell# Configuring Passive Peering When you enable a peer-group, the software sends an OPEN message to initiate a TCP connection. If you enable passive peering for the peer group, the software does not send an OPEN message, but it responds to an OPEN message. When a BGP neighbor connection with authentication configured is rejected by a passive peer-group, Dell Networking OS does not allow another passive peer-group on the same subnet to connect with the BGP neighbor.
• No Prepend: specifies that local AS values are not prepended to announcements from the neighbor. Format: IP Address: A.B.C.D. You must Configure Peer Groups before assigning it to an AS. This feature is not supported on passive peer groups. Example of the Verifying that Local AS Numbering is Disabled The first line in bold shows the actual AS number. The second two lines in bold show the local AS number (6500) maintained during migration.
router bgp 65123 bgp router-id 192.168.10.2 network 10.10.21.0/24 network 10.10.32.0/24 network 100.10.92.0/24 network 192.168.10.0/24 bgp four-octet-as-support neighbor 10.10.21.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.21.1 filter-list Laura in neighbor 10.10.21.1 no shutdown neighbor 10.10.32.3 remote-as 65123 neighbor 10.10.32.3 no shutdown neighbor 100.10.92.9 remote-as 65192 neighbor 100.10.92.9 local-as 6500 neighbor 100.10.92.9 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.10.1 remote-as 65123 neighbor 192.168.10.
• The default is 120 seconds. Set maximum time to retain the restarting peer’s stale paths. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [stale-path-time time-in-seconds] • The default is 360 seconds. Local router supports graceful restart as a receiver only. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp graceful-restart [role receiver-only] Enabling Neighbor Graceful Restart BGP graceful restart is active only when the neighbor becomes established. Otherwise, it is disabled.
To configure an AS-PATH ACL to filter a specific AS_PATH value, use these commands in the following sequence. 1 Assign a name to a AS-PATH ACL and enter AS-PATH ACL mode. CONFIGURATION mode ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2 Enter the parameter to match BGP AS-PATH for filtering. CONFIG-AS-PATH mode {deny | permit} filter parameter This is the filter that is used to match the AS-path. The entries can be any format, letters, numbers, or regular expressions.
Regular Expressions as Filters Regular expressions are used to filter AS paths or community lists. A regular expression is a special character used to define a pattern that is then compared with an input string. For an AS-path access list, as shown in the previous commands, if the AS path matches the regular expression in the access list, the route matches the access list. The following lists the regular expressions accepted in Dell Networking OS.
Dell(config-as-path)#deny 32$ Dell(config-as-path)#ex Dell(conf)#router bgp 99 Dell(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor AAA filter-list Eagle in Dell(conf-router_bgp)#show conf ! router bgp 99 neighbor AAA peer-group neighbor AAA filter-list Eaglein neighbor AAA no shutdown neighbor 10.155.15.2 remote-as 32 neighbor 10.155.15.2 filter-list 1 in neighbor 10.155.15.
Enabling Additional Paths The add-path feature is disabled by default. NOTE: Dell Networking OS recommends not using multipath and add path simultaneously in a route reflector. To allow multiple paths sent to peers, use the following commands. 1 Allow the advertisement of multiple paths for the same address prefix without the new paths replacing any previous ones. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp add-path [both|received|send] path-count count The range is from 2 to 64.
• • • • • local-AS: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED. no-advertise: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_ADVERTISE. no-export: routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT. quote-regexp: then any number of regular expressions. The software applies all regular expressions in the list. regexp: then a regular expression.
deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny deny Dell# 701:20 702:20 703:20 704:20 705:20 14551:20 701:112 702:112 703:112 704:112 705:112 14551:112 701:667 702:667 703:667 704:666 705:666 14551:666 Filtering Routes with Community Lists To use an IP community list or IP extended community list to filter routes, you must apply a match community filter to a route map and then apply that route map to a BGP neighbor or peer group.
Manipulating the COMMUNITY Attribute In addition to permitting or denying routes based on the values of the COMMUNITY attributes, you can manipulate the COMMUNITY attribute value and send the COMMUNITY attribute with the route information. By default, Dell Networking OS does not send the COMMUNITY attribute. To send the COMMUNITY attribute to BGP neighbors, use the following command. • Enable the software to send the router’s COMMUNITY attribute to the BGP neighbor or peer group specified.
Example of the show ip bgp community Command To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. To view a route map configuration, use the show route-map command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view BGP routes matching a certain community number or a pre-defined BGP community, use the show ip bgp community command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell>show ip bgp community BGP table version is 3762622, local router ID is 10.114.8.
• Change the LOCAL_PREF value. CONFIG-ROUTER-BGP mode bgp default local-preference value • value: the range is from 0 to 4294967295. The default is 100. To view the BGP configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show runningconfig bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode. A more flexible method for manipulating the LOCAL_PREF attribute value is to use a route map. 1 Enter the ROUTE-MAP mode and assign a name to a route map.
• If you do not use the all keyword, the next hop of only eBGP-learned routes is updated by the route reflector. If you use the all keyword, the next hop of both eBGP- and iBGP-learned routes are updated by the route reflector. Sets the next hop address. CONFIG-ROUTE-MAP mode set next-hop ip-address If the set next-hop command is applied on the out-bound interface using a route map, it takes precedence over the neighbor next-hop-self command.
NOTE: Dell Networking OS supports up to 255 characters in a set community statement inside a route map. NOTE: You can create inbound and outbound policies. Each of the commands used for filtering has in and out parameters that you must apply. In Dell Networking OS, the order of preference varies depending on whether the attributes are applied for inbound updates or outbound updates.
• If none of the routes match any of the filters in the prefix list, the route is denied. This action is called an implicit deny. (If you want to forward all routes that do not match the prefix list criteria, you must configure a prefix list filter to permit all routes. For example, you could have the following filter as the last filter in your prefix list permit 0.0.0.0/0 le 32). • After a route matches a filter, the filter’s action is applied. No additional filters are applied to the route.
ip as-path access-list as-path-name 2 Create a AS-PATH ACL filter with a deny or permit action. AS-PATH ACL mode {deny | permit} as-regular-expression 3 Return to CONFIGURATION mode. AS-PATH ACL exit 4 Enter ROUTER BGP mode. CONFIGURATION mode router bgp as-number 5 Filter routes based on the criteria in the configured route map.
To view a route reflector configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode or the show running-config bgp in EXEC Privilege mode. Aggregating Routes Dell Networking OS provides multiple ways to aggregate routes in the BGP routing table. At least one specific route of the aggregate must be in the routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. To aggregate routes, use the following command.
To view the configuration, use the show config command in CONFIGURATION ROUTER BGP mode. Enabling Route Flap Dampening When EBGP routes become unavailable, they “flap” and the router issues both WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices. A flap is when a route: • is withdrawn • is readvertised after being withdrawn • has an attribute change The constant router reaction to the WITHDRAWN and UPDATE notices causes instability in the BGP process.
• • reuse: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is less than the reuse value, the flapping route is once again advertised (or no longer suppressed). The default is 750. • suppress: the range is from 1 to 20000. This number is compared to the flapping route’s Penalty value. If the Penalty value is greater than the suppress value, the flapping route is no longer advertised (that is, it is suppressed). The default is 2000.
BGP table version is 855562, main routing table version 780266 122836 network entrie(s) and 221664 paths using 29697640 bytes of memory 34298 BGP path attribute entrie(s) using 1920688 bytes of memory 29577 BGP AS-PATH entrie(s) using 1384403 bytes of memory 184 BGP community entrie(s) using 7616 bytes of memory Dampening enabled. 0 history paths, 0 dampened paths, 0 penalized paths Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer 10.114.8.34 18508 82883 79977 780266 10.114.8.
To reset a BGP connection using BGP soft reconfiguration, use the clear ip bgp command in EXEC Privilege mode at the system prompt. When you enable soft-reconfiguration for a neighbor and you execute the clear ip bgp soft in command, the update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are reevaluated. With this command, the replay and update process is triggered only if a routerefresh request is not negotiated with the peer.
2 In ROUTER BGP mode, enter the following command: ROUTER BGP Mode shutdown all You can use the no shutdown all command in the ROUTER BGP mode to re-enable all the BGP interface. You can also enable or disable BGP neighbors corresponding to the IPv4 unicast or multicast groups and the IPv6 unicast groups.
NOTE: This behavior applies to all BGP neighbors. Meaning, BGP neighbors that were explicitly disabled before global shutdown also remain in disabled state. Enable these neighbors individually using the no shutdown command. Route Map Continue The BGP route map continue feature, continue [sequence-number], (in ROUTE-MAP mode) allows movement from one routemap entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number).
• If the peer has not been activated in any AFI/SAFI, the peer remains in Idle state. Most Dell Networking OS BGP IPv4 unicast commands are extended to support the IPv4 multicast RIB using extra options to the command. For a detailed description of the MBGP commands, refer to the Dell Networking OS Command Line Interface Reference Guide. • Enables support for the IPv4 multicast family on the BGP node.
debug ip bgp {ip-address | peer-group-name} soft-reconfiguration To enhance debugging of soft reconfig, use the bgp soft-reconfig-backup command only when route-refresh is not negotiated to avoid the peer from resending messages. In-BGP is shown using the show ip protocols command. Dell Networking OS displays debug messages on the console. To view which debugging commands are enabled, use the show debugging command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Last notification (len 21) received 00:26:20 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00150306 00000000 Last PDU (len 41) received 00:26:02 ago that caused notification to be issued ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00290200 00000e01 02040201 00024003 04141414 0218c0a8 01000000 Local host: 1.1.1.1, Local port: 179 Foreign host: 1.1.1.2, Foreign port: 41758 Capturing PDUs To capture incoming and outgoing PDUs on a per-peer basis, use the capture bgp-pdu neighbor direction command.
Incoming packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 172.30.1.250 Available buffer size 29165743, 192991 packet(s) captured using 11794257 bytes [. . .] Dell(conf-router_bgp)#do sho ip bg s BGP router identifier 172.30.1.
Example of Enabling BGP (Router 1) R1# conf R1(conf)#int loop 0 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#ip address 192.168.128.1/24 R1(conf-if-lo-0)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#show config ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 192.168.128.1/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 1/21 R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#ip address 10.0.1.21/24 R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 1/21 ip address 10.0.1.21/24 no shutdown R1(conf-if-te-1/21)#int te 1/31 R1(conf-if-te-1/31)#ip address 10.0.3.
R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 no shut R1(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.3 update-source loop 0 R1(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 99 network 192.168.128.0/24 neighbor 192.168.128.2 remote-as 99 neighbor 192.168.128.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.128.2 no shutdown neighbor 192.168.128.3 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.128.
! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/11 ip address 10.0.3.33/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-lo-0)#int te 3/21 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#ip address 10.0.2.3/24 R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#show config ! interface TengigabitEthernet 3/21 ip address 10.0.2.3/24 no shutdown R3(conf-if-te-3/21)# R3(conf-if-te-3/21)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#show config ! router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)#network 192.168.128.0/24 R3(conf-router_bgp)#neighbor 192.168.128.
MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Update source set to Loopback 0 Peer active in peer-group outbound optimization For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP table version 1, neighbor version 1 Prefixes accepted 1 (consume 4 bytes), withdrawn 0 by peer Prefixes advertised 1, denied 0, withdrawn 0 from peer Connections established 2; dropped 1 Last reset 00:00:57, due to user reset Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 Last notification (len 21) sent 00:00:57 ago fffffff
2 neighbor(s) using 9216 bytes of memory Neighbor AS MsgRcvd MsgSent TblVer InQ OutQ Up/Down State/Pfx 192.168.128.1 99 140 136 2 0 (0) 00:11:24 1 192.168.128.3 100 138 140 2 0 (0) 00:18:31 1 Example of Enabling Peer Groups (Router 3) R3#conf R3(conf)#router bgp 100 R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor AAA no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC peer-group R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor CCC no shutdown R3(conf-router_bgp)# neighbor 192.168.128.
Last read 00:00:45, last write 00:00:44 Hold time is 180, keepalive interval is 60 seconds Received 138 messages, 0 in queue 7 opens, 2 notifications, 7 updates 122 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Sent 140 messages, 0 in queue 222 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4)
10 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) CAM is a type of memory that stores information in the form of a lookup table. On Dell Networking systems, CAM stores Layer 2 (L2) and Layer 3 (L3) forwarding information, access-lists (ACLs), flows, and routing policies. CAM Allocation CAM Allocation for Ingress To allocate the space for regions such has L2 ingress ACL, IPV4 ingress ACL, IPV6 ingress ACL, IPV4 QoS, L2 QoS, PBR, VRF ACL, and so forth, use the cam-acl command in CONFIGURATION mode.
NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 512 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 256 entries. Select 2 to configure 1024 entries.
NOTE: If you do not enter the allocation values for the CAM regions, the value is 0. 3 Execute write memory and verify that the new settings are written to the CAM on the next boot. EXEC Privilege mode show cam-acl 4 Reload the system. EXEC Privilege mode reload Test CAM Usage To determine whether sufficient CAM space is available to enable a service-policy, use the test-cam-usage command.
Example of show running-config cam-profile Command Dell#show running-config cam-profile ! cam-profile default microcode default Dell# View CAM-ACL Settings The show cam-acl command shows the cam-acl setting that will be loaded after the next reload.
L2Acl Ipv4Acl Ipv6Acl Ipv4Qos L2Qos L2PT IpMacAcl VmanQos VmanDualQos EcfmAcl FcoeAcl iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 6 4 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 -- Stack unit 7 -Current Settings(in bloc
0 0 | | | | | | | | | | | | | 7 | 0 | | | | | | | | | | | Codes: * - cam usage Dell# IN-L3 ACL | IN-V6 ACL | IN-L2 ACL | OUT-L3 ACL | IN-L3 ECMP GRP| OUT-V6 ACL | OUT-L2 ACL | IN-L3 ACL | IN-V6 ACL | IN-L2 ACL | OUT-L3 ACL | OUT-V6 ACL | OUT-L2 ACL | is above 90%.
Syslog Warning Upon 90 Percent Utilization of CAM CAM utilization includes both the L3_DEFIP and L3_DEFIP_PAIR_128 table entries to calculate the utilization. Syslog Warning for Discrepancies Between Configured Extended Prefixes An error message is displayed if the number of extended prefix entries is different from the configured value during bootup.
EXEC Privilege show hardware forwarding-table mode Dell#show hardware forwarding-table mode Mode L2 MAC Entries L3 Host Entries L3 Route Entries : : : : Current Settings Default 160K 144K 16K Dell# 230 Content Addressable Memory (CAM) Next Boot Settings scaled-l3-routes 32K 16K 128K
11 Control Plane Policing (CoPP) Control plane policing (CoPP) uses access control list (ACL) rules and quality of service (QoS) policies to create filters for a system’s control plane. That filter prevents traffic not specifically identified as legitimate from reaching the system control plane, rate-limits, traffic to an acceptable level.
Figure 26. CoPP Implemented Versus CoPP Not Implemented Configure Control Plane Policing The system can process a maximum of 4200 packets per second (PPS). Protocols that share a single queue may experience flaps if one of the protocols receives a high rate of control traffic even though per protocol CoPP is applied. This happens because queue-based rate limiting is applied first.
CoPP policies are configured by creating extended ACL rules and specifying rate-limits through QoS policies. The ACLs and QoS policies are assigned as service-policies. Configuring CoPP for Protocols This section lists the commands necessary to create and enable the service-policies for CoPP. For complete information about creating ACLs and QoS rules, refer to Access Control Lists (ACLs) and Quality of Service (QoS).
8 Assign the protocol based the service policy on the control plane. Enabling this command on a port-pipe automatically enables the ACL and QoS rules creates with the cpu-qos keyword. CONTROL-PLANE mode service-policy rate-limit-protocols Examples of Configuring CoPP for Different Protocols The following example shows creating the IP/IPv6/MAC extended ACL.
Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#class-map class-ipv6 qos-policy rate_limit_200k Dell(conf-policy-map-in-cpuqos)#exit The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell(conf)#control-plane-cpuqos Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#service-policy rate-limit-protocols egressFP_rate_policy Dell(conf-control-cpuqos)#exit Configuring CoPP for CPU Queues Controlling traffic on the CPU queues does not require ACL rules, but does require QoS policies.
The following example shows creating the control plane service policy. Dell#conf Dell(conf)#control-plane Dell(conf-control-plane)#service-policy rate-limit-cpu-queues cpuq_rate_policy Protocol to CPU Queue Mapping CoPP enables you to rate-limit control-plane packets that are destined to the CPU there by, preventing undesired or malicious traffic from entering the CPU queues. You can rate-limit CPU bound traffic both on a per protocol as well as per queue basis.
CPU-PROTOCOL-GROUP protocol-list protocol1, protocol2, protocol3,..... The list of protocols that you specify using this command are associated with the protocol group that you created in Step1. 3 Exit the CPU PROTOCOL GROUP mode. CPU-PROTOCOL-GROUP exit The command prompt enters the configuration mode. 4 Create a CoPP profile. CONFIGURATION copp-profile profile-name The system enters the CoPP profile mode. 5 Assign a protocol group or a QoS policy to the CoPP profile that you have created.
Example of Viewing Queue Mapping To view the queue mapping for each configured protocol, use the show ip protocol-queue-mapping command.
12 Data Center Bridging (DCB) Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of enhancements to Ethernet local area networks used in data center environments, particularly with clustering and storage area networks.
reduced operational cost, simplified management, and easy scalability by avoiding the need to deploy separate application-specific networks. For example, instead of deploying an Ethernet network for LAN traffic, include additional storage area networks (SANs) to ensure lossless Fibre Channel traffic, and a separate InfiniBand network for high-performance inter-processor computing within server clusters, only one DCB-enabled network is required in a data center.
Figure 27. Illustration of Traffic Congestion The system supports loading two DCB_Config files: • FCoE converged traffic with priority 3. • iSCSI storage traffic with priority 4. In the Dell Networking OS, PFC is implemented as follows: • PFC is supported on specified 802.1p priority traffic (dot1p 0 to 7) and is configured per interface.
NOTE: Use the following command to enable etsacl: cam-acl l2acl 2 ipv4acl 2 ipv6acl 0 ipv4qos 0 l2qos 0 l2pt 0 ipmacacl 0 vman-qos 0 fcoeacl 2 etsacl 3. After executing this command, you must save the configuration and then reload the system. The following figure shows how ETS allows you to allocate bandwidth when different traffic types are classed according to 802.1p priority and mapped to priority groups. Figure 28.
DCBx requires the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) to provide the path to exchange DCB parameters with peer devices. Exchanged parameters are sent in organizationally specific TLVs in LLDP data units. The following LLDP TLVs are supported for DCB parameter exchange: PFC parameters PFC Configuration TLV and Application Priority Configuration TLV. ETS parameters ETS Configuration TLV and ETS Recommendation TLV.
To enable DCB with PFC buffers on a switch, enter the following commands, save the configuration, and reboot the system to allow the changes to take effect. 1 Enable DCB. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable 2 Set PFC buffering on the DCB stack unit. CONFIGURATION mode Dell(conf)#dcb enable pfc-queues NOTE: To save the pfc buffering configuration changes, save the configuration and reboot the system.
• To change the ETS bandwidth allocation configured for a priority group in a DCB map, do not modify the existing DCB map configuration. Instead, first create a new DCB map with the desired PFC and ETS settings, and apply the new map to the interfaces to override the previous DCB map settings. Then, delete the original dot1p priority-priority group mapping.
The range for priority group is from 0 to 7. Set the bandwidth in percentage. The percentage range is from 1 to 100% in units of 1%. Committed and peak bandwidth is in megabits per second. The range is from 0 to 40000. Committed and peak burst size is in kilobytes. Default is 50. The range is from 0 to 10000. The pfc on command enables priority-based flow control. 3 Specify the dot1p priority-to-priority group mapping for each priority. priority-pgid dot1p0_group_num dot1p1_group_num ...
Lossless traffic egresses out the no-drop queues. Ingress dot1p traffic from PFC-enabled interfaces is automatically mapped to the nodrop egress queues. 1 Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface type slot/port 2 Configure the port queues that will still function as no-drop queues for lossless traffic. INTERFACE mode pfc no-drop queues queue-range For the dot1p-queue assignments, refer to the dot1p Priority-Queue Assignment table.
Configuring PFC in a DCB Map A switch supports the use of a DCB map in which you configure priority-based flow control (PFC) setting. To configure PFC parameters, you must apply a DCB map on an interface. PFC Configuration Notes PFC provides flow control based on the 802.1p priorities in a converged Ethernet traffic that is received on an interface and is enabled by default when you enable DCB.
• A maximum of two PFC-enabled, lossless queues are supported on an interface. Otherwise, the reconfiguration of a default dot1p-queue assignment is rejected. • To ensure complete no-drop service, apply the same PFC parameters on all PFC-enabled peers. PFC Prerequisites and Restrictions On a switch, PFC is globally enabled by default, but not applied on specific 802.1p priorities. To enable PFC on 802.1p priorities, create a DCB map.
Example: Port A —> Port B Port C —> Port B PFC no-drop queues are configured for queues 1, 2 on Port B. PFC capability is enabled on priorities 3, 4 on PORT A and C. Port B acting as Egress During the congestion, [traffic pump on priorities 3 and 4 from PORT A and PORT C is at full line rate], PORT A and C send out the PFCs to rate the traffic limit. Egress drops are not observed on Port B since traffic flow on priorities is mapped to loss less queues.
Step Task Command Command Mode The maximum number of lossless queues globally supported on a port is 2. You cannot configure PFC no-drop queues on an interface on which a DCB map with PFC enabled has been applied, or which is already configured for PFC using the pfc priority command. Range: 0-3. Separate queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example: pfc no-drop queues 1,3 or pfc no-drop queues 2-3 Default: No lossless queues are configured.
lossy traffic is reduced and degraded. Although you can allocate a maximum buffer size, it is used only if a PFC priority is configured and applied on the interface. The number of lossless queues supported on the system is dependent on the availability of total buffers for PFC. The default configuration in the system guarantees a minimum of 52 KB per queue if all the 128 queues are congested. However, modifying the buffer allocation per queue impacts this default behavior.
Table 17. Queue Assignments 3 Internalpriority 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 3 Dot1p->Queue Mapping Configuration is retained at the default value. Default dot1p-queue mapping is, Dell#show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 Queue : 2 0 1 3 4 5 4 6 6 7 7 Interface Configurations on server connected ports. a Enable DCB globally. Dell(conf)#dcb enable b Apply PFC Priority configuration. Configure priorities on which PFC is enabled.
Performing PFC Using DSCP Bits Instead of 802.1p Bits Priority based Flow Control (PFC) is currently supported on Dell Networking OS for tagged packets based on the packet Dot1p. In certain data center deployments, VLAN configuration is avoided on the servers and all packets from the servers are untagged. These packets will carry IP header and can be differentiated based on the DSCP fields they carry on the server facing switch ports.
Operations on Untagged Packets The below is example for enabling PFC for priority 2 for tagged packets. Priority (Packet Dot1p) 2 will be mapped to PG6 on PRIO2PG setting. All other Priorities for which PFC is not enabled are mapped to default PG – PG7. Classification rules on ingress (Ingress FP CAM region) matches incoming packet-dot1p and assigns an internal priority (to select queue as per Table 1 and Table 2).
Creating an ETS Priority Group An ETS priority group specifies the range of 802.1p priority traffic to which a QoS output policy with ETS settings is applied on an egress interface. 1 Configure a DCB Map. CONFIGURATION mode dcb-map dcb-map-name The dcb-map-name variable can have a maximum of 32 characters. 2 Create an ETS priority group.
By default, all 802.1p priorities are grouped in priority group 0 and 100% of the port bandwidth is assigned to priority group 0. The complete bandwidth is equally assigned to each priority class so that each class has 12 to 13%. The maximum number of priority groups supported in ETS output policies on an interface is equal to the number of data queues (4) (8)on the port. The 802.1p priorities in a priority group can map to multiple queues.
Dell(conf-qos-policy-out)#bandwidth-percentage 100 The default is none. 3 Repeat Step 2 to configure bandwidth percentages for other priority queues on the port. QoS OUTPUT POLICY mode Dell(conf-qos-policy-out)#bandwidth-percentage 100 4 Exit QoS Output Policy Configuration mode. QoS OUTPUT POLICY mode Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)#exit 5 Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode.
• Scheduling of priority traffic: dot1p priority traffic on the switch is scheduled to the current queue mapping. dot1p priorities within the same queue must have the same traffic properties and scheduling method.
Unused bandwidth usage: Strict-priority groups: Normally, if there is no traffic or unused bandwidth for a priority group, the bandwidth allocated to the group is distributed to the other priority groups according to the bandwidth percentage allocated to each group.
• Discovers DCB configuration (such as PFC and ETS) in a peer device. • Detects DCB mis-configuration in a peer device; that is, when DCB features are not compatibly configured on a peer device and the local switch. Mis-configuration detection is feature-specific because some DCB features support asymmetric configuration. • Reconfigures a peer device with the DCB configuration from its configuration source if the peer device is willing to accept configuration.
not stored in the switch’s running configuration. On a DCBx port that is the configuration source, all PFC and application priority TLVs are enabled. ETS recommend TLVs are disabled and ETS configuration TLVs are enabled. Manual The port is configured to operate only with administrator-configured settings and does not auto-configure with DCB settings received from a DCBx peer or from an internally propagated configuration from the configuration source.
the peer link up and continues to exchange DCBx packets. If a compatible peer configuration is later received, DCBx is enabled on the port. • If there is no configuration source, a port may elect itself as the configuration source. A port may become the configuration source if the following conditions exist: • No other port is the configuration source. • The port role is auto-upstream. • The port is enabled with link up and DCBx enabled. • The port has performed a DCBx exchange with a DCBx peer.
NOTE: Because DCBx TLV processing is best effort, it is possible that CIN frames may be processed when DCBx is configured to operate in CEE mode and vice versa. In this case, the unrecognized TLVs cause the unrecognized TLV counter to increment, but the frame is processed and is not discarded. Legacy DCBx (CIN and CEE) supports the DCBx control state machine that is defined to maintain the sequence number and acknowledge the number sent in the DCBx control TLVs.
1 Configure ToR- and FCF-facing interfaces as auto-upstream ports. 2 Configure server-facing interfaces as auto-downstream ports. 3 Configure a port to operate in a configuration-source role. 4 Configure ports to operate in a manual role. 1 Enter INTERFACE Configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface type slot/port 2 Enter LLDP Configuration mode to enable DCBx operation.
6 On manual ports only: Configure the Application Priority TLVs advertised on the interface to DCBx peers. PROTOCOL LLDP mode [no] advertise DCBx-appln-tlv {fcoe | iscsi} • fcoe: enables the advertisement of FCoE in Application Priority TLVs. • iscsi: enables the advertisement of iSCSI in Application Priority TLVs. The default is Application Priority TLVs are enabled to advertise FCoE and iSCSI.
NOTE: You can configure the transmission of more than one TLV type at a time. You can only enable ETS recommend TLVs (ets-reco) if you enable ETS configuration TLVs (ets-conf). To disable TLV transmission, use the no form of the command; for example, no advertise DCBx-tlv pfc ets-reco. The default is All TLV types are enabled. 5 Configure the Application Priority TLVs that advertise on unconfigured interfaces with a manual port-role.
• Enable DCBx debugging. EXEC PRIVILEGE mode debug DCBx {all | auto-detect-timer | config-exchng | fail | mgmt | resource | sem | tlv} • all: enables all DCBx debugging operations. • auto-detect-timer: enables traces for DCBx auto-detect timers. • config-exchng: enables traces for DCBx configuration exchanges. • fail: enables traces for DCBx failures. • mgmt: enables traces for DCBx management frames. • resource: enables traces for DCBx system resource frames.
Examples of the show Commands The following example shows the show dot1p-queue mapping command. Dell(conf)# show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue : 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 3 The following example shows the show dcb command. Dell# show dcb stack-unit 0 port-set 0 DCB Status : Enabled PFC Port Count : 56 (current), 56 (configured) PFC Queue Count : 2 (current), 2 (configured) The following example shows the show qos priority-groups command.
PFC DCBx Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quanta Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x10 Remote FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Remote ISCSI PriorityMap is 0x8 0 Input TLV pkts, 1 Output TLV pkts, 0 Error pkts, 0 Pause Tx pkts, 0 Pause Rx pkts The following table describes the show interface
Fields Description Application Priority TLV: ISCSI TLV Tx Status Status of ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from local DCBx port: enabled or disabled. Application Priority TLV: Local FCOE Priority Map Priority bitmap used by local DCBx port in FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs. Application Priority TLV: Local ISCSI Priority Map Priority bitmap used by local DCBx port in ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs.
Remote is disabled Local Parameters : -----------------Local is enabled PG-grp Priority# BW-% BW-COMMITTED BW-PEAK TSA % Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) Rate(Mbps) Burst(KB) ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 3 25 ETS 1 4 25 ETS 2 0,1,2,5,6,7 50 ETS 3 4 5 6 7 Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled The following example shows the show interface et
7 0% Priority# Bandwidth 0 13% 1 13% 2 13% 3 13% 4 12% 5 12% 6 12% 7 12% Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Pkts ETS TSA ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS ETS Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV The following table describes the show interface ets detail command fields. Table 22.
Field Description Conf TLV Tx Status Status of ETS Configuration TLV advertisements: enabled or disabled. ETS TLV Statistic: Input Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs received. ETS TLV Statistic: Output Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs transmitted. ETS TLV Statistic: Error Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Error Configuration TLVs received. The following example shows the show stack-unit all stack-ports all pfc details command.
7 8 - - The following example shows the show interface DCBx detail command (IEEE).
The following table describes the show interface DCBx detail command fields. Table 23. show interface DCBx detail Command Description Field Description Interface Interface type with chassis slot and port number. Port-Role Configured DCBx port role: auto-upstream, auto-downstream, config-source, or manual. DCBx Operational Status Operational status (enabled or disabled) used to elect a configuration source and internally propagate a DCB configuration.
QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment The following section describes QoS dot1P traffic classification and assignments. DCB supports PFC, ETS, and DCBx to handle converged Ethernet traffic that is assigned to an egress queue according to the following QoS methods: Honor dot1p You can honor dot1p priorities in ingress traffic at the port or global switch level (refer to Default dot1p to Queue Mapping) using the service-class dynamic dot1p command in INTERFACE configuration mode.
dcb pfc-total-buffer-size value The buffer size range is from 0 to 3399. Default is 3088. 3 Configure the number of PFC queues. CONFIGURATION mode dcb enable pfc-queues pfc-queues The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured depends on the buffer. The default number of PFC queues in the system is one.
Figure 31. PFC and ETS Applied to LAN, IPC, and SAN Priority Traffic QoS Traffic Classification: The service-class dynamic dot1p command has been used in Global Configuration mode to map ingress dot1p frames to the queues shown in the following table. For more information, refer to QoS dot1p Traffic Classification and Queue Assignment.
dot1p Value in the Incoming Frame Priority Group Assignment 5 LAN 6 LAN 7 LAN The following describes the priority group-bandwidth assignment. Priority Group Bandwidth Assignment IPC 5% SAN 50% LAN 45% PFC and ETS Configuration Command Examples The following examples show PFC and ETS configuration commands to manage your data center traffic.
13 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) DHCP is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators.
The following table lists common DHCP options. Option Number and Description Subnet Mask Option 1 Specifies the client’s subnet mask. Router Option 3 Specifies the router IP addresses that may serve as the client’s default gateway. Domain Name Server Option 6 Domain Name Option 15 Specifies the domain name servers (DNSs) that are available to the client. Specifies the domain name that clients should use when resolving hostnames via DNS.
Option Number and Description User Port Stacking Option 230 Set the stacking option variable to provide DHCP server stack-port detail when the DHCP offer is set. End Option 255 Signals the last option in the DHCP packet. Assign an IP Address using DHCP The following section describes DHCP and the client in a network. When a client joins a network: 1 The client initially broadcasts a DHCPDISCOVER message on the subnet to discover available DHCP servers.
Implementation Information The following describes DHCP implementation. • Dell Networking implements DHCP based on RFC 2131 and RFC 3046. • IP source address validation is a sub-feature of DHCP Snooping; the Dell Networking OS uses access control lists (ACLs) internally to implement this feature and as such, you cannot apply ACLs to an interface which has IP source address validation.
Configuring the Server for Automatic Address Allocation Automatic address allocation is an address assignment method by which the DHCP server leases an IP address to a client from a pool of available addresses. An address pool is a range of IP addresses that the DHCP server may assign. The subnet number indexes the address pools. To create an address pool, follow these steps. 1 Access the DHCP server CLI context. CONFIGURATION mode ip dhcp server 2 Create an address pool and give it a name.
Excluding Addresses from the Address Pool The DHCP server assumes that all IP addresses in a DHCP address pool are available for assigning to DHCP clients. You must specify the IP address that the DHCP server should not assign to clients. To exclude an address, follow this step. • Exclude an address range from DHCP assignment. The exclusion applies to all configured pools. DHCP mode excluded-address Specifying an Address Lease Time To specify an address lease time, use the following command.
Using NetBIOS WINS for Address Resolution Windows internet naming service (WINS) is a name resolution service that Microsoft DHCP clients use to correlate host names to IP addresses within a group of networks. Microsoft DHCP clients can be one of four types of NetBIOS nodes: broadcast, peer-to-peer, mixed, or hybrid. 1 Specify the NetBIOS WINS name servers, in order of preference, that are available to Microsoft Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) clients.
Using DHCP Clear Commands To clear DHCP binding entries, address conflicts, and server counters, use the following commands. • Clear DHCP binding entries for the entire binding table. EXEC Privilege mode. • clear ip dhcp binding Clear a DHCP binding entry for an individual IP address. EXEC Privilege mode. clear ip dhcp binding ip address Configure the System to be a DHCP Client A DHCP client is a network device that requests an IP address and configuration parameters from a DHCP server.
Use the no ip address dhcp command to: • Release the IP address dynamically acquired from a DHCP server from the interface. • Disable the DHCP client on the interface so it cannot acquire a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server. • Stop DHCP packet transactions on the interface. When you enter the release dhcp command, the IP address dynamically acquired from a DHCP server is released from an interface.
• To display log messages for all DHCP packets sent and received on DHCP client interfaces, use the debug ip dhcp client packets [interface type slot/port command. • To display log message on DHCP client interfaces for IP address acquisition, IP address release, IP address and lease time renewal, and release an IP address, use the [no] debug ip dhcp client events [interface type slot/port] command.
DHCP Snooping A DHCP client can run on a switch simultaneously with the DHCP snooping feature as follows: • If you enable DHCP snooping globally on a switch and you enable a DHCP client on an interface, the trust port, source MAC address, and snooping table validations are not performed on the interface by DHCP snooping for packets destined to the DHCP client daemon. The following criteria determine packets destined for the DHCP client: • • DHCP is enabled on the interface.
• Source Address Validation Option 82 RFC 3046 (the relay agent information option, or Option 82) is used for class-based IP address assignment. The code for the relay agent information option is 82, and is comprised of two sub-options, circuit ID and remote ID. Circuit ID This is the interface on which the client-originated message is received. Remote ID This identifies the host from which the message is received. The value of this sub-option is the MAC address of the relay agent that adds Option 82.
DHCP snooping is supported on Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. DHCP snooping on Layer 2 interfaces does require a relay agent. Binding table entries are deleted when a lease expires or when the relay agent encounters a DHCPRELEASE. Line cards maintain a list of snooped VLANs. When the binding table is exhausted, DHCP packets are dropped on snooped VLANs, while these packets are forwarded across non-snooped VLANs. Because DHCP packets are dropped, no new IP address assignments are made.
ip dhcp snooping binding mac Adding a Static IPV6 DHCP Snooping Binding Table To add a static entry in the snooping database, use the following command. • Add a static entry in the snooping binding table. EXEC Privilege mode ipv6 dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ipv6 ipv6-address interface interfacetype | interface-number lease value Clearing the Binding Table To clear the binding table, use the following command. • Delete all of the entries in the binding table.
Snooping packets : 0 Packets received on snooping disabled L3 Ports Snooping packets processed on L2 vlans : 0 : 142 DHCP Binding File Details Invalid File Invalid Binding Entry Binding Entry lease expired List of Trust Ports List of DHCP Snooping Enabled Vlans List of DAI Trust ports : 0 : 0 : 0 :Te 1/4 :Vl 10 :Te 1/4 Displaying the Contents of the DHCPv6 Binding Table To display the contents of the DHCP IPv6 binding table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the binding table.
Configuring the DHCP secondary-subnet DHCP Secondary subnet feature is an extended feature of DHCP relay agent. After enabling DHCP Relay Secondary Subnet, relay agent tries to get IP Address from secondary IP Address subnet pool, only when relay agent fails to get IP Address through primary IP Address. 1 To enable all the DHCP relay secondary — subnet interfaces.
Dynamic ARP Inspection Dynamic address resolution protocol (ARP) inspection prevents ARP spoofing by forwarding only ARP frames that have been validated against the DHCP binding table. ARP is a stateless protocol that provides no authentication mechanism. Network devices accept ARP requests and replies from any device. ARP replies are accepted even when no request was sent.
Configuring Dynamic ARP Inspection To enable dynamic ARP inspection, use the following commands. 1 Enable DHCP snooping. 2 Validate ARP frames against the DHCP snooping binding table. INTERFACE VLAN mode arp inspection Examples of Viewing the ARP Information To view entries in the ARP database, use the show arp inspection database command.
Source Address Validation Using the DHCP binding table, Dell Networking OS can perform three types of source address validation (SAV). Table 25. Three Types of Source Address Validation Source Address Validation Description IP Source Address Validation Prevents IP spoofing by forwarding only IP packets that have been validated against the DHCP binding table.
DHCP MAC Source Address Validation DHCP MAC source address validation (SAV) validates a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload. Dell Networking OS ensures that the packet’s source MAC address is checked against the CHADDR field in the DHCP header only for packets from snooped VLANs. • Enable DHCP MAC SAV.
Viewing the Number of SAV Dropped Packets The following output of the show ip dhcp snooping source-address-validation discard-counters command displays the number of SAV dropped packets.
14 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) This chapter describes configuring ECMP. This chapter describes configuring ECMP. ECMP for Flow-Based Affinity ECMP for flow-based affinity includes link bundle monitoring. Configuring the Hash Algorithm TeraScale has one algorithm that is used for link aggregation groups (LAGs), ECMP, and NH-ECMP, and ExaScale can use three different algorithms for each of these features. To adjust the ExaScale behavior to match TeraScale, use the following command.
Configuring the Hash Algorithm Seed Deterministic ECMP sorts ECMPs in order even though RTM provides them in a random order. However, the hash algorithm uses as a seed the lower 12 bits of the chassis MAC, which yields a different hash result for every chassis. This behavior means that for a given flow, even though the prefixes are sorted, two unrelated chassis can select different hops.
Te 1/1 Te 1/1 Up Up 36 52 Managing ECMP Group Paths To avoid path degeneration, configure the maximum number of paths for an ECMP route that the L3 CAM can hold. When you do not configure the maximum number of routes, the CAM can hold a maximum ECMP per route. To configure the maximum number of paths, use the following command. NOTE: For the new settings to take effect, save the new ECMP settings to the startup-config (write-mem) then reload the system.
• Modify the threshold for monitoring ECMP group bundles. CONFIGURATION mode link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold {percent} The range is from 1 to 90%. • The default is 60%. Display details for an ECMP group bundle. EXEC mode show link-bundle-distribution ecmp-group ecmp-group-id The range is from 1 to 64. Viewing an ECMP Group NOTE: An ecmp-group index is generated automatically for each unique ecmp-group when you configure multipath routes to the same network.
Support for ECMP in host table ECMP support in the L3 host table is available on the system. IPv6 /128 prefix route entries and IPv4 /32 prefix entries which are moved to host table can have ECMP. For other platforms, only the IPv6 /128 prefix route entries is stored in the L3 host table without ECMP support. The software supports a command to program IPv6 /128 route prefixes in the host table. The output of show IPv6 cam command has been enhanced to include the ECMP field in the Neighbor table of Ipv6 CAM.
ipv6-over-gre-ipv6 Payload header mac-in-mac header based hashing is disabled TcpUdp Load Balancing Enabled Dell(conf)# • Packet Header parameters for the first portion of the RTAG7 hash can be controlled. By default, all the listed parameters from the Packet header are considered for hash computation. Few parameters [on demand] can be removed using the given CLIs.
Figure 34. Before Polarization Effect Router B performs the same hash as router A and all the traffic goes through the same path to router D, while no traffic is redirected to router E. Some of the anti-polarization techniques used generally to mitigate unequal traffic distribution in LAG/ECMP as follows: 1 Configuring different hash-seed values at each node - Hash seed is the primary parameter in hash computations that determine distribution of traffic among the ECMP paths.
crc32LSB xor1 of xor1 xor2 of xor2 xor4 of xor4 xor8 of xor8 xor16 CRC32_LOWER - LSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR1 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR2 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR4 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 - Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits CR16 - 16 bit XOR] Example to view show hash-algorithm: Dell(conf)#hash-algorithm ecmp flow-based-hashing crc16 Dell(co
15 FIP Snooping The Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) Transit feature is supported on Ethernet interfaces. When you enable the switch for FCoE transit, the switch functions as a FIP snooping bridge. NOTE: FIP snooping is not supported on Fibre Channel interfaces or in a switch stack.
FIP enables FCoE devices to discover one another, initialize and maintain virtual links over an Ethernet network, and access storage devices in a storage area network (SAN). FIP satisfies the Fibre Channel requirement for point-to-point connections by creating a unique virtual link for each connection between an FCoE end-device and an FCF via a transit switch. FIP provides functionality for discovering and logging into an FCF.
Figure 36. FIP Discovery and Login Between an ENode and an FCF FIP Snooping on Ethernet Bridges In a converged Ethernet network, intermediate Ethernet bridges can snoop on FIP packets during the login process on an FCF. Then, using ACLs, a transit bridge can permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF. An Ethernet bridge that provides these functions is called a FIP snooping bridge (FSB).
Figure 37. FIP Snooping on a Dell Networking Switch The following sections describe how to configure the FIP snooping feature on a switch: • Allocate CAM resources for FCoE. • Perform FIP snooping (allowing and parsing FIP frames) globally on all VLANs or on a per-VLAN basis. • To assign a MAC address to an FCoE end-device (server ENode or storage device) after a server successfully logs in, set the FCoE MAC address prefix (FC-MAP) value an FCF uses.
FIP Snooping in a Switch Stack FIP snooping supports switch stacking as follows: • A switch stack configuration is synchronized with the standby stack unit. • Dynamic population of the FCoE database (ENode, Session, and FCF tables) is synchronized with the standby stack unit. The FCoE database is maintained by snooping FIP keep-alive messages. • In case of a failover, the new master switch starts the required timers for the FCoE database tables. Timers run only on the master stack unit.
• You can configure multiple FCF-trusted interfaces in a VLAN. • When you disable FIP snooping: • • ACLs are not installed, FIP and FCoE traffic is not blocked, and FIP packets are not processed. • The existing per-VLAN and FIP snooping configuration is stored. The configuration is re-applied the next time you enable the FIP snooping feature. You must apply the CAM-ACL space for the FCoE region before enabling the FIP-Snooping feature.
Enable FIP Snooping on VLANs You can enable FIP snooping globally on a switch on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. When you enable FIP snooping on VLANs: • FIP frames are allowed to pass through the switch on the enabled VLANs and are processed to generate FIP snooping ACLs. • FCoE traffic is allowed on VLANs only after a successful virtual-link initialization (fabric login FLOGI) between an ENode and an FCF. All other FCoE traffic is dropped.
Table 27. Impact of Enabling FIP Snooping Impact Description MAC address learning MAC address learning is not performed on FIP and FCoE frames, which are denied by ACLs dynamically created by FIP snooping on server-facing ports in ENode mode. MTU auto-configuration MTU size is set to mini-jumbo (2500 bytes) when a port is in Switchport mode, the FIP snooping feature is enabled on the switch, and FIP snooping is enabled on all or individual VLANs.
4 Enable the FCoE transit feature on a switch. CONFIGURATION mode. feature fip-snooping 5 Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode or VLAN INTERFACE mode. fip-snooping enable 6 Configure the port for bridge-to-FCF links. INTERFACE mode or CONFIGURATION mode fip-snooping port-mode fcf NOTE: To disable the FCoE transit feature or FIP snooping on VLANs, use the no version of a command; for example, no feature fip-snooping or no fip-snooping enable.
Examples of the show fip-snooping Commands The following example shows the show fip-snooping sessions command.
Table 30. show fip-snooping enode Command Description Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode. ENode Interface Slot/port number of the interface connected to the ENode. FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session. FC-ID Fibre Channel session ID assigned by the FCF. The following example shows the show fip-snooping fcf command. Dell# show fip-snooping fcf FCF MAC FCF Interface VLAN FC-MAP FKA_ADV_PERIOD No.
Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 Dell(conf)# Dell# show fip-snooping statistics int tengigabitethernet 1/11 Number of Vlan Requests :1 Number of Vlan Notifications :0 Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits :1 Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits :0 Number of FLOGI :1 Number of FDISC :16 Number of FLOGO :0 Number of Enode Keep Alive :4416 Number of VN Port Keep Alive :3136 Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement :0 Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement :0 Number of FLOGI Accepts :
Field Description Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery solicit frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGI Number of FIP-snooped FLOGI request frames received on the interface. Number of FDISC Number of FIP-snooped FDISC request frames received on the interface. Number of FLOGO Number of FIP-snooped FLOGO frames received on the interface. Number of ENode Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped ENode keep-alive frames received on the interface.
FCoE Transit Configuration Example The following illustration shows a switch used as a FIP snooping bridge for FCoE traffic between an ENode (server blade) and an FCF (ToR switch). The ToR switch operates as an FCF and FCoE gateway. Figure 38. Configuration Example: FIP Snooping on a Switch In this example, DCBx and PFC are enabled on the FIP snooping bridge and on the FCF ToR switch.
Example of Configuring the ENode Server-Facing Port Dell(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# portmode hybrid Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# protocol lldp Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-lldp)# dcbx port-role auto-downstream NOTE: A port is enabled by default for bridge-ENode links.
16 Flex Hash and Optimized Boot-Up This chapter describes the Flex Hash and fast-boot enhancements. Topics: • Flex Hash Capability Overview • Configuring the Flex Hash Mechanism • Configuring Fast Boot and LACP Fast Switchover • Optimizing the Boot Time • Interoperation of Applications with Fast Boot and System States • RDMA Over Converged Ethernet (RoCE) Overview • Preserving 802.
When load balancing RRoCE packets using flex hash is enabled, the show ip flow command is disabled. Similarly, when the show ip flow command is in use (ingress port-based load balancing is disabled), the hashing of RRoCE packets is disabled. Flex hash APIs do not mask out unwanted byte values after extraction of the data from the Layer 4 headers for the offset value.
adjacency settings) is learned and installed before the traffic resumes. In a typical network scenario, a traffic disconnection of 150 seconds or more usually occurs. When you employ the optimized booting functionality, the traffic outage duration is reduced drastically.
ports to be 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces and 8 ports as 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. You must configure the switch to operate with an uplink speed of 40 Gigabit Ethernet per second. Interoperation of Applications with Fast Boot and System States This functionality is supported on the S6000 platform.
BGP Graceful Restart When the system contains one or more BGP peerings configured for BGP graceful restart, fast boot performs the following actions: • A closure of the TCP sessions is performed on all sockets corresponding to BGP sessions on which Graceful Restart has been negotiated. This behavior is to force the peer to perform the helper role so that any routes advertised by the restarting system are retained and the peering session will not go down due to BGP Hold timeout.
Changes to BGP Multipath When the system becomes active after a fast-boot restart, a change has been made to the BGP multipath and ECMP behavior. The system delays the computation and installation of additional paths to a destination into the BGP routing information base (RIB) and forwarding table for a certain period of time.
RRoCE-enabled, the packets comprise TCP and UDP packets and they can be marked with DSCP code points. Multicast is not supported in that network. RRoCE packets are received and transmitted on specific interfaces called lite-subinterfaces. These interfaces are similar to the normal Layer 3 physical interfaces except for the extra provisioning that they offer to enable the VLAN ID for encapsulation. You can configure a physical interface or a Layer 3 Port Channel interface as a lite subinterface.
17 Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) FRRP provides fast network convergence to Layer 2 switches interconnected in a ring topology, such as a metropolitan area network (MAN) or large campuses. FRRP is similar to what can be achieved with the spanning tree protocol (STP), though even with optimizations, STP can take up to 50 seconds to converge (depending on the size of network and node of failure) and may require 4 to 5 seconds to reconverge.
The Control VLAN is used to perform the health checks on the ring. The Control VLAN can always pass through all ports in the ring, including the secondary port of the Master node. Ring Status The ring failure notification and the ring status checks provide two ways to ensure the ring remains up and active in the event of a switch or port failure. Ring Checking At specified intervals, the Master node sends a ring health frame (RHF) through the ring.
Member VLAN Spanning Two Rings Connected by One Switch A member VLAN can span two rings interconnected by a common switch, in a figure-eight style topology. A switch can act as a Master node for one FRRP group and a Transit for another FRRP group, or it can be a Transit node for both rings. In the following example, FRRP 101 is a ring with its own Control VLAN, and FRRP 202 has its own Control VLAN running on another ring. A Member VLAN that spans both rings is added as a Member VLAN to both FRRP groups.
• You can run multiple physical rings on the same switch. • One Master node per ring — all other nodes are Transit. • Each node has two member interfaces — primary and secondary. • There is no limit to the number of nodes on a ring. • Master node ring port states — blocking, pre-forwarding, forwarding, and disabled. • Transit node ring port states — blocking, pre-forwarding, forwarding, and disabled. • STP disabled on ring interfaces.
Concept Explanation Ring Health-Check Frame (RHF) The Master node generates two types of RHFs. RHFs never loop the ring because they terminate at the Master node’s secondary port. • Hello RHF (HRHF) — These frames are processed only on the Master node’s Secondary port. The Transit nodes pass the HRHF through without processing it. An HRHF is sent at every Hello interval. • Topology Change RHF (TCRHF) — These frames contains ring status, keepalive, and the control and member VLAN hash.
Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Configuring the Control VLAN Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as control or member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to Layer 2. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • You can only add ring nodes to the VLAN. • A control VLAN can belong to one FRRP group only. • Tag control VLAN ports.
6 Enable FRRP. CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Configuring and Adding the Member VLANs Control and member VLANS are configured normally for Layer 2. Their status as Control or Member is determined at the FRRP group commands. For more information about configuring VLANS in Layer 2 mode, refer to the Layer 2 chapter. Be sure to follow these guidelines: • All VLANS must be in Layer 2 mode. • Tag control VLAN ports. Member VLAN ports, except the Primary/Secondary interface, can be tagged or untagged.
CONFIG-FRRP mode. no disable Setting the FRRP Timers To set the FRRP timers, use the following command. NOTE: Set the Dead-Interval time 3 times the Hello-Interval. • Enter the desired intervals for Hello-Interval or Dead-Interval times. CONFIG-FRRP mode. timer {hello-interval|dead-interval} milliseconds • Hello-Interval: the range is from 50 to 2000, in increments of 50 (default is 500). • Dead-Interval: the range is from 50 to 6000, in increments of 50 (default is 1500).
• Show the state of all FRRP groups. EXEC or EXEC PRIVELEGED mode. show frrp summary Ring ID: the range is from 1 to 255. Troubleshooting FRRP To troubleshoot FRRP, use the following information. Configuration Checks • Each Control Ring must use a unique VLAN ID. • Only two interfaces on a switch can be Members of the same control VLAN. • There can be only one Master node for any FRRP group. • You can configure FRRP on Layer 2 interfaces only.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 101 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 201 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 2/14,31 no shutdown ! protocol frrp 101 interface primary TenGigabitEthernet 2/14 secondary TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 control-vlan 101 member-vlan 201 mode transit no disable Example of R3 TRANSIT interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/14 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet
Figure 40. FRRP Ring Connecting VLT Devices You can also configure an FRRP ring where both the VLT peers are connected to the FRRP ring and the VLTi acts as the primary interface for the FRRP Master and transit nodes. This active-active FRRP configuration blocks the FRRP ring on a per VLAN or VLAN group basis enabling the configuration to spawn across different set of VLANs.
In the FRRP ring R2, the primary interface for VLT Node1 (transit node) is the VLTi. P1 is the secondary interface, which is an orphan port that is participating in the FRRP ring topology. V1 is the control VLAN through which the RFHs are exchanged indicating the health of the nodes and the FRRP ring itself. In addition to the control VLAN, multiple member VLANS are configured (for example, M11 through Mn) that carry the data traffic across the FRRP rings.
18 GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) VLAN registration protocol (GVRP), defined by the IEEE 802.1q specification, is a Layer 2 network protocol that provides for automatic VLAN configuration of switches. GVRP-compliant switches use GARP to register and deregister attribute values, such as VLAN IDs, with each other.
Configure GVRP To begin, enable GVRP. To facilitate GVRP communications, enable GVRP globally on each switch. Then, GVRP configuration is per interface on a switch-byswitch basis. Enable GVRP on each port that connects to a switch where you want GVRP information exchanged. In the following example, GVRP is configured on VLAN trunk ports. Figure 42.
Enabling GVRP Globally To configure GVRP globally, use the following command. • Enable GVRP for the entire switch. CONFIGURATION mode gvrp enable Example of Configuring GVRP Dell(conf)#protocol gvrp Dell(config-gvrp)#no disable Dell(config-gvrp)#show config ! protocol gvrp no disable Dell(config-gvrp)# To inspect the global configuration, use the show gvrp brief command. Enabling GVRP on a Layer 2 Interface To enable GVRP on a Layer 2 interface, use the following command.
Based on the configuration in the following example, the interface is not removed from VLAN 34 or VLAN 35 despite receiving a GVRP Leave message. Additionally, the interface is not dynamically added to VLAN 45 or VLAN 46, even if a GVRP Join message is received.
19 Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) Internet group management protocol (IGMP) is a Layer 3 multicast protocol that hosts use to join or leave a multicast group. Multicast is premised on identifying many hosts by a single destination IP address; hosts represented by the same IP address are a multicast group. Multicast routing protocols (such as protocol-independent multicast [PIM]) use the information in IGMP messages to discover which groups are active and to populate the multicast routing table.
leaves a multicast group by sending an IGMP message to its IGMP Querier. The querier is the router that surveys a subnet for multicast receivers and processes survey responses to populate the multicast routing table. IGMP messages are encapsulated in IP packets, as shown in the following illustration. Figure 43.
3 Any remaining hosts respond to the query according to the delay timer mechanism (refer to Adjusting Query and Response Timers). If no hosts respond (because there are none remaining in the group), the querier waits a specified period and sends another query. If it still receives no response, the querier removes the group from the list associated with forwarding port and stops forwarding traffic for that group to the subnet. IGMP Version 3 Conceptually, IGMP version 3 behaves the same as version 2.
Figure 45. IGMP Version 3–Capable Multicast Routers Address Structure Joining and Filtering Groups and Sources The following illustration shows how multicast routers maintain the group and source information from unsolicited reports. 1 The first unsolicited report from the host indicates that it wants to receive traffic for group 224.1.1.1. 2 The host’s second report indicates that it is only interested in traffic from group 224.1.1.1, source 10.11.1.1.
Figure 46. Membership Reports: Joining and Filtering Leaving and Staying in Groups The following illustration shows how multicast routers track and refresh state changes in response to group-and-specific and general queries. 1 Host 1 sends a message indicating it is leaving group 224.1.1.1 and that the included filter for 10.11.1.1 and 10.11.1.2 are no longer necessary.
Figure 47. Membership Queries: Leaving and Staying Configure IGMP Configuring IGMP is a two-step process. 1 Enable multicast routing using the ip multicast-routing command. 2 Enable a multicast routing protocol.
Viewing IGMP Enabled Interfaces Interfaces that are enabled with PIM-SM are automatically enabled with IGMP. To view IGMP-enabled interfaces, use the following command. • View IGMP-enabled interfaces. EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp interface Example of the show ip igmp interface Command Dell#show ip igmp interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/10 Inbound IGMP access group is not set Internet address is 165.87.34.
EXEC Privilege mode show ip igmp groups Example of the show ip igmp groups Command Dell# show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface 225.1.1.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 225.1.2.1 TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Mode IGMPV2 IGMPV2 Uptime 00:11:19 00:10:19 Expires 00:01:50 00:01:50 Last Reporter 165.87.34.100 165.87.31.100 Viewing IGMP Snooping Groups To view both learned and statically configured IGMP snooping groups, use the following command.
• Adjust the period between queries. INTERFACE mode ip igmp query-interval • Adjust the maximum response time. INTERFACE mode ip igmp query-max-resp-time • Adjust the last member query interval. INTERFACE mode ip igmp last-member-query-interval Enabling IGMP Immediate-Leave If the querier does not receive a response to a group-specific or group-and-source query, it sends another (querier robustness value). Then, after no response, it removes the group from the outgoing interface for the subnet.
Configuring IGMP Snooping Configuring IGMP snooping is a one-step process. To enable, view, or disable IGMP snooping, use the following commands. There is no specific configuration needed for IGMP snooping with virtual link trunking (VLT). For information about VLT configurations, refer to Virtual Link Trunking (VLT). • Enable IGMP snooping on a switch. CONFIGURATION mode ip igmp snooping enable • View the configuration. CONFIGURATION mode show running-config • Disable snooping on a VLAN.
Disabling Multicast Flooding If the switch receives a multicast packet that has an IP address of a group it has not learned (unregistered frame), the switch floods that packet out of all ports on the VLAN. When you configure the no ip igmp snooping flood command, the system drops the packets immediately. The system does not forward the frames on mrouter ports, even if they are present. Disable Layer 3 multicast (no ip multicast-routing) in order to disable multicast flooding.
before sending a second one is the last member query interval (LMQI). The switch waits one LMQI after the second query before removing the group-port entry from the forwarding table. • Adjust the last member query interval.
Protocol Separation When you configure the application application-type command to configure a set of management applications with TCP/UDP port numbers to the OS, the following table describes the association between applications and their port numbers. Table 33.
Enabling and Disabling Management Egress Interface Selection You can enable or disable egress-interface-selection using the management egress-interface-selection command. NOTE: Egress Interface Selection (EIS) works only with IPv4 routing. When the feature is enabled using the management egress-interface-selection command, the following events are performed: • The CLI prompt changes to the EIS mode.
• Any management static route newly added using the management route CLI is installed to both the management EIS routing table and default routing table. • As per existing behavior, for routes in the default routing table, conflicting front-end port routes if configured has higher precedence over management routes. So there can be scenarios where the same management route is present in the EIS routing table but not in the default routing table.
Handling of Switch-Destined Traffic • The switch processes all traffic received on the management port destined to the management port IP address or the front-end port destined to the front-end IP address. • If the source TCP/UDP port number matches a configured EIS or non-EIS management application and the source IP address is a management Port IP address, then the EIS route lookup is done for the response traffic and hence is sent out of the management port.
Table 34. Mapping of Management Applications and Traffic Type Traffic type / Application type Switch initiated traffic Switch-destined traffic Transit Traffic EIS Management Application Management is the preferred egress port selected based on route lookup in EIS table. If the management port is down or the route lookup fails, packets are dropped.
EIS Behavior: If the destination TCP/UDP port matches a configured management application, a route lookup is done in the EIS table and the management port gets selected as the egress port. If management port is down or the route lookup fails, packets are dropped. EIS Behavior for ICMP: ICMP packets do not have TCP/UDP ports. To do an EIS route lookup for ICMP-based applications (ping and traceroute) using the source ip option, the management port IP address should be specified as the source IP address.
If source IP address does not match the management port IP address route lookup is done in the default routing table. Default Behavior: Route lookup is done in the default routing table and appropriate egress port is selected. Table 36.
Designating a Multicast Router Interface To designate an interface as a multicast router interface, use the following command. Dell Networking OS also has the capability of listening in on the incoming IGMP general queries and designate those interfaces as the multicast router interface when the frames have a non-zero IP source address. All IGMP control packets and IP multicast data traffic originating from receivers is forwarded to multicast router interfaces.
20 Interfaces This chapter describes interface types, both physical and logical, and how to configure them with Dell Networking Operating System (OS). The system supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet and 40 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces. NOTE: Only Dell-qualified optics are supported on these interfaces. Non-Dell 40G optics are set to error-disabled state.
• Loopback Interfaces • Null Interfaces • Port Channel Interfaces • Bulk Configuration • Defining Interface Range Macros • Monitoring and Maintaining Interfaces • Splitting 40G Ports without Reload • Splitting QSFP Ports to SFP+ Ports • Converting a QSFP or QSFP+ Port to an SFP or SFP+ Port • Configuring wavelength for 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics • Link Dampening • Link Bundle Monitoring • Using Ethernet Pause Frames for Flow Control • Configure the MTU Size on an Interface • Port-Pi
This command has options to display the interface status, IP and MAC addresses, and multiple counters for the amount and type of traffic passing through the interface. If you configured a port channel interface, this command lists the interfaces configured in the port channel. NOTE: To end output from the system, such as the output from the show interfaces command, enter CTRL+C and Dell Networking OS returns to the command prompt.
To determine which physical interfaces are available, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode. This command displays all physical interfaces available on the system. Dell#show running Current Configuration ...
Enabling a Physical Interface After determining the type of physical interfaces available, to enable and configure the interfaces, enter INTERFACE mode by using the interface interface command. 1 Enter the keyword interface then the type of interface and slot/port information. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface 2 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
User viewable Logs: Logs for optic insertion and removal are same as QSFP optics. You can use the show inventory media command to check the optic type and the show interface transceiver command to view the optic properties.
• Enable Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface. INTERFACE mode switchport Example of a Basic Layer 2 Interface Configuration Dell(conf-if)#show config ! interface Port-channel 1 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if)# Configuring Layer 2 (Interface) Mode To configure an interface in Layer 2 mode, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode • no shutdown Place the interface in Layer 2 (switching) mode.
Dell(conf-if)#ip address 10.10.1.1 /24 % Error: Port is in Layer 2 mode Te 1/2. Dell(conf-if)# To determine the configuration of an interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode or the various show interface commands in EXEC mode. Configuring Layer 3 (Interface) Mode To assign an IP address, use the following commands. • Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown • Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface.
Important Points to Remember • Deleting a management route removes the route from both the EIS routing table and the default routing table. • If the management port is down or route lookup fails in the management EIS routing table, the outgoing interface is selected based on route lookup from the default routing table. • If a route in the EIS table conflicts with a front-end port route, the front-end port route has precedence.
• ip-address mask: enter an address in dotted-decimal format (A.B.C.D). The mask must be in /prefix format (/x). Viewing Two Global IPv6 Addresses Important Points to Remember — virtual-ip You can configure two global IPv6 addresses on the system in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the addresses, use the show interface managementethernet command, as shown in the following example. If you try to configure a third IPv6 address, an error message displays.
• virtual-ip is a CONFIGURATION mode command. • When applied, the management port on the primary RPM assumes the virtual IP address. Executing the show interfaces and show ip interface brief commands on the primary RPM management interface displays the virtual IP address and not the actual IP address assigned on that interface. A duplicate IP address message is printed for the management port’s virtual IP address on an RPM failover.
----------*S 0.0.0.0/0 C 10.11.130.0/23 Dell# ------via 10.11.131.254, Te 1/1 Direct, Te 1/1 ----------- ----------1/0 1d2h 0/0 1d2h VLAN Interfaces VLANs are logical interfaces and are, by default, in Layer 2 mode. Physical interfaces and port channels can be members of VLANs. For more information about VLANs and Layer 2, see Layer 2 and Virtual LANs (VLANs). NOTE: To monitor VLAN interfaces, use Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-based internets: MIB-II (RFC 1213).
• View Loopback interface configurations. EXEC mode show interface loopback number • Delete a Loopback interface. CONFIGURATION mode no interface loopback number Many of the commands supported on physical interfaces are also supported on a Loopback interface. Null Interfaces The Null interface is another virtual interface. There is only one Null interface. It is always up, but no traffic is transmitted through this interface. To enter INTERFACE mode of the Null interface, use the following command.
With this feature, you can create larger-capacity interfaces by utilizing a group of lower-speed links. For example, you can build a 50Gigabit interface by aggregating five 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces together. If one of the five interfaces fails, traffic is redistributed across the remaining interfaces. Port Channel Implementation Dell Networking OS supports static and dynamic port channels. • Static — Port channels that are statically configured.
Configuration Tasks for Port Channel Interfaces To configure a port channel (LAG), use the commands similar to those found in physical interfaces. By default, no port channels are configured in the startup configuration.
NOTE: To configure the MTU, use the mtu command from INTERFACE mode. To view the interface’s configuration, enter INTERFACE mode for that interface and use the show config command or from EXEC Privilege mode, use the show running-config interface interface command. When an interface is added to a port channel, Dell Networking OS recalculates the hash algorithm. To add a physical interface to a port, use the following commands. 1 Add the interface to a port channel.
When more than one interface is added to a Layer 2-port channel, Dell Networking OS selects one of the active interfaces in the port channel to be the primary port. The primary port replies to flooding and sends protocol data units (PDUs). An asterisk in the show interfaces port-channel brief command indicates the primary port. As soon as a physical interface is added to a port channel, the properties of the port channel determine the properties of the physical interface.
shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-3)# Configuring the Minimum Oper Up Links in a Port Channel You can configure the minimum links in a port channel (LAG) that must be in “oper up” status to consider the port channel to be in “oper up” status. To set the “oper up” status of your links, use the following command. • Enter the number of links in a LAG that must be in “oper up” status. INTERFACE mode minimum-links number The default is 1.
Configuring VLAN Tags for Member Interfaces To configure and verify VLAN tags for individual members of a port channel, perform the following: 1 Configure VLAN membership on individual ports INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if)#vlan tagged 2,3-4 2 Use the switchport command in INTERFACE mode to enable Layer 2 data transmissions through an individual interface INTERFACE mode Dell(conf-if)#switchport 3 Verify the manually configured VLAN membership (show interfaces switchport interface command).
• Disable a port channel. shutdown When you disable a port channel, all interfaces within the port channel are operationally down also. Load Balancing Through Port Channels Dell Networking OS uses hash algorithms for distributing traffic evenly over channel members in a port channel (LAG). The hash algorithm distributes traffic among Equal Cost Multi-path (ECMP) paths and LAG members. The distribution is based on a flow, except for packet-based hashing.
• crc32LSB — uses LSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 • crc32MSB — uses MSB 16 bits of computed CRC32(default) • crc-upper — uses the upper 32 bits of the hash key to compute the egress port. • dest-ip — uses destination IP address as part of the hash key. • flow-based-hashing — uses flow-based-hashing followed by the algorithm crc16 |crc16cc |crc32MSB |crc32LSB |xor1 |xor2 | xor4 |xor8 | xor16. • lsb — uses the least significant bit of the hash key to compute the egress port.
• Create a Multiple-Range • Exclude Duplicate Entries • Exclude a Smaller Port Range • Overlap Port Ranges • Commas • Add Ranges Create a Single-Range The following is an example of a single range. Example of the interface range Command (Single Range) Dell(config)# interface range tengigabitethernet 1/1 - 23 Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1-23)# no shutdown Dell(config-if-range-te-1/1-23)# Create a Multiple-Range The following is an example of multiple range.
Commas The following is an example of how to use commas to add different interface types to a range of interfaces. Example of Adding Interface Ranges Dell(config-if)# interface range tengigabitethernet 5/1 - 23, tengigabitethernet 1/1 - 2 Dell(config-if-range-te-5/1-23,te1/1-2)# no shutdown Dell(config-if-range-te-5/1-23,te1/1-2)# Add Ranges The following example shows how to use commas to add VLAN and port-channel interfaces to the range.
• View the interface’s statistics. EXEC Privilege mode Enter the type of interface and the interface information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Example of the monitor interface Command The information displays in a continuous run, refreshing every 2 seconds by default. To manage the output, use the following keys.
TDR is useful for troubleshooting an interface that is not establishing a link; that is, when the link is flapping or not coming up. TDR is not intended to be used on an interface that is passing traffic. When a TDR test is run on a physical cable, it is important to shut down the port on the far end of the cable. Otherwise, it may lead to incorrect test results. NOTE: TDR is an intrusive test. Do not run TDR on a link that is up and passing traffic.
Example of the show Command The following example shows the system stack-unit quad-port-profile command.
[confirm yes/no]:y Quad mode is enabled on stack-unit 1 slot 3 port 15 The interface on stack-unit 1 slot 3 port 16 has been removed %STKUNIT1-M:CP %IFMGR-5-DYNAMIC_FANOUT: Port 15 in slot 3 has been fanned-out The following example shows that the even numbered interface is removed from the configuration: Dell# show interfaces status Port Description Status Te 1/3/15/1 Up Te 1/3/15/2 Up Te 1/3/15/3 Up Te 1/3/15/4 Up Speed 10000 10000 10000 10000 Duplex Vlan Mbit Full -Mbit Full -Mbit Full -Mbit Auto -- T
Converting a QSFP or QSFP+ Port to an SFP or SFP+ Port You can convert a QSFP or QSFP+ port to an SFP or SFP+ port using the Quad to Small Form Factor Pluggable Adapter (QSA). QSA provides smooth connectivity between devices that use Quad Lane Ports (such as the 40 Gigabit Ethernet adapters) and 10 Gigabit hardware that uses SFP+ based cabling. Using this adapter, you can effectively use a QSFP or QSFP+ module to connect to a lower-end switch or server that uses an SFP or SFP+ based module.
• When you remove the QSA module alone from a 40 Gigabit port, without connecting any SFP or SFP+ cables; Dell Networking OS does not generate any event. However, when you remove a QSA module that has SFP or SFP+ optical cables plugged in, Dell Networking OS generates an SFP or SFP+ Removed event. • You can use the QSA on any of the ports. Example Scenarios Consider the following scenarios: • QSFP port 0 is connected to a QSA with SFP+ optical cables plugged in.
SFP 0 Id = 0x0d SFP 0 Ext Id = 0x00 SFP 0 Connector = 0x23 SFP 0 Transceiver Code = 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 SFP 0 Encoding = 0x00 ……………… ……………… SFP 0 Diagnostic Information =================================== SFP 0 Rx Power measurement type = OMA =================================== SFP 0 Temp High Alarm threshold = 0.000C SFP 0 Voltage High Alarm threshold = 0.000V SFP 0 Bias High Alarm threshold = 0.
QSFP 0 Id = 0x0d QSFP 0 Ext Id = 0x00 QSFP 0 Connector = 0x23 QSFP 0 Transceiver Code = 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 QSFP 0 Encoding = 0x00 ……………… ……………… QSFP 0 Diagnostic Information =================================== QSFP 0 Rx Power measurement type = OMA =================================== QSFP 0 Temp High Alarm threshold = 0.000C QSFP 0 Voltage High Alarm threshold = 0.000V QSFP 0 Bias High Alarm threshold = 0.
Dell#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/6 gigabitethernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is down Hardware is DellEth, address is 90:b1:1c:f4:9a:fa Current address is 90:b1:1c:f4:9a:fa Pluggable media present, SFP type is 1GBASE …………………… LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Dell#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/7 gigabitethernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is down Hardware is DellEth, address is 90:b1:1c:f4:9a:fa Current address is 90:b1:1c:f4:9a:fa Pluggable media present, SFP type is 1GBASE …………………… LineSpeed 1000 Mbit Dell#s
Link Dampening Interface state changes occur when interfaces are administratively brought up or down or if an interface state changes. Every time an interface changes a state or flaps, routing protocols are notified of the status of the routes that are affected by the change in state. These protocols go through the momentous task of re-converging. Flapping; therefore, puts the status of entire network at risk of transient loops and black holes.
To view a dampening summary for the entire system, use the show interfaces dampening summary command from EXEC Privilege mode. Dell# show interfaces dampening summary 20 interfaces are configured with dampening. 3 interfaces are currently suppressed. Following interfaces are currently suppressed: Te 1/2 Te 3/1 Te 4/2 Dell# Clearing Dampening Counters To clear dampening counters and accumulated penalties, use the following command. • Clear dampening counters.
Link Bundle Monitoring Monitoring linked LAG bundles allows traffic distribution amounts in a link to be monitored for unfair distribution at any given time. A threshold of 60% is defined as an acceptable amount of traffic on a member link. Links are monitored in 15-second intervals for three consecutive instances. Any deviation within that time sends Syslog and an alarm event generates. When the deviation clears, another Syslog sends and a clear alarm event generates.
rx off: Ignores the received flow control frames on this port. tx on: Sends control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received. tx off: Flow control frames are not sent from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received. monitor session-ID: Enables mirror flow control frames on this port. Changes in the flow-control values may not be reflected automatically in the show interface output.
Table 39. Layer 2 Overhead Layer 2 Overhead Difference Between Link MTU and IP MTU Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes VLAN Tag 22 bytes Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes Link MTU and IP MTU considerations for port channels and VLANs are as follows. Port Channels: • All members must have the same link MTU value and the same IP MTU value.
Setting the Speed of Ethernet Interfaces To discover whether the remote and local interface requires manual speed synchronization, and to manually synchronize them if necessary, use the following command sequence. 1 Determine the local interface status. Refer to the following example. EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces [interface | stack—unit stack-unit-number] status 2 Determine the remote interface status.
Te 1/5 Te 1/6 Te 1/7 Te 1/8 Te 1/9 Te 1/10 Te 1/11 Te 1/12 [output omitted] Down Down Up Down Down Down Down Down Auto Auto 1000 Mbit Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto Auto --1502,1504,1506-1508,1602 ------ In the previous example, several ports display “Auto” in the Speed field. In the following example, the speed of port 1/1 is set to 100Mb and then its auto-negotiation is disabled.
• Change the default interval between keepalive messages. INTERFACE mode • keepalive [seconds] View the new setting. INTERFACE mode show config View Advanced Interface Information The following options have been implemented for the show [ip | running-config] interfaces commands for (only) stackunit interfaces. When you use the configured keyword, only interfaces that have non-default configurations are displayed.
Queueing strategy: fifo 0 packets input, 0 bytes Input 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans 0 MPLS 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts Received 0 input symbol errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 IP Checksum, 0 overrun, 0 discarded 0 packets output, 0 bytes, 0 underruns Output 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts, 0 Unicasts 0 IP Packets, 0 Vlans, 0 MPLS 0 throttles, 0 discarded Rate info (interval 299 seconds): Input 00.
Example of the rate-interval Command The bold lines shows the default value of 299 seconds, the change-rate interval of 100, and the new rate interval set to 100.
0 throttles, 0 discarded, 0 collisions, 0 wreddrops Rate info (interval 150 seconds): Input 300.00 Mbits/sec, 1534517 packets/sec, 30.00% of line-rate Output 100.00 Mbits/sec, 4636111 packets/sec, 10.00% of line-rate Time since last interface status change: 21:00:43 Dynamic Counters By default, counting is enabled for IPFLOW, IPACL, L2ACL, L2FIB.
Example of the clear counters Command When you enter this command, confirm that you want Dell Networking OS to clear the interface counters for that interface. Dell#clear counters te 1/1 Clear counters on TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 [confirm] Dell# Compressing Configuration Files You can optimize and reduce the sizes of the configuration files. You can compress the running configuration by grouping all the VLANs and the physical interfaces with the same property.
! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 no ip address shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 no ip address shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 no ip address shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 no ip address shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/34 ip address 2.1.1.
no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 5 tagged te 1/1 no ip address shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address no shutdown ! interface Vlan 1000 ip address 1.1.1.1/16 no shutdown Uncompressed config size – 52 lines write memory compressed The write memory compressed CLI will write the operating configuration to the startup-config file in the compressed mode. In stacking scenario, it will also take care of syncing it to all the standby and member units.
21 IPv4 Routing The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports various IP addressing features. This chapter describes the basics of domain name service (DNS), address resolution protocol (ARP), and routing principles and their implementation in the Dell Networking OS.
• Configurations Using UDP Helper • UDP Helper with Broadcast-All Addresses • UDP Helper with Subnet Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with Configured Broadcast Addresses • UDP Helper with No Configured Broadcast Addresses • Troubleshooting UDP Helper IP Addresses Dell Networking OS supports IP version 4 (as described in RFC 791), classful routing, and variable length subnet masks (VLSM). With VLSM, you can configure one network with different masks.
2 • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For the Management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enable the interface. INTERFACE mode no shutdown 3 Configure a primary IP address and mask on the interface.
• tag tag-value: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. (optional) Example of the show ip route static Command To view the configured routes, use the show ip route static command. Dell#show ip route static Destination Gateway ----------------S 2.1.2.0/24 Direct, Nu 0 S 6.1.2.0/24 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.2/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.3/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.4/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.5/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.6/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.7/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.8/32 via 6.1.20.2, S 6.1.2.9/32 via 6.1.20.
Using the Configured Source IP Address in ICMP Messages ICMP error or unreachable messages are now sent with the configured IP address of the source interface instead of the front-end port IP address as the source IP address. Enable the generation of ICMP unreachable messages through the ip unreachable command in Interface mode. When a ping or traceroute packet from an endpoint or a device arrives at the null 0 interface configured with a static route, it is discarded.
Enabling Directed Broadcast By default, Dell Networking OS drops directed broadcast packets destined for an interface. This default setting provides some protection against denial of service (DoS) attacks. To enable Dell Networking OS to receive directed broadcasts, use the following command. • Enable directed broadcast. INTERFACE mode ip directed-broadcast To view the configuration, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode.
patch1 tomm-3 gxr f00-3 Dell> (perm, (perm, (perm, (perm, OK) OK) OK) OK) - IP IP IP IP 192.68.69.2 192.68.99.2 192.71.18.2 192.71.23.1 To view the current configuration, use the show running-config resolve command. Specifying the Local System Domain and a List of Domains If you enter a partial domain, Dell Networking OS can search different domains to finish or fully qualify that partial domain. A fully qualified domain name (FQDN) is any name that is terminated with a period/dot.
Translating "www.force10networks.com"...domain server (10.11.0.1) [OK] Type Ctrl-C to abort. ---------------------------------------------------------------------Tracing the route to www.force10networks.com (10.11.84.18), 30 hops max, 40 byte packets ---------------------------------------------------------------------TTL Hostname Probe1 Probe2 Probe3 1 10.11.199.190 001.000 ms 001.000 ms 002.000 ms 2 gwegress-sjc-02.force10networks.com (10.11.30.126) 005.000 ms 001.000 ms 001.000 ms 3 fw-sjc-01.
• interface: enter the interface type slot/port information. Example of the show arp Command These entries do not age and can only be removed manually. To remove a static ARP entry, use the no arp ip-address command. To view the static entries in the ARP cache, use the show arp static command in EXEC privilege mode. Dell#show arp Protocol Address Age(min) Hardware Address Interface VLAN CPU -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Internet 10.1.2.
• update the ARP table of other nodes on the network in case of an address change In the request, the host uses its own IP address in the Sender Protocol Address and Target Protocol Address fields. Enabling ARP Learning via Gratuitous ARP To enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, use the following command. • Enable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP. CONFIGURATION mode arp learn-enable ARP Learning via ARP Request In Dell Networking OS versions prior to 8.3.1.
Whether you enable or disable ARP learning via gratuitous ARP, the system does not look up the target IP. It only updates the ARP entry for the Layer 3 interface with the source IP of the request. Configuring ARP Retries You can configure the number of ARP retries. The default backoff interval remains at 20 seconds. To set and display ARP retries, use the following commands. • Set the number of ARP retries. CONFIGURATION mode arp retries number The default is 5. • The range is from 1 to 20.
• Set Dell Networking OS to create and send ICMP unreachable messages on the interface. INTERFACE mode ip unreachable To view if ICMP unreachable messages are sent on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If it is not listed in the show config command output, it is enabled. Only non-default information is displayed in the show config command output.
Configuring a Broadcast Address To configure a broadcast address, use the following command. • Configure a broadcast address on an interface. ip udp-broadcast-address Examples of Configuring and Viewing a Broadcast Address Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.255 Dell(conf-if-vl-100)#show config ! interface Vlan 100 ip address 1.1.0.1/24 ip udp-broadcast-address 1.1.255.
1 It is flooded on VLAN 101 without changing the destination address because the forwarding process is Layer 2. 2 If you enabled UDP helper, the system changes the destination IP address to the configured broadcast address 1.1.255.255 and forwards the packet to VLAN 100. 3 Packet 2 is also forwarded to the ingress interface with an unchanged destination address because it does not have broadcast address configured. Figure 50.
Packet 2 is sent from a host on VLAN 101. It has broadcast MAC address and a destination IP address that matches the configured broadcast address on VLAN 101. In this case, Packet 2 is flooded on VLAN 101 with the destination address unchanged because the forwarding process is Layer 2. If you enabled UDP helper, the packet is flooded on VLAN 100 as well. Figure 52.
22 IPv6 Routing Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) routing is the successor to IPv4. Due to the rapid growth in internet users and IP addresses, IPv4 is reaching its maximum usage. IPv6 will eventually replace IPv4 usage to allow for the constant expansion. This chapter provides a brief description of the differences between IPv4 and IPv6, and the Dell Networking support of IPv6. This chapter is not intended to be a comprehensive description of IPv6.
Extended Address Space The address format is extended from 32 bits to 128 bits. This not only provides room for all anticipated needs, it allows for the use of a hierarchical address space structure to optimize global addressing. Stateless Autoconfiguration When a booting device comes up in IPv6 and asks for its network prefix, the device can get the prefix (or prefixes) from an IPv6 router on its link.
• Flow Label (20 bits) • Payload Length (16 bits) • Next Header (8 bits) • Hop Limit (8 bits) • Source Address (128 bits) • Destination Address (128 bits) IPv6 provides for extension headers. Extension headers are used only if necessary. There can be no extension headers, one extension header or more than one extension header in an IPv6 packet. Extension headers are defined in the Next Header field of the preceding IPv6 header.
The platforms uses only IPv6 /0 – 0/64 prefix route entries. Support for /0 – /128 IPv6 prefix route entries is available, although they are not utilized. A total of eight pools or regions are present with each region containing 1024 210-bit entries (supports up to 0/64 prefix). To support up to /128 prefixes, you must use 2 banks (410-bit entries). It is necessary to partition the LPM. The optimized booting functionality does not use Openflow and therefore SDN support is not available.
Next Header (8 bits) The Next Header field identifies the next header’s type. If an Extension header is used, this field contains the type of Extension header (as shown in the following table). If the next header is a transmission control protocol (TCP) or user datagram protocol (UDP) header, the value in this field is the same as for IPv4. The Extension header is located between the IP header and the TCP or UDP header. The following lists the Next Header field values.
Source Address (128 bits) The Source Address field contains the IPv6 address for the packet originator. Destination Address (128 bits) The Destination Address field contains the intended recipient’s IPv6 address. This can be either the ultimate destination or the address of the next hop router. Extension Header Fields Extension headers are used only when necessary. Due to the streamlined nature of the IPv6 header, adding extension headers do not severely impact performance.
10 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address identifying the unknown option type. 11 Discard the packet and send an ICMP Parameter Problem, Code 2 message to the packet’s Source IP Address only if the Destination IP Address is not a multicast address. The second byte contains the Option Data Length. The third byte specifies whether the information can change en route to the destination.
the same IPv6 address to a particular computer, and never to assign that IP address to another computer. This allows static IPv6 addresses to be configured in one place, without having to specifically configure each computer on the network in a different way. In IPv6, every interface, whether using static or dynamic address assignments, also receives a local-link address automatically in the fe80::/64 subnet.
Feature and Functionality Dell Networking OS Release Introduction Documentation and Chapter Location S6000 IS-IS for IPv6 support for redistribution 8.3.11 Intermediate System to Intermediate System IPv6 IS-IS in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. ISIS for IPv6 support for 8.3.11 distribute lists and administrative distance Intermediate System to Intermediate System OSPF for IPv6 (OSPFv3) 8.3.11 OSPFv3 in the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
• Error reporting messages indicate when the forwarding or delivery of the packet failed at the destination or intermediate node. These messages include Destination Unreachable, Packet Too Big, Time Exceeded and Parameter Problem messages. • Informational messages provide diagnostic functions and additional host functions, such as Neighbor Discovery and Multicast Listener Discovery. These messages also include Echo Request and Echo Reply messages.
With ARP, each node broadcasts ARP requests on the entire link. This approach causes unnecessary processing by uninterested nodes. With NDP, each node sends a request only to the intended destination via a multicast address with the unicast address used as the last 24 bits. Other hosts on the link do not participate in the process, greatly increasing network bandwidth efficiency. Figure 55.
Example for Configuring an IPv6 Recursive DNS Server The following example configures a RDNNS server with an IPv6 address of 1000::1 and a lifetime of 1 second.
ff02::1:ff8b:7570 ND MTU is 0 ICMP redirects are not sent DAD is enabled, number of DAD attempts: 3 ND reachable time is 20120 milliseconds ND base reachable time is 30000 milliseconds ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 ND dns-server address is 1000::1 with lifetime o
The default option sets the CAM Profile as follows: • L3 ACL (ipv4acl): 6 • L2 ACL(l2acl): 5 • IPv6 L3 ACL (ipv6acl): 0 • L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 • L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 To have the changes take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system for the new settings. • Allocate space for IPV6 ACLs. Enter the CAM profile name then the allocated amount.
Assigning a Static IPv6 Route To configure IPv6 static routes, use the ipv6 route command. NOTE: After you configure a static IPv6 route (the ipv6 route command) and configure the forwarding router’s address (specified in the ipv6 route command) on a neighbor’s interface, the IPv6 neighbor does not display in the show ipv6 route command output. • Set up IPv6 static routes.
• snmp-server host • snmp-server user ipv6 • snmp-server community ipv6 • snmp-server community access-list-name ipv6 • snmp-server group ipv6 • snmp-server group access-list-name ipv6 Displaying IPv6 Information View specific IPv6 configuration with the following commands. • List the IPv6 show options.
IPV6 is enabled Stateless address autoconfiguration is enabled Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:386e Global Unicast address(es): Actual address is 400::201:e8ff:fe8b:386e, subnet is 400::/64 Actual address is 412::201:e8ff:fe8b:386e, subnet is 412::/64 Virtual-IP IPv6 address is not set Received Prefix(es): 400::/64 onlink autoconfig Valid lifetime: 2592000, Preferred lifetime: 604800 Advertised by: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8b:3166 412::/64 onlink autoconfig Valid lifetime: 2592000, Preferred lifetime: 60480
static 0 0 Total 5 0 The following example shows the show ipv6 route command.
Clearing IPv6 Routes To clear routes from the IPv6 routing table, use the following command. • Clear (refresh) all or a specific route from the IPv6 routing table. EXEC mode clear ipv6 route [vrf vrf-name] {* | ipv6 address prefix-length} • vrf vrf-name:(OPTIONAL) name of the VRF. • *: all routes. • ipv6 address: the format is x:x:x:x::x. • mask: the prefix length is from 0 to 128.
7 Enable verification of the sender IPv6 address in inspected messages from the authorized device source access list. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode match ra{ipv6-access-list name | ipv6-prefix-list name | mac-access-list name} 8 Enable verification of the advertised other configuration parameter. POLICY LIST CONFIGURATION mode other-config-flag {on | off} 9 Enable verification of the advertised default router preference value. The preference value must be less than or equal to the specified limit.
router-preference maximum medium trusted-port Dell(conf-ra_guard_policy_list)# Configuring IPv6 RA Guard on an Interface To configure the IPv6 Router Advertisement (RA) guard on an interface, perform the following steps: 1 Configure the terminal to enter the Interface mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface interface-type slot/port 2 Apply the IPv6 RA guard to a specific interface. INTERFACE mode ipv6 nd ra-guard attach policy policy-name [vlan [vlan 1, vland 2, vlan 3.....
23 iSCSI Optimization This chapter describes how to configure internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization, which enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI traffic.
• iSCSI QoS — A user-configured iSCSI class of service (CoS) profile is applied to all iSCSI traffic. Classifier rules are used to direct the iSCSI data traffic to queues that can be given preferential QoS treatment over other data passing through the switch. Preferential treatment helps to avoid session interruptions during times of congestion that would otherwise cause dropped iSCSI packets. • iSCSI DCBx TLVs are supported.
Monitoring iSCSI Traffic Flows The switch snoops iSCSI session-establishment and termination packets by installing classifier rules that trap iSCSI protocol packets to the CPU for examination. Devices that initiate iSCSI sessions usually use well-known TCP ports 3260 or 860 to contact targets. When you enable iSCSI optimization, by default the switch identifies IP packets to or from these ports as iSCSI traffic.
If more than 256 simultaneous sessions are logged continuously, the following message displays indicating the queue rate limit has been reached: %STKUNIT2-M:CP %iSCSI-5-ISCSI_OPT_MAX_SESS_EXCEEDED: New iSCSI Session Ignored: ISID 400001370000 InitiatorName - iqn.1991-05.com.microsoft:dt-brcd-cna-2 TargetName iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:4-52aed6-b90d9446c-162466364804fa49-wj-v1 TSIH - 0" NOTE: If you are using EqualLogic or Compellent storage arrays, more than 256 simultaneous iSCSI sessions are possible.
including jumbo frames and flow-control on all ports; no storm control and spanning-tree port fast to be enabled on the port of detection. After you execute the iscsi profile-compellent command, the following actions occur: • Jumbo frame size is set to the maximum for all interfaces on all ports and port-channels, if it is not already enabled. • Spanning-tree portfast is enabled on the interface. • Unicast storm control is disabled on the interface.
Default iSCSI Optimization Values The following table lists the default values for the iSCSI optimization feature. Table 42. iSCSI Optimization Defaults Parameter Default Value iSCSI Optimization global setting Disabled. iSCSI CoS mode (802.1p priority queue mapping) dot1p priority 4 without the remark setting when you enable iSCSI. If you do not enable iSCSI, this feature is disabled.
CONFIGURATION mode iscsi enable 3 For a DCB environment: Configure iSCSI Optimization. EXEC Privilege mode iSCSI configuration: copy CONFIG_TEMPLATE/iSCSI_DCB_Config running-config. The configuration files are stored in the flash memory in the CONFIG_TEMPLATE file. NOTE: DCB/DCBx is enabled when you apply the iSCSI configuration in step 3. If you manually apply the iSCSI configuration by following steps 1 and 2, enable link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) before enabling iSCSI in step 2.
• dscp dscp-value: specifies the DSCP value assigned to incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The range is from 0 to 63. The default is: the DSCP value in ingress packets is not changed. • 8 remark: marks incoming iSCSI packets with the configured dot1p or DSCP value when they egress the switch. The default is: the dot1 and DSCP values in egress packets are not changed. (Optional) Set the aging time for iSCSI session monitoring. CONFIGURATION mode [no] iscsi aging time time.
-----------------------------------------------iSCSI Targets and TCP Ports: -----------------------------------------------TCP Port Target IP Address 3260 860 The following example shows the show iscsi session command. VLT PEER1 Dell#show iscsi session Session 0: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Target: iqn.2001-05.com.equallogic:0-8a0906-0e70c2002-10a0018426a48c94-iom010 Initiator: iqn.1991-05.com.
24 Intermediate System to Intermediate System The intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. Dell Networking supports both IPv4 and IPv6 versions of IS-IS.
• area address — within your routing domain or area, each area must have a unique area value. The first byte is called the authority and format indicator (AFI). • system address — the router’s MAC address. • N-selector — this is always 0. The following illustration is an example of the ISO-style address to show the address format IS-IS uses. In this example, the first five bytes (47.0005.0001) are the area address. The system portion is 000c.000a.4321 and the last byte is always 0. Figure 57.
Interface Support MT IS-IS is supported on physical Ethernet interfaces, physical synchronous optical network technologies (SONET) interfaces, portchannel interfaces (static and dynamic using LACP), and virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces. Adjacencies Adjacencies on point-to-point interfaces are formed as usual, where IS-IS routers do not implement MT extensions.
IPv6 Reachability and IPv6 Interface Address. Also, a new IPv6 protocol identifier has also been included in the supported TLVs. The new TLVs use the extended metrics and up/down bit semantics. Multi-topology IS-IS adds TLVs: • MT TLV — contains one or more Multi-Topology IDs in which the router participates. This TLV is included in IIH and the first fragment of an LSP. • MT Intermediate Systems TLV — appears for every topology a node supports.
Configuration Tasks for IS-IS The following describes the configuration tasks for IS-IS. • Enabling IS-IS • Configure Multi-Topology IS-IS (MT IS-IS) • Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart • Changing LSP Attributes • Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style • Configuring IS-IS Cost • Changing the IS-Type • Controlling Routing Updates • Configuring Authentication Passwords • Setting the Overload Bit • Debuging IS-IS Enabling IS-IS By default, IS-IS is not enabled.
4 • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Enter an IPv4 Address. INTERFACE mode ip address ip-address mask Assign an IP address and mask to the interface.
Accept wide metrics: Dell# none To view IS-IS protocol statistics, use the show isis traffic command in EXEC Privilege mode.
4 Implement a wide metric-style globally. ROUTER ISIS AF IPV6 mode isis ipv6 metric metric-value [level-1 | level-2 | level-1-2] To configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be between 0 and 16,777,215. Configuring IS-IS Graceful Restart To enable IS-IS graceful restart globally, use the following commands. Additionally, you can implement optional commands to enable the graceful restart settings. • Enable graceful restart on ISIS processes.
• adjacency: the restarting router receives the remaining time value from its peer and adjusts its T3 value so if user has configured this option. • manual: allows you to specify a fixed value that the restarting router should use. The range is from 50 to 120 seconds. The default is 30 seconds. Examples of the show isis graceful-restart detail Command NOTE: If this timer expires before the synchronization has completed, the restarting router sends the overload bit in the LSP.
LSP Interval: 33 Next IS-IS LAN Level-1 Hello in 4 seconds Next IS-IS LAN Level-2 Hello in 6 seconds LSP Interval: 33 Restart Capable Neighbors: 2, In Start: 0, In Restart: 0 Dell# Changing LSP Attributes IS-IS routers flood link state PDUs (LSPs) to exchange routing information. LSP attributes include the generation interval, maximum transmission unit (MTU) or size, and the refresh interval. You can modify the LSP attribute defaults, but it is not necessary.
Configuring the IS-IS Metric Style All IS-IS links or interfaces are associated with a cost that is used in the shortest path first (SPF) calculations. The possible cost varies depending on the metric style supported. If you configure narrow, transition, or narrow transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 63. If you configure wide or wide transition metric style, the cost can be a number between 0 and 16,777,215.
Distance: 115 Generate narrow metrics: Accept narrow metrics: Generate wide metrics: Accept wide metrics: Dell# level-1-2 level-1-2 none none Configuring the IS-IS Cost When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value could be affected. For each interface with IS-IS enabled, you can assign a cost or metric that is used in the link state calculation. To change the metric or cost of the interface, use the following commands. • Assign an IS-IS metric.
Changing the IS-Type To change the IS-type, use the following commands. You can configure the system to act as a Level 1 router, a Level 1-2 router, or a Level 2 router. To change the IS-type for the router, use the following commands. • Configure IS-IS operating level for a router. ROUTER ISIS mode is-type {level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2-only} • Default is level-1-2. Change the IS-type for the IS-IS process.
• For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Distribute Routes Another method of controlling routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. Prefix lists are applied to incoming or outgoing routes and routes must meet the conditions of the prefix lists or Dell Networking OS does not install the route in the routing table.
Applying IPv6 Routes To apply prefix lists to incoming or outgoing IPv6 routes, use the following commands. NOTE: These commands apply to IPv6 IS-IS only. To apply prefix lists to IPv4 routes, use ROUTER ISIS mode, previously shown. • Apply a configured prefix list to all incoming IPv6 IS-IS routes.
Configure the following parameters: • • level-1, level-1-2, or level-2: assign all redistributed routes to a level. The default is level-2. • metric-value the range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. • metric-type: choose either external or internal. The default is internal. • map-name: enter the name of a configured route map. Include specific OSPF routes in IS-IS.
• map-name: name of a configured route map. To view the IS-IS configuration globally (including both IPv4 and IPv6 settings), use the show running-config isis command in EXEC Privilege mode. To view the current IPv4 IS-IS configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER ISIS mode. To view the current IPv6 IS-IS configuration, use the show config command in ROUTER ISIS-ADDRESS FAMILY IPV6 mode.
Example of Viewing the Overload Bit Setting When the bit is set, a 1 is placed in the OL column in the show isis database command output. The overload bit is set in both the Level-1 and Level-2 database because the IS type for the router is Level-1-2. Dell#show isis database IS-IS Level-1 Link State Database LSPID LSP Seq Num LSP Checksum B233.00-00 0x00000003 0x07BF eljefe.00-00 * 0x0000000A 0xF963 eljefe.01-00 * 0x00000001 0x68DF eljefe.02-00 * 0x00000001 0x2E7F Force10.
debug isis update-packets [interface] To view specific information, enter the following optional parameter: • interface: Enter the type of interface and slot/port information to view IS-IS information on that interface only. Dell Networking OS displays debug messages on the console. To view which debugging commands are enabled, use the show debugging command in EXEC Privilege mode. To disable a specific debug command, enter the keyword no then the debug command.
Maximum Values in the Routing Table IS-IS metric styles support different cost ranges for the route. The cost range for the narrow metric style is 0 to 1023, while all other metric styles support a range of 0 to 0xFE000000. Change the IS-IS Metric Style in One Level Only By default, the IS-IS metric style is narrow. When you change from one IS-IS metric style to another, the IS-IS metric value (configured with the isis metric command) could be affected.
Beginning Metric Style Final Metric Style Resulting IS-IS Metric Value narrow transition transition original value wide transition wide original value wide transition narrow default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition narrow transition default value (10) if the original value is greater than 63. A message is sent to the console. wide transition transition truncated value (the truncated value appears in the LSP only).
Level-1 Metric Style Level-2 Metric Style Resulting Metric Value wide transition truncated value narrow transition wide original value narrow transition narrow original value narrow transition wide transition original value narrow transition transition original value transition wide original value transition narrow original value transition wide transition original value transition narrow transition original value wide transition wide original value wide transition narrow
Figure 58. IPv6 IS-IS Sample Topography IS-IS Sample Configuration — Congruent Topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology IS-IS Sample Configuration — Multi-topology Transition The following is a sample configuration for enabling IPv6 IS-IS. Dell(conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ip address 24.3.1.
exit-address-family Dell (conf-router_isis)# Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/17 ipv6 address 24:3::1/76 ipv6 router isis no shutdown Dell (conf-if-te-3/17)# Dell (conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis net 34.0000.0000.AAAA.
25 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by the Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic. Introduction to Dynamic LAGs and LACP A link aggregation group (LAG), referred to as a port channel by Dell Networking OS, can provide both load-sharing and port redundancy across line cards. You can enable LAGs as static or dynamic.
LACP Modes Dell Networking OS provides three modes for configuration of LACP — Off, Active, and Passive. • Off — In this state, an interface is not capable of being part of a dynamic LAG. LACP does not run on any port that is configured to be in this state. • Active — In this state, the interface is said to be in the “active negotiating state.” LACP runs on any link that is configured to be in this state.
The default is 32768. LACP Configuration Tasks The following configuration tasks apply to LACP. • Creating a LAG • Configuring the LAG Interfaces as Dynamic • Setting the LACP Long Timeout • Monitoring and Debugging LACP • Configuring Shared LAG State Tracking Creating a LAG To create a dynamic port channel (LAG), use the following command. First you define the LAG and then the LAG interfaces. • Create a dynamic port channel (LAG).
Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitethernet 4/15 Dell(conf-if-te-4/15)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-4/15)#port-channel-protocol lacp Dell(conf-if-te-4/15-lacp)#port-channel 32 mode active ...
• Debug LACP, including configuration and events. EXEC mode [no] debug lacp [config | events | pdu [in | out | [interface [in | out]]]] Shared LAG State Tracking Shared LAG state tracking provides the flexibility to bring down a port channel (LAG) based on the operational state of another LAG. At any time, only two LAGs can be a part of a group such that the fate (status) of one LAG depends on the other LAG.
Example of LAGs in the Same Failover Group Dell#config Dell(conf)#port-channel failover-group Dell(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 To view the failover group configuration, use the show running-configuration po-failover-group command. Dell#show running-config po-failover-group ! port-channel failover-group group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 As shown in the following illustration, LAGs 1 and 2 are members of a failover group.
Important Points about Shared LAG State Tracking The following is more information about shared LAG state tracking. • • • • • This feature is available for static and dynamic LAGs. Only a LAG can be a member of a failover group. You can configure shared LAG state tracking on one side of a link or on both sides. If a LAG that is part of a failover group is deleted, the failover group is deleted. If a LAG moves to the Down state due to this feature, its members may still be in the Up state.
Port is part of Port-channel 10 Hardware is Force10Eth, address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Current address is 00:01:e8:06:95:c0 Interface Index is 109101113 Port will not be disabled on partial SFM failure Internet address is not set MTU 1554 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed 10000 Mbit, Mode full duplex, Slave Flowcontrol rx on tx on ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 00:02:11 Queueing strategy: fifo Input statistics: 132 packets, 163668 bytes 0 Vlans 0 64-byte pkts,
Figure 62.
Figure 63.
Figure 64.
Summary of the LAG Configuration on Bravo Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#int port-channel 10 Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no ip add Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#switch Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#no shut Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#show config ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! Bravo(conf-if-po-10)#exit Bravo(conf)#int tengig 3/21 Bravo(conf)#no ip address Bravo(conf)#no switchport Bravo(conf)#shutdown Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21)#port-channel-protocol lacp Bravo(conf-if-te-3/21-lacp)#port-channel 10 mode active Bravo(
Figure 65.
Figure 66.
Figure 67. Inspecting the LAG Status Using the show lacp command The point-to-point protocol (PPP) is a connection-oriented protocol that enables layer two links over various different physical layer connections. It is supported on both synchronous and asynchronous lines, and can operate in Half-Duplex or Full-Duplex mode. It was designed to carry IP traffic but is general enough to allow any type of network layer datagram to be sent over a PPP connection.
26 Layer 2 This chapter describes the Layer 2 features supported on the device. Manage the MAC Address Table You can perform the following management tasks in the MAC address table. • Clearing the MAC Address Table • Setting the Aging Time for Dynamic Entries • Configuring a Static MAC Address • Displaying the MAC Address Table Clearing the MAC Address Table You may clear the MAC address table of dynamic entries. To clear a MAC address table, use the following command.
Configuring a Static MAC Address A static entry is one that is not subject to aging. Enter static entries manually. To create a static MAC address entry, use the following command. • Create a static MAC address entry in the MAC address table. CONFIGURATION mode mac-address-table static Displaying the MAC Address Table To display the MAC address table, use the following command. • Display the contents of the MAC address table.
In this case, the configuration is still present in the running-config and show output. Remove the configuration before re-applying a MAC learning limit with a lower value. Also, ensure that you can view the Syslog messages on your session. NOTE: The CAM-check failure message beginning in Dell Networking OS version 8.3.1.0 is different from versions 8.2.1.
When you enable sticky mac on an interface, dynamically-learned MAC addresses do not age, even if you enabled mac-learninglimit dynamic. If you configured mac-learning-limit and mac-learning-limit dynamic and you disabled sticky MAC, any dynamically-learned MAC addresses ages. mac learning-limit station-move The mac learning-limit station-move command allows a MAC address already in the table to be learned from another interface.
Setting Station Move Violation Actions no-station-move is the default behavior. You can configure the system to take an action if a station move occurs using one the following options with the mac learning-limit command. To display a list of interfaces configured with MAC learning limit or station move violation actions, use the following commands. • Generate a system log message indicating a station move. INTERFACE mode station-move-violation log • Shut down the first port to learn the MAC address.
Disabling MAC Address Learning on the System You can configure the system to not learn MAC addresses from LACP and LLDP BPDUs. To disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs, follow this procedure: • Disable source MAC address learning from LACP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode • mac-address-table disable-learning lacp Disable source MAC address learning from LLDP BPDUs. CONFIGURATION mode • mac-address-table disable-learning lldp Disable source MAC address learning from LACP and LLDP BPDUs.
NOTE: If you have configured the no mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp command, traffic continues to be forwarded to the failed NIC until the ARP entry on the switch times out. Figure 69.
Figure 70. Configuring Redundant Layer 2 Pairs without Spanning Tree You configure a redundant pair by assigning a backup interface to a primary interface with the switchport backup interface command. Initially, the primary interface is active and transmits traffic and the backup interface remains down. If the primary fails for any reason, the backup transitions to an active Up state. If the primary interface fails and later comes back up, it remains as the backup interface for the redundant pair.
Important Points about Configuring Redundant Pairs • • • • You may not configure any interface to be a backup for more than one interface, no interface can have more than one backup, and a backup interface may not have a backup interface. The active or backup interface may not be a member of a LAG. The active and standby do not have to be of the same type (1G, 10G, and so on). You may not enable any Layer 2 protocol on any interface of a redundant pair or to ports connected to them.
Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state to down: Po 2 Apr 9 00:15:13: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-STATE_ACT_STBY: Changed interface state to standby: Po 2 Dell(conf-if-po-1)# Dell# Dell#show interfaces switchport backup Interface Status Paired Interface Status Port-channel 1 Active Port-chato mannel 2 Standby Port-channel 2 Standby Port-channel 1 Active Dell# Dell(conf-if-po-1)#switchport backup interface tengigabitethernet 1/2 Apr 9 00:16:29: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %IFMGR-5-L2BKUP_WA
FEFD State Changes FEFD has two operational modes, Normal and Aggressive. When you enable Normal mode on an interface and a far-end failure is detected, no intervention is required to reset the interface to bring it back to an FEFD operational state. When you enable Aggressive mode on an interface in the same state, manual intervention is required to reset the interface.
Configuring FEFD You can configure FEFD for all interfaces from CONFIGURATION mode, or on individual interfaces from INTERFACE mode. To enable FEFD globally on all interfaces, use the following command. • Enable FEFD globally on all interfaces. CONFIGURATION mode fefd-global To report interval frequency and mode adjustments, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
fefd [mode {aggressive | normal}] • Disable FEFD protocol on one interface. INTERFACE mode fefd disable Disabling an interface shuts down all protocols working on that interface’s connected line. It does not delete your previous FEFD configuration which you can enable again at any time. To set up and activate two or more connected interfaces, use the following commands. 1 Setup two or more connected interfaces for Layer 2 or Layer 3.
2w1d22h: %RPM0-P:CP %IFMGR-5-INACTIVE: Changed Vlan interface state to inactive: Vl 1 2w1d22h : FEFD state on Te 4/1 changed from Bi-directional to Unknown Dell#debug fefd packets Dell#2w1d22h : FEFD packet sent via interface Te 1/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info -- Mgmt Mac(00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Te 1/1) Peer info -- Mgmt Mac (00:01:e8:14:89:25), Slot-Port(Te 4/1) Sender hold time -- 3 (second) 2w1d22h : FEFD packet received on interface Te 4/1 Sender state -- Bi-directional Sender info
27 Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) This chapter describes how to configure and use the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP). 802.1AB (LLDP) Overview LLDP — defined by IEEE 802.1AB — is a protocol that enables a local area network (LAN) device to advertise its configuration and receive configuration information from adjacent LLDP-enabled LAN infrastructure devices.
Table 49. Type, Length, Value (TLV) Types Type TLV Description 0 End of LLDPDU Marks the end of an LLDPDU. 1 Chassis ID An administratively assigned name that identifies the LLDP agent. 2 Port ID An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received. 3 Time to Live An administratively assigned name that identifies a port through which TLVs are sent and received.
Figure 74. Organizationally Specific TLV IEEE Organizationally Specific TLVs Eight TLV types have been defined by the IEEE 802.1 and 802.3 working groups as a basic part of LLDP; the IEEE OUI is 00-80-C2. You can configure the Dell Networking system to advertise any or all of these TLVs. Table 50. Optional TLV Types Type TLV Description 4 Port description A user-defined alphanumeric string that describes the port. Dell Networking OS does not currently support this TLV.
Type TLV Description LLDP, but is available and mandatory (nonconfigurable) in the LLDP-MED implementation. 127 Power via MDI Dell Networking supports the LLDP-MED protocol, which recommends that Power via MDI TLV be not implemented, and therefore Dell Networking implements Extended Power via MDI TLV only. 127 Link Aggregation Indicates whether the link is capable of being aggregated, whether it is currently in a LAG, and the port identification of the LAG.
Type SubType TLV Description • • • whether the transmitting device supports LLDP-MED what LLDP-MED TLVs it supports LLDP device class 127 2 Network Policy Indicates the application type, VLAN ID, Layer 2 Priority, and DSCP value. 127 3 Location Identification Indicates that the physical location of the device expressed in one of three possible formats: • • • 127 4 Inventory Management TLVs Implementation of this set of TLVs is optional in LLDP-MED devices. None or all TLVs must be supported.
LLDP-MED Capabilities TLV The LLDP-MED capabilities TLV communicates the types of TLVs that the endpoint device and the network connectivity device support. LLDP-MED network connectivity devices must transmit the Network Policies TLV. • The value of the LLDP-MED capabilities field in the TLV is a 2–octet bitmap, each bit represents an LLDP-MED capability (as shown in the following table). • The possible values of the LLDP-MED device type are shown in the following.
• VLAN ID • VLAN tagged or untagged status • Layer 2 priority • DSCP value An integer represents the application type (the Type integer shown in the following table), which indicates a device function for which a unique network policy is defined. An individual LLDP-MED network policy TLV is generated for each application type that you specify with the Dell Networking OS CLI (Advertising TLVs).
Extended Power via MDI TLV The extended power via MDI TLV enables advanced PoE management between LLDP-MED endpoints and network connectivity devices. Advertise the extended power via MDI on all ports that are connected to an 802.3af powered, LLDP-MED endpoint device. • Power Type — there are two possible power types: power source entity (PSE) or power device (PD). The Dell Networking system is a PSE, which corresponds to a value of 0, based on the TIA-1057 specification.
LLDP Compatibility • Spanning tree and force10 ring protocol “blocked” ports allow LLDPDUs. • 802.1X controlled ports do not allow LLDPDUs until the connected device is authenticated. CONFIGURATION versus INTERFACE Configurations All LLDP configuration commands are available in PROTOCOL LLDP mode, which is a sub-mode of the CONFIGURATION mode and INTERFACE mode. • Configurations made at the CONFIGURATION level are global; that is, they affect all interfaces on the system.
Disabling and Undoing LLDP To disable or undo LLDP, use the following command. • Disable LLDP globally or for an interface. disable To undo an LLDP configuration, precede the relevant command with the keyword no. Enabling LLDP on Management Ports LLDP on management ports is enabled by default. To enable LLDP on management ports, use the following command. 1 Enter Protocol LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION mode protocol lldp 2 Enter LLDP management-interface mode.
To advertise TLVs, use the following commands. 1 Enter LLDP mode. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode protocol lldp 2 Advertise one or more TLVs. PROTOCOL LLDP mode advertise {dcbx-appln-tlv | dcbx-tlv | dot3-tlv | interface-port-desc | management-tlv | med } Include the keyword for each TLV you want to advertise. • For management TLVs: system-capabilities, system-description. • For 802.1 TLVs: port-protocol-vlan-id, port-vlan-id . • For 802.3 TLVs: max-frame-size.
Viewing the LLDP Configuration To view the LLDP configuration, use the following command. • Display the LLDP configuration. CONFIGURATION or INTERFACE mode show config Examples of Viewing LLDP Configurations The following example shows viewing an LLDP global configuration.
Local Interface Te 1/4 has 1 neighbor Total Frames Out: 6547 Total Frames In: 4136 Total Neighbor information Age outs: 0 Total Frames Discarded: 0 Total In Error Frames: 0 Total Unrecognized TLVs: 0 Total TLVs Discarded: 0 Next packet will be sent after 7 seconds The neighbors are given below: ----------------------------------------------------------------------Remote Chassis ID Subtype: Mac address (4) Remote Chassis ID: 00:01:e8:06:95:3e Remote Port Subtype: Interface name (5) Remote Port ID: TeGigabitE
R1(conf-lldp)#show config ! protocol lldp advertise dot1-tlv port-protocol-vlan-id port-vlan-id advertise dot3-tlv max-frame-size advertise management-tlv system-capabilities system-description no disable R1(conf-lldp)# Configuring Transmit and Receive Mode After you enable LLDP, the system transmits and receives LLDPDUs by default. To configure the system to transmit or receive only and return to the default, use the following commands. • Transmit only.
• Adjust the TTL value. CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode. multiplier • Return to the default multiplier value. CONFIGURATION mode or INTERFACE mode.
Figure 79. The debug lldp detail Command — LLDPDU Packet Dissection Relevant Management Objects Dell Networking OS supports all IEEE 802.1AB MIB objects. The following tables list the objects associated with: • received and transmitted TLVs • the LLDP configuration on the local agent • IEEE 802.1AB Organizationally Specific TLVs • received and transmitted LLDP-MED TLVs Table 55.
MIB Object Category LLDP Variable LLDP MIB Object Description Basic TLV Selection mibBasicTLVsTxEnable lldpPortConfigTLVsTxEnable Indicates which management TLVs are enabled for system ports. mibMgmtAddrInstanceTxEnable lldpManAddrPortsTxEnable The management addresses defined for the system and the ports through which they are enabled for transmission.
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MIB Object 7 System Capabilities system capabilities Local lldpLocSysCapSupported Remote lldpRemSysCapSupported Local lldpLocSysCapEnabled Remote lldpRemSysCapEnabled Local lldpLocManAddrLen Remote lldpRemManAddrLen Local lldpLocManAddrSubtype Remote lldpRemManAddrSubtype Local lldpLocManAddr Remote lldpRemManAddr Local lldpLocManAddrIfSubtype Remote lldpRemManAddrIfSubtype Local lldpLocManAddrIfId Remote lldpRemManAddrIfId Local
TLV Type TLV Name TLV Variable System LLDP MIB Object VLAN name Local lldpXdot1LocVlanName Remote lldpXdot1RemVlanName Table 58.
TLV Sub-Type TLV Name TLV Variable Location ID Data 4 Extended Power via MDI Power Device Type Power Source System LLDP-MED MIB Object Remote lldpXMedRemLocationSubt ype Local lldpXMedLocLocationInfo Remote lldpXMedRemLocationInfo Local lldpXMedLocXPoEDeviceT ype Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEDeviceT ype Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPSEPow erSource lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowe rSource Remote lldpXMedRemXPoEPSEPo werSource lldpXMedRemXPoEPDPow erSource Power Priority Local lldpXMedLocXPoEPDPowe rPriority
28 Microsoft Network Load Balancing Network load balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems (OSs). NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
With Multicast NLB mode, the data forwards to all the servers based on the port specified using the following Layer 2 multicast command in CONFIGURATION MODE: mac-address-table static multicast vlan output-range , Limitations of the NLB Feature The following limitations apply to switches on which you configure NLB: • The NLB Unicast mode uses switch flooding to transmit all packets to all the servers that are part of the VLAN.
• Enter the ip vlan-flooding command to specify that all Layer 3 unicast routed data traffic going through a VLAN member port floods across all the member ports of that VLAN. CONFIGURATION mode ip vlan-flooding There might be some ARP table entries that are resolved through ARP packets, which had the Ethernet MAC SA different from the MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets that use these ARP entries.
29 Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) is supported on Dell Networking OS. Protocol Overview MSDP is a Layer 3 protocol that connects IPv4 protocol-independent multicast-sparse mode (PIM-SM) domains. A domain in the context of MSDP is a contiguous set of routers operating PIM within a common boundary defined by an exterior gateway protocol, such as border gateway protocol (BGP).
RPs advertise each (S,G) in its domain in type, length, value (TLV) format. The total number of TLVs contained in the SA is indicated in the “Entry Count” field. SA messages are transmitted every 60 seconds, and immediately when a new source is detected. Figure 81.
to a different RP, a method is needed for the RPs to exchange information about active sources. This information exchange is done with MSDP. With Anycast RP, all the RPs are configured to be MSDP peers of each other. When a source registers with one RP, an SA message is sent to the other RPs informing them that there is an active source for a particular multicast group. The result is that each RP is aware of the active sources in the area of the other RPs.
Figure 82.
Figure 83.
Figure 84.
Figure 85. Configuring MSDP Enable MSDP Enable MSDP by peering RPs in different administrative domains. 1 Enable MSDP. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-msdp 2 Peer PIM systems in different administrative domains. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer connect-source Examples of Configuring and Viewing MSDP R3(conf)#ip multicast-msdp R3(conf)#ip msdp peer 192.168.0.
R3(conf)#do show ip msdp summary Peer Addr Description Local Addr State Source SA Up/Down To view details about a peer, use the show ip msdp peer command in EXEC privilege mode. Multicast sources in remote domains are stored on the RP in the source-active cache (SA cache). The system does not create entries in the multicast routing table until there is a local receiver for the corresponding multicast group. R3#show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.1 Local Addr: 192.168.0.
show ip msdp sa-limit If the total number of active sources is already larger than the limit when limiting is applied, the sources that are already in Dell Networking OS are not discarded. To enforce the limit in such a situation, use the clear ip msdp sa-cache command to clear all existing entries. Clearing the Source-Active Cache To clear the source-active cache, use the following command. • Clear the SA cache of all, local, or rejected entries, or entries for a specific group.
Figure 86.
Figure 87.
Figure 88. MSDP Default Peer, Scenario 4 Specifying Source-Active Messages To specify messages, use the following command. • Specify the forwarding-peer and originating-RP from which all active sources are accepted without regard for the RPF check. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp default-peer ip-address list If you do not specify an access list, the peer accepts all sources that peer advertises. All sources from RPs that the ACL denies are subject to the normal RPF check.
GroupAddr 229.0.50.2 229.0.50.3 229.0.50.4 SourceAddr 24.0.50.2 24.0.50.3 24.0.50.4 RPAddr 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 200.0.0.50 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 10.0.50.2 Dell#ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 3 rejected SAs received, cache-size 32766 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:33:18 229.0.50.64 24.0.50.64 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.65 24.0.50.65 200.0.1.50 00:33:18 229.0.50.66 24.0.50.66 200.0.1.50 Expire 73 73 73 UpTime 00:13:49 00:13:49 00:13:49 LearnedFrom 10.0.50.2 10.
R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache R1_E600(conf)#do show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 1 rejected SAs received, cache-size 1000 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr LearnedFrom 00:02:20 239.0.0.1 10.11.4.2 192.168.0.1 local Reason Redistribute Preventing MSDP from Caching a Remote Source To prevent MSDP from caching a remote source, use the following commands. 1 OPTIONAL: Cache sources that the SA filter denies in the rejected SA cache.
Example of Verifying the System is not Advertising Local Sources In the following example, R1 stops advertising source 10.11.4.2. Because it is already in the SA cache of R3, the entry remains there until it expires. [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show run msdp ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ip msdp sa-filter out 192.168.0.3 list mylocalfilter R1(conf)#do show run acl ! ip access-list extended mylocalfilter seq 5 deny ip host 239.0.0.1 host 10.11.4.
Output (S,G) filter: none [Router 1] R1(conf)#do show ip msdp peer Peer Addr: 192.168.0.3 Local Addr: 0.0.0.0(0) Connect Source: Lo 0 State: Inactive Up/Down Time: 00:00:03 Timers: KeepAlive 30 sec, Hold time 75 sec SourceActive packet count (in/out): 0/0 SAs learned from this peer: 0 SA Filtering: Clearing Peer Statistics To clear the peer statistics, use the following command. • Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all peer statistics.
03:17:10 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, 03:17:27 : MSDP-0: Peer 192.168.0.3, Input (S,G) filter: none Output (S,G) filter: none rcvd Keepalive msg sent Source Active msg MSDP with Anycast RP Anycast RP uses MSDP with PIM-SM to allow more than one active group to use RP mapping.
Figure 89. MSDP with Anycast RP Configuring Anycast RP To configure anycast RP, use the following commands. 1 In each routing domain that has multiple RPs serving a group, create a Loopback interface on each RP serving the group with the same IP address. CONFIGURATION mode interface loopback 2 Make this address the RP for the group.
4 Peer each RP with every other RP using MSDP, specifying the unique Loopback address as the connect-source. CONFIGURATION mode ip msdp peer 5 Advertise the network of each of the unique Loopback addresses throughout the network. ROUTER OSPF mode network Reducing Source-Active Message Flooding RPs flood source-active messages to all of their peers away from the RP.
interface Loopback 1 ip address 192.168.0.11/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.11/32 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp peer 192.168.0.22 connect-source Loopback 1 ip msdp mesh-group AS100 192.168.0.22 ip msdp originator-id Loopback 1! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.
The following example shows an R3 configuration for MSDP with Anycast RP. ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.0.32/24 no shutdown interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/41 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.
interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.1/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.2.0/24 area 0 network 10.11.1.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.1/32 area 0 network 10.11.3.0/24 area 0 ! ip multicast-msdp ip msdp peer 192.168.0.3 connect-source Loopback 0 ! ip pim rp-address 192.168.0.1 group-address 224.0.0.0/4 MSDP Sample Configuration: R2 Running-Config ip multicast-routing ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.4.
ip address 10.11.6.34/24 no shutdown ! interface ManagementEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.11.80.3/24 no shutdown ! interface Loopback 0 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 192.168.0.3/32 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 network 10.11.6.0/24 area 0 network 192.168.0.3/32 area 0 redistribute static redistribute connected redistribute bgp 200 ! router bgp 200 redistribute ospf 1 neighbor 192.168.0.2 remote-as 100 neighbor 192.168.0.2 ebgp-multihop 255 neighbor 192.168.0.2 update-source Loopback 0 neighbor 192.168.0.
30 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP) — specified in IEEE 802.1Q-2003 — is a rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP)-based spanning tree variation that improves per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+). MSTP allows multiple spanning tree instances and allows you to map many VLANs to one spanning tree instance to reduce the total number of required instances. Protocol Overview MSTP — specified in IEEE 802.
• Enable Multiple Spanning Tree Globally • Adding and Removing Interfaces • Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances • Influencing MSTP Root Selection • Interoperate with Non-Dell Bridges • Changing the Region Name or Revision • Modifying Global Parameters • Modifying the Interface Parameters • Configuring an EdgePort • Flush MAC Addresses after a Topology Change • MSTP Sample Configurations • Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations Spanning Tree Variations The Dell Networking O
Related Configuration Tasks The following are the related configuration tasks for MSTP.
• spanning-tree 0 To remove an interface from the MSTP topology, use the no spanning-tree 0 command. Creating Multiple Spanning Tree Instances To create multiple spanning tree instances, use the following command. A single MSTI provides no more benefit than RSTP. To take full advantage of MSTP, create multiple MSTIs and map VLANs to them. • Create an MSTI. PROTOCOL MSTP mode msti Specify the keyword vlan then the VLANs that you want to participate in the MSTI.
Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.384 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e806.953e Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e809.c24a Designated port id is 128.
Changing the Region Name or Revision To change the region name or revision, use the following commands. • Change the region name. PROTOCOL MSTP mode name name • Change the region revision number. PROTOCOL MSTP mode revision number Example of the name Command To view the current region name and revision, use the show spanning-tree mst configuration command from EXEC Privilege mode.
NOTE: With large configurations (especially those configurations with more ports) Dell Networking recommends increasing the hello-time. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 2 seconds. 3 Change the max-age parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. 4 Change the max-hops parameter. PROTOCOL MSTP mode max-hops number The range is from 1 to 40. The default is 20.
Port Cost Default Value 25-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1700 40-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1400 50-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1200 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 200 Port Channel with 100 Mb/s Ethernet interfaces 180000 Port Channel with 1-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 18000 Port Channel with 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1800 Port Channel with 25-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 1200 Port Channel with 50-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 200 Port Channel with 100-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces 180
• If the interface to be shut down is a port channel, all the member ports are disabled in the hardware. • When you add a physical port to a port channel already in the Error Disable state, the new member port is also disabled in the hardware. • When you remove a physical port from a port channel in the Error Disable state, the error disabled state is cleared on this physical port (the physical port is enabled in the hardware).
Figure 91. MSTP with Three VLANs Mapped to Two Spanning Tree Instances Router 1 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/21,31 no shutdown Router 2 Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable MSTP globally and set the region name and revision map MSTP instances to the VLANs. 2 Assign Layer-2 interfaces to the MSTP topology. 3 Create VLANs mapped to MSTP instances tag interfaces to the VLANs.
MSTI 2 VLAN 200,300 ! (Step 2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/11 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/21 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! (Step 3) interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/11,21 no shutdown SFTOS Example Running-Configuration This example uses the following steps: 1 Enable
interface vlan 200 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit interface vlan 300 tagged 1/0/31 tagged 1/0/32 exit Debugging and Verifying MSTP Configurations To debut and verify MSTP configuration, use the following commands. • Display BPDUs. EXEC Privilege mode • debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu Display MSTP-triggered topology change messages.
Dell# 4w0d4h : MSTP: Sending BPDU on Te 2/21 : ProtId: 0, Ver: 3, Bpdu Type: MSTP, Flags 0x6e CIST Root Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, Ext Path Cost: 0 Regional Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e, CIST Port Id: 128:470 Msg Age: 0, Max Age: 20, Hello: 2, Fwd Delay: 15, Ver1 Len: 0, Ver3 Len: 96 Name: Tahiti, Rev: 123, Int Root Path Cost: 0 Rem Hops: 20, Bridge Id: 32768:0001.e806.953e 4w0d4h : INST 1: Flags: 0x6e, Reg Root: 32768:0001.e806.
31 Multicast Features NOTE: Multicast routing is supported on secondary IP addresses; it is not supported on IPv6. NOTE: Multicast routing is supported across default and non-default virtual routing and forwarding (VRFs).
Protocol Ethernet Address 01:00:5e:00:00:06 RIP 01:00:5e:00:00:09 NTP 01:00:5e:00:01:01 VRRP 01:00:5e:00:00:12 PIM-SM 01:00:5e:00:00:0d • The Dell Networking OS implementation of MTRACE is in accordance with IETF draft draft-fenner-traceroute-ipm. • Multicast is not supported on secondary IP addresses. • If you enable multicast routing, egress Layer 3 ACL is not applied to multicast data traffic. Multicast Policies The Dell Networking OS supports multicast features for IPv4.
ip multicast-limit The range is from 1 to 16000. The default is 4000. NOTE: The IN-L3-McastFib CAM partition stores multicast routes and is a separate hardware limit that exists per port-pipe. Any software-configured limit may supersede this hardware space limitation. The opposite is also true, the CAM partition might not be exhausted at the time the system-wide route limit is reached using the ip multicast-limit command.
Figure 92. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 61. Preventing a Host from Joining a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
Preventing a PIM Router from Forming an Adjacency To prevent a router from participating in PIM (for example, to configure stub multicast routing), use the following command. • Prevent a router from participating in PIM. INTERFACE mode ip pim neighbor-filter Setting a Threshold for Switching to the SPT The functionality to specify a threshold for switchover to the shortest path trees (SPTs) is available on the system.
Figure 93. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group The following table lists the location and description shown in the previous illustration. Table 63. Preventing a Source from Transmitting to a Group — Description Location Description 1/21 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/21 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.1/24 no shutdown 1/31 • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.13.
Location Description • no shutdown 2/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.1.1/24 no shutdown 2/11 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.12.2/24 no shutdown 2/31 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.23.1/24 no shutdown 3/1 • • • • Interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip pim sparse-mode ip address 10.11.5.
Preventing a PIM Router from Processing a Join To permit or deny PIM Join/Prune messages on an interface using an extended IP access list, use the following command. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends not using the ip pim join-filter command on an interface between a source and the RP router. Using this command in this scenario could cause problems with the PIM-SM source registration process resulting in excessive traffic being sent to the CPU of both the RP and PIM DR of the source.
Important Points to Remember • Destination address of the mtrace query message can be either a unicast or a multicast address. NOTE: When you use mtrace to trace a specific multicast group, the query is sent with the group's address as the destination. Retries of the query use the unicast address of the receiver. • When you issue an mtrace without specifying a group address (weak mtrace), the destination address is considered as the unicast address of the receiver.
• Source Network/Mask — source mask Example of the mtrace Command to View the Network Path The following is an example of tracing a multicast route. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort. Querying reverse path for source 103.103.103.3 to destination 1.1.1.1 via group 226.0.0.
The response data block filled in by the last-hop router contains a Forwarding code field. Forwarding code can be added at any node and is not restricted to the last hop router. This field is used to record error codes before forwarding the response to the next neighbor in the path towards the source. In a response data packet, the following error codes are supported: Table 65.
Scenario Output -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command specifying the source multicast tree and multicast group without specifying the destination. Mtrace traces the complete path traversing through the multicast group to reach the source. The output displays the destination and the first hop (-1) as 0 to indicate any PIM enabled interface on the node. R1>mtrace 103.103.103.3 1.1.1.1 226.0.0.3 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
Scenario Output 103.103.103.0/24 -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 103.103.103.0/24 -4 103.103.103.3 --> Source ----------------------------------------------------------------- You can issue the mtrace command by providing the source and multicast information. However, if the multicast group is a shared group (*,G), then mtrace traces the path of the shared tree until it reaches the RP. The source mask field reflects the shared tree that is being used to trace the path.
Scenario Output -3 10.10.10.1 PIM No route default ----------------------------------------------------------------- If a multicast tree is not formed due to a configuration issue (for example, PIM is not enabled on one of the interfaces on the path), you can invoke a weak mtrace to identify the location in the network where the error has originated. R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
Scenario Output -3 2.2.2.1 PIM 99.99.0.0/16 -4 * * * * ----------------------------------------------------------------- If there is no response for mtrace even after switching to expanded hop search, the command displays an error message. R1>mtrace 99.99.99.99 1.1.1.1 Type Ctrl-C to abort. While traversing the path from source to destination, if the mtrace packet exhausts the maximum buffer size of the packet, then NO SPACE error is displayed in the output.
Scenario Output such a scenario, a corresponding error message is displayed. ---------------------------------------------------------------|Hop| OIF IP |Proto| Forwarding Code |Source Network/ Mask| ---------------------------------------------------------------0 4.4.4.5 --> Destination -1 4.4.4.4 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -2 20.20.20.2 PIM 6.6.6.0/24 -3 10.10.10.1 PIM Wrong interface 6.6.6.0/24 ----------------------------------------------------------------R1>mtrace 6.6.6.6 4.4.4.5 Type Ctrl-C to abort.
32 Object Tracking IPv4 or IPv6 object tracking is available on Dell Networking OS. Object tracking allows the Dell Networking OS client processes, such as virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP), to monitor tracked objects (for example, interface or link status) and take appropriate action when the state of an object changes. NOTE: In Dell Networking OS release version 8.4.1.0, object tracking is supported only on VRRP.
Figure 94. Object Tracking Example When you configure a tracked object, such as an IPv4/IPv6 a route or interface, you specify an object number to identify the object. Optionally, you can also specify: • UP and DOWN thresholds used to report changes in a route metric. • A time delay before changes in a tracked object’s state are reported to a client. Track Layer 2 Interfaces You can create an object to track the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface.
Track IPv4 and IPv6 Routes You can create an object that tracks an IPv4 or IPv6 route entry in the routing table. Specify a tracked route by its IPv4 or IPv6 address and prefix-length. Optionally specify a tracked route by a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance name if the route to be tracked is part of a VRF. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of the tracked object.
Set Tracking Delays You can configure an optional UP and/or DOWN timer for each tracked object to set the time delay before a change in the state of a tracked object is communicated to clients. The configured time delay starts when the state changes from UP to DOWN or the opposite way. If the state of an object changes back to its former UP/DOWN state before the timer expires, the timer is cancelled and the client is not notified.
To configure object tracking on the status of a Layer 2 interface, use the following commands. 1 Configure object tracking on the line-protocol state of a Layer 2 interface. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id interface interface line-protocol Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535. 2 (Optional) Configure the time delay used before communicating a change in the status of a tracked interface. OBJECT TRACKING mode delay {[up seconds] [down seconds]} Valid delay times are from 0 to 180 seconds.
For an IPv6 interface, a routing object only tracks the UP/DOWN status of the specified IPv6 interface (the track interface ipv6routing command). • The status of an IPv6 interface is UP only if the Layer 2 status of the interface is UP and the interface has a valid IPv6 address. • The Layer 3 status of an IPv6 interface goes DOWN when its Layer 2 status goes down (for a Layer 3 VLAN, all VLAN ports must be down) or the IPv6 address is removed from the routing table.
Interface TenGigabitEthernet 7/11 ipv6 routing Description: Austin access point Track an IPv4/IPv6 Route You can create an object that tracks the reachability or metric of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. You specify the route to be tracked by its address and prefix-length values. Optionally, for an IPv4 route, you can enter a VRF instance name if the route is part of a VPN routing and forwarding (VRF) table. The next-hop address is not part of the definition of a tracked IPv4/IPv6 route.
Tracking Route Reachability Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. To remove object tracking, use the no track object-id command. 1 Configure object tracking on the reachability of an IPv4 or IPv6 route. CONFIGURATION mode track object-id {ip route ip-address/prefix-len | ipv6 route ipv6-address/prefix-len} reachability [vrf vrf-name] Valid object IDs are from 1 to 65535.
The following example configures object tracking on the reachability of an IPv6 route: Dell(conf)#track 105 ipv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Dell(conf-track-105)#delay down 5 Dell(conf-track-105)#description Headquarters Dell(conf-track-105)#end Dell#show track 105 Track 105 IPv6 route 1234::/64 reachability Description: Headquarters Reachability is Down (route not in route table) 2 changes, last change 00:03:03 Tracking a Metric Threshold Use the following commands to configure object tracking on the met
threshold metric {[up number] [down number]} The default UP threshold is 254. The routing state is UP if the scaled route metric is less than or equal to the UP threshold. The defult DOWN threshold is 255. The routing state is DOWN if the scaled route metric is greater than or equal to the DOWN threshold. 6 (Optional) Display the tracking configuration.
First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Tracked by: VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 2/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 3 IPv6 route 2050::/64 reachability Reachability is Up (STATIC) 5 changes, last change 00:02:16 First-hop interface is TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Tracked by: VRRP TenGigabitEthernet 2/30 IPv6 VRID 1 Track 4 Interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 ip routing IP routing is Up 3 changes, last change 00:03:30 Tracked by: Example of the show track brief Command Router# show track brief ResId State 1 Resource LastChange
33 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) Open shortest path first (OSPFv2 for IPv4) and OSPF version 3 (OSPF for IPv6) are supported on Dell Networking OS. This chapter provides a general description of OSPFv2 (OSPF for IPv4) and OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6) as supported in the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). NOTE: The fundamental mechanisms of OSPF (flooding, DR election, area support, SPF calculations, and so on) are the same between OSPFv2 and OSPFv3.
Areas allow you to further organize your routers within in the AS. One or more areas are required within the AS. Areas are valuable in that they allow sub-networks to "hide" within the AS, thus minimizing the size of the routing tables on all routers. An area within the AS may not see the details of another area’s topology. AS areas are known by their area number or the router’s IP address. Figure 95. Autonomous System Areas Area Types The backbone of the network is Area 0. It is also called Area 0.0.0.
• A not-so-stubby area (NSSA) can import AS external route information and send it to the backbone. It cannot receive external AS information from the backbone or other areas. • Totally stubby areas are referred to as no summary areas in the Dell Networking OS. Networks and Neighbors As a link-state protocol, OSPF sends routing information to other OSPF routers concerning the state of the links between them. The state (up or down) of those links is important.
Figure 96. OSPF Routing Examples Backbone Router (BR) A backbone router (BR) is part of the OSPF Backbone, Area 0. This includes all ABRs. It can also include any routers that connect only to the backbone and another ABR, but are only part of Area 0, such as Router I in the previous example. Area Border Router (ABR) Within an AS, an area border router (ABR) connects one or more areas to the backbone.
An ABR can connect to many areas in an AS, and is considered a member of each area it connects to. Autonomous System Border Router (ASBR) The autonomous system border area router (ASBR) connects to more than one AS and exchanges information with the routers in other ASs. Generally, the ASBR connects to a non-interior gate protocol (IGP) such as BGP or uses static routes.
• Type 7: External LSA — Routers in an NSSA do not receive external LSAs from ABRs, but are allowed to send external routing information for redistribution. They use Type 7 LSAs to tell the ABRs about these external routes, which the ABR then translates to Type 5 external LSAs and floods as normal to the rest of the OSPF network. • Type 8: Link LSA (OSPFv3) — This LSA carries the IPv6 address information of the local links.
Figure 97. Priority and Cost Examples OSPF with Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS supports up to 10,000 OSPF routes for OSPFv2. Within the that 10,000 routes, you can designate up to 8,000 routes as external and up to 2,000 as inter/intra area routes. Dell Networking OS version 9.4(0.0) and later support only one OSPFv2 process per VRF. Dell Networking OS version 9.7(0.0) and later support OSPFv3 in VRF. Also, on OSPFv3, Dell Networking OS supports only one OSPFv3 process per VRF.
Graceful Restart When a router goes down without a graceful restart, there is a possibility for loss of access to parts of the network due to ongoing network topology changes. Additionally, LSA flooding and reconvergence can cause substantial delays. It is, therefore, desirable that the network maintains a stable topology if it is possible for data flow to continue uninterrupted.
Fast Convergence (OSPFv2, IPv4 Only) Fast convergence allows you to define the speeds at which LSAs are originated and accepted, and reduce OSPFv2 end-to-end convergence time. Dell Networking OS allows you to accept and originate LSAs as soon as they are available to speed up route information propagation. NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies.
ACKs 2 (shown in bold) is printed only for ACK packets. The following example shows no change in the updated packets (shown in bold). ACKs 2 (shown in bold) is printed only for ACK packets. 00:10:41 : OSPF(1000:00): Rcv. v:2 t:5(LSAck) l:64 Acks 2 rid:2.2.2.2 aid:1500 chk:0xdbee aut:0 auk: keyid:0 from:Vl 1000 LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.1.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c LSType:Type-5 AS External id:160.1.2.0 adv:6.1.0.0 seq:0x8000000c 00:10:41 : OSPF(1000:00): Rcv. v:2 t:5(LSAck) l:64 Acks 2 rid:2.2.2.
Examples of Setting and Viewing a Dead Interval In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold). Dell(conf)#int tengigabitethernet 2/2 Dell(conf-if-te-2/2)#ip ospf hello-interval 20 Dell(conf-if-te-2/2)#ip ospf dead-interval 80 Dell(conf-if-te-2/2)# In the following example, the dead interval is set at 4x the hello interval (shown in bold).
• Troubleshooting OSPFv2 1 Configure a physical interface. Assign an IP address, physical or Loopback, to the interface to enable Layer 3 routing. 2 Enable OSPF globally. Assign network area and neighbors. 3 Add interfaces or configure other attributes. 4 Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation.
The OSPF process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process. The router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process. After the OSPF process and the VRF are tied together, the OSPF process ID cannot be used again in the system.
• Enable OSPFv2 on an interface and assign a network address range to a specific OSPF area. CONFIG-ROUTER-OSPF-id mode network ip-address mask area area-id The IP Address Format is A.B.C.D/M. The area ID range is from 0 to 65535 or A.B.C.D/M. Enable OSPFv2 on Interfaces Enable and configure OSPFv2 on each interface (configure for Layer 3 protocol), and not shutdown. You can also assign OSPFv2 to a Loopback interface as a virtual interface.
Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State BDR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 13.1.1.1, Interface address 10.2.3.2 Backup Designated Router (ID) 11.1.2.1, Interface address 10.2.3.1 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:05 Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 13.1.1.1 (Designated Router) Dell> Loopback interfaces also help the OSPF process.
area area-id stub [no-summary] Use the keywords no-summary to prevent transmission into the area of summary ASBR LSAs. Area ID is the number or IP address assigned when creating the area. Example of the show ip ospf database database-summary Command To view which LSAs are transmitted, use the show ip ospf database process-id database-summary command in EXEC Privilege mode. Dell#show ip ospf 34 database database-summary OSPF Router with ID (10.1.2.100) (Process ID 34) Area 2.2.2.2 3.3.3.
Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 13:39:46 Neighbor Count is 0, Adjacent neighbor count is 0 TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 is up, line protocol is down Internet Address 10.1.3.100/24, Area 2.2.2.2 Process ID 34, Router ID 10.1.2.100, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 10 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DR, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 10.1.2.100, Interface address 10.1.3.100 Backup Designated Router (ID) 0.0.0.0, Interface address 0.0.0.
Dell#(conf)#ex Dell##show ip ospf 1 Routing Process ospf 1 with ID 192.168.67.2 Supports only single TOS (TOS0) routes SPF schedule delay 5 secs, Hold time between two SPFs 10 secs Convergence Level 0 Min LSA origination 5 secs, Min LSA arrival 1 secs Number of area in this router is 0, normal 0 stub 0 nssa 0 Dell# Changing OSPFv2 Parameters on Interfaces In Dell Networking OS, you can modify the OSPF settings on the interfaces.
• • number: the range is from 0 to 255 (the default is 1). Change the retransmission interval between LSAs. CONFIG-INTERFACE mode ip ospf retransmit-interval seconds • • seconds: the range is from 1 to 65535 (the default is 5 seconds). The retransmit interval must be the same on all routers in the OSPF network. Change the wait period between link state update packets sent out the interface.
ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds This setting is the amount of time OSPF has available to change its interface authentication type. When you configure the auth-change-wait-time, OSPF sends out only the old authentication scheme until the wait timer expires. After the wait timer expires, OSPF sends only the new authentication scheme.
• Helper-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only as a helper router. • Restart-only: the OSPFv2 router supports graceful-restart only during unplanned restarts. By default, OSPFv2 supports both restarting and helper roles. Selecting one or the other role restricts OSPFv2 to the single selected role. To disable OSPFv2 graceful-restart after you have enabled it, use the no graceful-restart grace-period command in CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF- id mode.
CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id mode distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] • Assign a configured prefix list to outgoing OSPF routes. CONFIG-ROUTEROSPF-id distribute-list prefix-list-name out [connected | isis | rip | static] Redistributing Routes You can add routes from other routing instances or protocols to the OSPF process. With the redistribute command, you can include RIP, static, or directly connected routes in the OSPF process.
• Have the OSPF routes been included in the routing table (not just the OSPF database)? Some useful troubleshooting commands are: • show interfaces • show protocols • debug IP OSPF events and/or packets • show neighbors • show routes To help troubleshoot OSPFv2, use the following commands. • View the summary of all OSPF process IDs enables on the router. EXEC Privilege mode show running-config ospf • View the summary information of the IP routes.
router-id 10.10.10.10 Dell# Sample Configurations for OSPFv2 The following configurations are examples for enabling OSPFv2. These examples are not comprehensive directions. They are intended to give you some guidance with typical configurations. You can copy and paste from these examples to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes. Basic OSPFv2 Router Topology The following illustration is a sample basic OSPFv2 topology.
network 10.0.13.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.23.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 30 ip address 192.168.100.100/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 ip address 10.1.13.3/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 3/2 ip address 10.2.13.3/24 no shutdown OSPF Area 0 — Te 2/1 and 2/2 router ospf 22222 network 192.168.100.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.21.0/24 area 0 network 10.2.22.0/24 area 0 ! interface Loopback 20 ip address 192.168.100.
NOTE: To set the interval time between the reception of topology changes and calculation of SPF in milli seconds, use the timers spf delay holdtime msec command.
The format is A:B:C::F/128. 2 Bring up the interface. CONF-INT-type slot/port mode no shutdown Assigning Area ID on an Interface To assign the OSPFv3 process to an interface, use the following command. The ipv6 ospf area command enables OSPFv3 on an interface and places the interface in the specified area. Additionally, the command creates the OSPFv3 process with ID on the router.
Assigning OSPFv3 Process ID and Router ID to a VRF To assign, disable, or reset OSPFv3 on a non-default VRF, use the following commands. • Enable the OSPFv3 process on a non-default VRF and enter OSPFv3 mode. CONFIGURATION mode ipv6 router ospf {process ID} vrf {vrf-name} • The process ID range is from 0 to 65535. Assign the router ID for this OSPFv3 process. CONF-IPV6-ROUTER-OSPF mode router-id {number} • number: the IPv4 address. The format is A.B.C.D.
Interface: identifies the specific interface that is passive. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
Enabling OSPFv3 Graceful Restart Follow the procedure in this section to configure graceful restart for OSPFv3. By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA. . By default, OSPFv3 graceful restart is disabled and functions only in a helper role to help restarting neighbor routers in their graceful restarts when it receives a Grace LSA.
EXEC Privilege mode • show run ospf Display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode • show ipv6 ospf [vrf vrf-name] database grace-lsa Display the currently configured OSPFv3 parameters for graceful restart (shown in the following example). EXEC Privilege mode show ipv6 ospf database [vrf vrf-name] database-summary Examples of the Graceful Restart show Commands The following example shows the show run ospf command.
LS Age Link State ID Advertising Router LS Seq Number Checksum Length Associated Interface Restart Interval Restart Reason : : : : : : : : : 10 6.16.192.66 100.1.1.1 0x80000001 0x1DF1 36 Te 5/3 180 Switch to Redundant Processor OSPFv3 Authentication Using IPsec OSPFv3 uses IPsec to provide authentication for OSPFv3 packets. IPsec authentication ensures security in the transmission of OSPFv3 packets between IPsec-enabled routers.
• You can only enable one security protocol (AH or ESP) at a time on an interface or for an area. Enable IPsec AH with the ipv6 ospf authentication command; enable IPsec ESP with the ipv6 ospf encryption command. • The security policy configured for an area is inherited by default on all interfaces in the area. • The security policy configured on an interface overrides any area-level configured security for the area to which the interface is assigned.
• • key: specifies the text string used in authentication. All neighboring OSPFv3 routers must share key to exchange information. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). Remove an IPsec authentication policy from an interface.
Configuring IPSec Authentication for an OSPFv3 Area To configure, remove, or display IPSec authentication for an OSPFv3 area, use the following commands. Prerequisite: Before you enable IPsec authentication on an OSPFv3 area, first enable OSPFv3 globally on the router (refer to Configuration Task List for OSPFv3 (OSPF for IPv6)). The security policy index (SPI) value must be unique to one IPSec security policy (authentication or encryption) on the router.
area area-id encryption ipsec spi number esp encryption-algorithm [key-encryption-type] key authentication-algorithm [key-authentication-type] key • • • area area-id: specifies the area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be encrypted. For area-id, enter a number or an IPv6 prefix. • spi number: is the security policy index (SPI) value. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. • esp encryption-algorithm: specifies the encryption algorithm used with ESP. The valid values are 3DES, DES, AES-CBC, and NULL.
Policy refcount Inbound ESP SPI Outbound ESP SPI Inbound ESP Auth Key Outbound ESP Auth Key Inbound ESP Cipher Key Outbound ESP Cipher Key Transform set : : : : : : : : 1 502 (0x1F6) 502 (0x1F6) 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c12 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 123456789a123456789b123456789c123456789d12345678 esp-3des esp-md5-hmac Crypto IPSec client security policy data Policy name Policy refcount Inbound AH SPI Outbound AH SPI Inbound AH Key Outbound AH K
transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE outbound esp sas spi : 600 (0x258) transform : esp-des esp-sha1-hmac in use settings : {Transport, } replay detection support : N STATUS : ACTIVE Troubleshooting OSPFv3 The system provides several tools to troubleshoot OSPFv3 operation on the switch. This section describes typical, OSPFv3 troubleshooting scenarios.
• For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. • For a port channel interface, enter the keywords port-channel then a number. • For a VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
34 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows a switch to make routing decisions based on policies applied to an interface. Overview When a router receives a packet, the router decides where to forward the packet based on the destination address in the packet, which is used to look up an entry in a routing table. However, in some cases, there may be a need to forward the packet based on other criteria: size, source, protocol type, destination, and so on.
• Destination port • TCP Flags After you apply a redirect-list to an interface, all traffic passing through it is subjected to the rules defined in the redirect-list. Traffic is forwarded based on the following: • Next-hop addresses are verified. If the specified next hop is reachable, traffic is forwarded to the specified next-hop. • If the specified next-hops are not reachable, the normal routing table is used to forward the traffic.
• Apply a Redirect-list to an Interface using a Redirect-group PBR Exceptions (Permit) To create an exception to a redirect list, use thepermit command. Exceptions are used when a forwarding decision should be based on the routing table rather than a routing policy. The Dell Networking OS assigns the first available sequence number to a rule configured without a sequence number and inserts the rule into the PBR CAM region next to the existing entries.
• number is the number in sequence to initiate this rule • ip-address is the Forwarding router’s address • tunnel is used to configure the tunnel settings • tunnel-id is used to redirect the traffic • track is used to track the object-id • track is to enable the tracking • FORMAT: A.B.C.
You can apply multiple rules to a single redirect-list. The rules are applied in ascending order, starting with the rule that has the lowest sequence number in a redirect-list displays the correct method for applying multiple rules to one list.
Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address ip redirect-group test ip redirect-group xyz shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#ip redirect-group test Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#ip redirect-group xyz Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)#show config ! interface GigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address ip redirect-group test ip redirect-group xyz shutdown Dell(conf-if-gi-1/1)# In addition to supporting multiple redirect-lists in a redirect-group, multiple redirect-groups are supported on
[up], Next-hop reachable (via Po 7) [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 2/18) [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 2/19) , Track 200 , Track 200 Use the show ip redirect-list (without the list name) to display all the redirect-lists configured on the device. Dell#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list rcl0: Defined as: seq 5 permit ip 200.200.200.200 200.200.200.200 199.199.199.199 199.199.199.199 seq 10 redirect 1.1.1.2 tcp 234.224.234.234 255.234.234.234 222.222.222.
Create the Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-if-Te-2/23)#ip redirect-list GOLD EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#direct 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)# seq 15 permit ip any any EDGE_ROUTER(conf-redirect-list)#show config ! ip redirect-list GOLD description Route GOLD traffic to ISP_GOLD. seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.
View Redirect-List GOLD EDGE_ROUTER#show ip redirect-list IP redirect-list GOLD: Defined as: seq 5 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.1.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23) seq 10 redirect 10.99.99.254 ip 192.168.2.0/24 any, Next-hop reachable (via Te 3/23) seq 15 permit ip any any Applied interfaces: Te 2/11 EDGE_ROUTER# Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Redirect IPs Create Track Objects to track the Redirect IPs: Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#track 3 ip host 42.1.1.
seq 20 redirect 42.1.1.2 track 3 udp any host 144.144.144.144, Track 3 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) seq 25 redirect 43.1.1.2 track 4 ip host 7.7.7.7 host 144.144.144.144, Track 4 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Vl 20) Applied interfaces: Te 2/28 Dell# Creating a PBR list using Explicit Track Objects for Tunnel Interfaces Creating steps for Tunnel Interfaces: Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 1 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel destination 40.1.1.2 Dell(conf-if-tu-1)#tunnel source 40.1.1.
Dell(conf-if-te-2/28)#exit Dell(conf)#end Verify the Applied Redirect Rules: Dell#show ip redirect-list explicit_tunnel IP redirect-list explicit_tunnel: Defined as: seq 5 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp 155.55.2.0/24 222.22.2.0/24, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 10 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 tcp any any, Track 1 [up], Next-hop reachable (via Te 1/32) seq 15 redirect tunnel 1 track 1 udp 155.55.0.0/16 host 144.144.144.
35 PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) Protocol-independent multicast sparse-mode (PIM-SM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic to a subnet only after a request using a PIM Join message; this behavior is the opposite of PIM-Dense mode, which forwards multicast traffic to all subnets until a request to stop. Implementation Information The following information is necessary for implementing PIM-SM.
Refuse Multicast Traffic A host requesting to leave a multicast group sends an IGMP Leave message to the last-hop DR. If the host is the only remaining receiver for that group on the subnet, the last-hop DR is responsible for sending a PIM Prune message up the RPT to prune its branch to the RP. 1 After receiving an IGMP Leave message, the gateway removes the interface on which it is received from the outgoing interface list of the (*,G) entry.
ip multicast-routing Related Configuration Tasks The following are related PIM-SM configuration tasks. • Configuring S,G Expiry Timers • Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point • Configuring a Designated Router • Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains Enable PIM-SM You must enable PIM-SM on each participating interface. 1 Enable multicast routing on the system. CONFIGURATION mode ip multicast-routing 2 Enable PIM-Sparse mode.
Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/11 TenGigabitEthernet 2/13 (10.87.31.5, 192.1.2.1), uptime 00:01:24, expires 00:02:26, flags: FT Incoming interface: TenGigabitEthernet 2/11, RPF neighbor 0.0.0.0 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/11 TenGigabitEthernet 1/12 TenGigabitEthernet 2/13 --More-- Configuring S,G Expiry Timers By default, S, G entries expire in 210 seconds. You can configure a global expiry time (for all [S,G] entries) or configure an expiry time for a particular entry.
Configuring a Static Rendezvous Point The rendezvous point (RP) is a PIM-enabled interface on a router that acts as the root a group-specific tree; every group must have an RP. • Identify an RP by the IP address of a PIM-enabled or Loopback interface. ip pim rp-address Example of Viewing an RP on a Loopback Interface Dell#sh run int loop0 ! interface Loopback 0 ip address 1.1.1.1/32 ip pim sparse-mode no shutdown Dell#sh run pim ! ip pim rp-address 1.1.1.1 group-address 224.0.0.
• Change the interval at which a router sends hello messages. INTERFACE mode ip pim query-interval seconds • Display the current value of these parameter. EXEC Privilege mode show ip pim interface Creating Multicast Boundaries and Domains A PIM domain is a contiguous set of routers that all implement PIM and are configured to operate within a common boundary defined by PIM multicast border routers (PMBRs). PMBRs connect each PIM domain to the rest of the Internet.
36 PIM Source-Specific Mode (PIM-SSM) PIM source-specific mode (PIM-SSM) is a multicast protocol that forwards multicast traffic from a single source to a subnet. In the other versions of protocol independent multicast (PIM), a receiver subscribes to a group only. The receiver receives traffic not just from the source in which it is interested but from all sources sending to that group.
Configure PIM-SSM Configuring PIM-SSM is a two-step process. 1 Configure PIM-SSM. 2 Enable PIM-SSM for a range of addresses. Related Configuration Tasks • Use PIM-SSM with IGMP Version 2 Hosts Enabling PIM-SSM To enable PIM-SSM, follow these steps. 1 Create an ACL that uses permit rules to specify what range of addresses should use SSM. CONFIGURATION mode ip access-list standard name 2 Enter the ip pim ssm-range command and specify the ACL you created.
To display the source to which a group is mapped, use the show ip igmp ssm-map [group] command. If you use the group option, the command displays the group-to-source mapping even if the group is not currently in the IGMP group table. If you do not specify the group option, the display is a list of groups currently in the IGMP group table that has a group-to-source mapping. To display the list of sources mapped to a group currently in the IGMP group table, use the show ip igmp groups group detail command.
! ip access-list standard ssm seq 5 permit host 239.0.0.2 R1(conf)#ip igmp ssm-map map 10.11.5.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp groups Total Number of Groups: 2 IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime 239.0.0.2 Vlan 300 IGMPv2-Compat 00:00:07 Member Ports: Te 1/1 239.0.0.1 Vlan 400 INCLUDE 00:00:10 Never 10.11.4.2 R1(conf)#do show ip igmp ssm-map IGMP Connected Group Membership Group Address Interface Mode Uptime 239.0.0.
4 The BSR floods the RP-Set throughout the domain periodically in case new C-RPs are announced, or an RP failure occurs. To enable RP election, perform the following steps: 1 Enter the following command to make a PIM router a BSR candidate: CONFIGURATION ip pim bsr-candidate 2 Enter the following command to make a PIM router a RP candidate: CONFIGURATION ip pim rp-candidate 3 Display Bootstrap Router information.
37 Port Monitoring Port monitoring (also referred to as mirroring ) allows you to monitor ingress and/or egress traffic on specified ports. The mirrored traffic can be sent to a port to which a network analyzer is connected to inspect or troubleshoot the traffic. Mirroring is used for monitoring Ingress or Egress or both Ingress and Egress traffic on a specific port(s). This mirrored traffic can be sent to a port where a network sniffer can connect and monitor the traffic.
• • Source port (MD) can be a VLAN, where the VLAN traffic received on that port pipe where its members are present is monitored Single MD can be monitored on max. of 4 MG ports. Port Monitoring Port monitoring is supported on both physical and logical interfaces, such as VLAN and port-channel interfaces. The source port (MD) with monitored traffic and the destination ports (MG) to which an analyzer can be attached must be on the same switch.
Te 1/17 N/A Dell# No 300 N/A Te 1/1 yes rx interface 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Example of Configuring Another Monitoring Session with a Previously Used Destination Port Dell(conf)#monitor session 300 Dell(conf-mon-sess-300)#source TenGig 1/17 destination TenGig 1/4 direction tx % Error: Exceeding max MG ports for this MD port pipe.
Dell Networking OS Behavior: All monitored frames are tagged if the configured monitoring direction is egress (TX), regardless of whether the monitored port (MD) is a Layer 2 or Layer 3 port. If the MD port is a Layer 2 port, the frames are tagged with the VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the MD belongs. If the MD port is a Layer 3 port, the frames are tagged with VLAN ID 4095. If the MD port is in a Layer 3 VLAN, the frames are tagged with the respective Layer 3 VLAN ID.
Dell(conf)#monitor session 1 Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#source vl 40 dest ten 1/3 dir rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#flow-based enable Dell(conf-mon-sess-1)#exit Dell(conf)#do show monitor session SessID Source Destination Dir Mode Source IP Gre-Protocol FcMonitor ------ ------------------ ---------------------- --------0 Te 1/1 Te 1/2 rx Port 0.0.0.0 A N/A No 0 Po 10 Te 1/2 rx Port 0.0.0.0 A N/A No 1 Vl 40 Te 1/3 rx Flow 0.0.0.0 A N/A No Dest IP DSCP TTL Drop Rate -------- ---- --- ---- ---- 0.0.0.
monitor multicast-queue queue-id Dell(conf)#monitor multicast-queue 7 2 Verify information about monitor configurations. EXEC mode EXEC Privilege mode show run monitor session Dell#show run monitor session ! monitor multicast-queue 7 Dell# Enabling Flow-Based Monitoring Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead of all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic.
! Extended Ingress IP access list testflow on TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 Total cam count 4 seq 5 permit icmp any any 53 monitor 53 count bytes (0 packets 0 bytes) seq 10 permit ip 102.1.1.
Figure 101. Remote Port Mirroring Configuring Remote Port Mirroring Remote port mirroring requires a source session (monitored ports on different source switches), a reserved tagged VLAN for transporting mirrored traffic (configured on source, intermediate, and destination switches), and a destination session (destination ports connected to analyzers on destination switches).
• The L3 interface configuration should be blocked for RPM VLAN. • The member port of the reserved VLAN should have MTU and IPMTU value as MAX+4 (to hold the VLAN tag parameter). • To associate with source session, the reserved VLAN can have at max of only 4 member ports. • To associate with destination session, the reserved VLAN can have multiple member ports.
• On a source switch on which you configure source ports for remote port mirroring, you can add only one port to the dedicated RPM VLAN which is used to transport mirrored traffic. You can configure multiple ports for the dedicated RPM VLAN on intermediate and destination switches. Displaying Remote-Port Mirroring Configurations To display the current configuration of remote port mirroring for a specified session, enter the show config command in MONITOR SESSION configuration mode.
4 direction Specify rx, tx or both in case to monitor ingress/egress or both ingress and egress packets on the specified port.. 5 rpm source-ip dest-ip Specify the source ip address and the destination ip where the packet needs to be sent. 6 flow-based enable Specify flow-based enable for mirroring on a flow by flow basis and also for vlan as source. 7 no enable (Optional) No disable command is mandatory in order for a rpm session to be active.
Dell#show monitor session SessID Source Destination ------ ---------------1 Te 1/5 remote-vlan 10 2 Vl 100 remote-vlan 20 3 Po 10 remote-vlan 30 Dell# Dir --rx rx both Mode ---Port Flow Port Source IP --------N/A N/A N/A Dest IP -------N/A N/A N/A Configuring the sample Source Remote Port Mirroring Dell(conf)#inte te 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#exit Dell(conf)#interface te 1/2 Dell(conf-if-te-1/2)#switchport Dell(conf-if-te-1/2)#no shutdown
1 Enable control plane egress acl using the following command: 2 Create an extended MAC access list and add a deny rule of (0x0180c2xxxxxx) packets using the following commands: mac control-plane egress-acl mac access-list extended mac2 seq 5 deny any 01:80:c2:00:00:00 00:00:00:ff:ff:ff count 3 Apply ACL on that RPM VLAN. In this example RPM vlan is 10.
To configure an ERPM session: Table 68. Configuration steps for ERPM Step Command Purpose 1 configure terminal Enter global configuration mode. 2 monitor session type erpm Specify a session ID and ERPM as the type of monitoring session, and enter the Monitoring-Session configuration mode. The session number needs to be unique and not already defined. 3 source { interface | range } direction {rx | tx | both} Specify the source port or range of ports.
interface Vlan 11 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/1-3 mac access-group flow in <<<<<<<<<<<<<< Only ingress packets are supported for mirroring shutdown ERPM Behavior on a typical Dell Networking OS The Dell Networking OS is designed to support only the Encapsulation of the data received / transmitted at the specified source port (Port A). An ERPM destination session / decapsulation of the ERPM packets at the destination Switch are not supported. Figure 102.
b • The Header that gets attached to the packet is 38 bytes long. In case of a packet with L3 VLAN, it would be 42 bytes long. The original payload /original mirrored data starts from the 39th byte in a given ERPM packet. The first 38/42 bytes of the header needs to be ignored/ chopped off. • Some tools support options to edit the capture file. We can make use of such features (for example: editcap ) and chop the ERPM header part and save it to a new trace file. This new file (i.e.
as the VLTi link is added as an implicit member of the RPM vlan. As a result, the mirrored traffic also reaches the peer VLT device effecting VLTi link's bandwidth usage. To mitigate this issue, the L2 VLT egress mask drops the duplicate packets that egress out of the VLT port. If the LAG status of the peer VLT device is OPER-UP, then the other VLT peer blocks the transmission of packets received through VLTi to its port or LAG.
Scenario RPM Restriction Recommended Solution Mirroring Orphan Ports across VLT Devices — In this scenario, an orphan port on the primary VLT device is mirrored to another orphan port on the secondary VLT device through the ICL LAG. The port analyzer is connected to the secondary VLT device. No restrictions apply to the RPM session. The following example shows the configuration on the primary VLT device:source orphan port destination remote vlan direction rx/tx/both.
38 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN). Protocol Overview PVST+ is a variation of spanning tree — developed by a third party — that allows you to configure a separate spanning tree instance for each virtual local area network (VLAN).
Table 70. Spanning Tree Variations Dell Networking OS Supports Dell Networking Term IEEE Specification Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 802 .1d Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 802 .1w Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) 802 .1s Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) Third Party Implementation Information • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ is based on IEEE Standard 802.1w. • The Dell Networking OS implementation of PVST+ uses IEEE 802.
no disable Disabling PVST+ To disable PVST+ globally or on an interface, use the following commands. • Disable PVST+ globally. PROTOCOL PVST mode disable • Disable PVST+ on an interface, or remove a PVST+ parameter configuration. INTERFACE mode no spanning-tree pvst Example of Viewing PVST+ Configuration To display your PVST+ configuration, use the show config command from PROTOCOL PVST mode.
Figure 104. Load Balancing with PVST+ The bridge with the bridge value for bridge priority is elected root. Because all bridges use the default priority (until configured otherwise), the lowest MAC address is used as a tie-breaker. To increase the likelihood that a bridge is selected as the STP root, assign bridges a low non-default value for bridge priority. To assign a bridge priority, use the following command. • Assign a bridge priority.
Number of topology changes 5, last change occurred 00:34:37 ago on Te 1/32 Port 375 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/22) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.375 Designated root has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated bridge has priority 4096, address 0001.e80d.b6:d6 Designated port id is 128.
Modifying Interface PVST+ Parameters You can adjust two interface parameters (port cost and port priority) to increase or decrease the probability that a port becomes a forwarding port. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port. • Port priority — influences the likelihood that a port is selected to be a forwarding port in case that several ports have the same port cost.
The values for interface PVST+ parameters are given in the output of the show spanning-tree pvst command, as previously shown. Configuring an EdgePort The EdgePort feature enables interfaces to begin forwarding traffic approximately 30 seconds sooner. In this mode an interface forwards frames by default until it receives a BPDU that indicates that it should behave otherwise; it does not go through the Learning and Listening states.
To keep both ports in a Forwarding state, use extend system ID. Extend system ID augments the bridge ID with a VLAN ID to differentiate BPDUs on each VLAN so that PVST+ does not detect a loop and both ports can remain in a Forwarding state. Figure 105. PVST+ with Extend System ID • Augment the bridge ID with the VLAN ID.
tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 200 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 300 no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/22,32 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 100 bridge-priority 4096 Example of PVST+ Configuration (R2) interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/12 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/32 no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface Vlan 100 no ip address tagged TenGigabit
no ip address tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/12,22 no shutdown ! protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 300 bridge-priority 4096 688 Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+)
39 Quality of Service (QoS) This chapter describes how to use and configure Quality of Service service (QoS) features on the switch. Differentiated service is accomplished by classifying and queuing traffic, and assigning priorities to those queues. Table 72.
Feature Direction Create Policy Maps Ingress + Egress Create Input Policy Maps Ingress Honor DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets Ingress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Specify an Aggregate QoS Policy Egress Create Output Policy Maps Egress Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing Weighted Random Early Detection Egress Create WRED Profiles Egress Figure 106.
• Implementation Information • Port-Based QoS Configurations • Policy-Based QoS Configurations • Enabling QoS Rate Adjustment • Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing • Queue Classification Requirements for PFC Functionality • Support for marking dot1p value in L3 Input Qos Policy • Weighted Random Early Detection • Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space • Specifying Policy-Based Rate Shaping in Packets Per Second • Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping • Configuring Weights and ECN for W
Table 73. dot1p-priority Values and Queue Numbers dot1p Queue Number 0 1 1 0 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 • Change the priority of incoming traffic on the interface.
When priority-tagged frames ingress an untagged port or hybrid port, the frames are classified to the default VLAN of the port and to a queue according to their dot1p priority if you configure service-class dynamic dotp or trust dot1p. When priority-tagged frames ingress a tagged port, the frames are dropped because, for a tagged port, the default VLAN is 0. Dell Networking OS Behavior: Hybrid ports can receive untagged, tagged, and priority tagged frames.
Example of rate shape Command Dell#configure terminal Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#rate shape 500 50 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#end Policy-Based QoS Configurations Policy-based QoS configurations consist of the components shown in the following example. Figure 107. Constructing Policy-Based QoS Configurations Classify Traffic Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality of service policies to different types of traffic.
Creating a Layer 3 Class Map A Layer 3 class map differentiates ingress packets based on the DSCP value or IP precedence, and characteristics defined in an IP ACL. You can also use VLAN IDs and VRF IDs to classify the traffic using layer 3 class-maps. You may specify more than one DSCP and IP precedence value, but only one value must match to trigger a positive match for the class map. NOTE: IPv6 and IP-any class maps cannot match on ACLs or VLANs. Use step 1 or step 2 to start creating a Layer 3 class map.
The following example matches IPv4 and IPv6 traffic with a precedence value of 3. Dell(conf)# class-map match-any test1 Dell(conf-class-map)#match ip-any precedence 3 Creating a Layer 2 Class Map All class maps are Layer 3 by default; however, you can create a Layer 2 class map by specifying the layer2 option with the class-map command. A Layer 2 class map differentiates traffic according to 802.1p value and/or VLAN and/or characteristics defined in a MAC ACL..
Displaying Configured Class Maps and Match Criteria To display all class-maps or a specific class map, use the following command. Dell Networking OS Behavior: An explicit “deny any" rule in a Layer 3 ACL used in a (match any or match all) class-map creates a "default to Queue 0" entry in the CAM, which causes unintended traffic classification. In the following example, traffic is classified in two Queues, 1 and 2. Class-map ClassAF1 is “match any,” and ClassAF2 is “match all”.
The following example shows correct traffic classifications. Dell#show cam layer3-qos interface tengigabitethernet 2/4 Cam Port Dscp Proto Tcp Src Dst SrcIp DstIp DSCP Queue Index Flag Port Port Marking ------------------------------------------------------------------------20416 1 18 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.5/32 0.0.0.0/0 20 2 20417 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.2/32 0.0.0.0/0 10 1 20418 1 0 IP 0x0 0 0 23.64.0.3/32 0.0.0.0/0 12 1 20419 1 10 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.0/0 14 1 24511 1 0 0 0x0 0 0 0.0.0.0/0 0.0.0.
Output QoS policies regulate egress traffic. The regulation mechanisms for output QoS policies are bandwidth percentage, scheduler strict, rate shaping and WRED. NOTE: When changing a "service-queue" configuration in a QoS policy map, all QoS rules are deleted and re-added automatically to ensure that the order of the rules is maintained. As a result, the Matched Packets value shown in the show qos statistics command is reset.
CONFIGURATION mode qos-policy-output 2 After you configure an output QoS policy, do one or more of the following: Scheduler Strict — Policy-based Strict-priority Queueing configuration is done through scheduler strict. It is applied to Qos-policyoutput. When scheduler strict is applied to multiple Queues, high queue number takes precedence. Allocating Bandwidth to Queue Specifying WRED Drop Precedence Configuring Policy-Based Rate Shaping To configure policy-based rate shaping, use the following command.
Allocating Memory in the Dynamic Buffer Pool for a Specific Traffic You can restrict any class of traffic from utilizing the available bandwidth to a defined limit. Restricting a traffic to a certain level ensures that when the particular class of traffic uses more than certain bandwidth during congestion, the system drops the traffic. This ensures the latency of the traffic is not affected.
• All DSCP values that are not specified as yellow or red are colored green (low drop precedence). • A DSCP value cannot be in both the yellow and red lists. Setting the red or yellow list with any DSCP value that is already in the other list results in an error and no update to that DSCP list is made. • Each color map can only have one list of DSCP values for each color; any DSCP values previously listed for that color that are not in the new DSCP list are colored green.
Display a specific DSCP color map. Dell# show qos dscp-color-map mapTWO Dscp-color-map mapTWO yellow 16,55 Displaying a DSCP Color Policy Configuration To display the DSCP color policy configuration for one or all interfaces, use the show qos dscp-color-policy {summary [interface] | detail {interface}} command in EXEC mode. summary: Displays summary information about a color policy on one or more interfaces.
Applying an Input QoS Policy to an Input Policy Map Honoring DSCP Values on Ingress Packets Honoring dot1p Values on Ingress Packets 3 Apply the input policy map to an interface. Applying a Class-Map or Input QoS Policy to a Queue To apply a class-map or input QoS policy to a queue, use the following command. • Assign an input QoS policy to a queue.
Table 76.
• All dot1p traffic is mapped to Queue 0 unless you enable service-class dynamic dot1p on an interface or globally. • Layer 2 or Layer 3 service policies supersede dot1p service classes. • Create service classes. INTERFACE mode service-class dynamic dot1p Guaranteeing Bandwidth to dot1p-Based Service Queues To guarantee bandwidth to dot1p-based service queues, use the following command.
Applying an Output QoS Policy to a Queue To apply an output QoS policy to a queue, use the following command. • Apply an output QoS policy to queues. INTERFACE mode service-queue Specifying an Aggregate QoS Policy To specify an aggregate QoS policy, use the following command. • Specify an aggregate QoS policy. POLICY-MAP-OUT mode policy-aggregate Applying an Output Policy Map to an Interface To apply an output policy map to an interface, use the following command.
For example, to include the Preamble and SFD, type qos-rate-adjust 8. For variable length overhead fields, know the number of bytes you want to include. The default is disabled. Enabling Strict-Priority Queueing In strict-priority queuing, the system de-queues all packets from the assigned queue before servicing any other queues. You can assign strict-priority to one unicast queue, using the strict-priority command.
Hence it is possible to mark both DSCP and Dot1p simultaneously in the L3 Input Qos Policy. You are expected to mark the Dot1p priority when the ingress packets are untagged but go out to the peer as tagged NOTE: L2 qos-policy behavior will be retained and would not be changed, that is we would not allow to set both DSCP and Dot1p in the L2 Input Qos Policy. Example case: Consider that two switches A and B are connected back to back via a tagged interface.
Figure 108. Packet Drop Rate for WRED You can create a custom WRED profile or use one of the five pre-defined profiles. Creating WRED Profiles To create WRED profiles, use the following commands. 1 Create a WRED profile. CONFIGURATION mode wred-profile 2 Specify the minimum and maximum threshold values. WRED mode threshold Applying a WRED Profile to Traffic After you create a WRED profile, you must specify to which traffic Dell Networking OS should apply the profile.
Displaying Default and Configured WRED Profiles To display the default and configured WRED profiles, use the following command. • Display default and configured WRED profiles and their threshold values. EXEC mode show qos wred-profile Displaying WRED Drop Statistics To display WRED drop statistics, use the following command. • Display the number of packets Dell Networking OS the WRED profile drops.
17 18 19 Dell# MCAST MCAST MCAST 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Pre-Calculating Available QoS CAM Space Before Dell Networking OS version 7.3.1, there was no way to measure the number of CAM entries a policy-map would consume (the number of CAM entries that a rule uses is not predictable; from 1 to 16 entries might be used per rule depending upon its complexity). Therefore, it was possible to apply to an interface a policy-map that requires more entries than are available.
Specifying Policy-Based Rate Shaping in Packets Per Second You can configure the rate shaping in packets per second (pps) for QoS output policies. You can configure rate shaping in pps for a QoS output policy, apart from specifying the rate shaping value in bytes. You can also configure the peak rate and the committed rate for packets in kilobits per second (Kbps) or pps. Committed rate refers to the guaranteed bandwidth for traffic entering or leaving the interface under normal network conditions.
4 Alternatively, configure the committed rate and committed burst size in bytes.
You can define WRED profiles and weight on each of the global service-pools for both loss-based and lossless (PFC) service- pools. The following events occur when you configure WRED and ECN on global service-pools: • If WRED/ECN is enabled on the global service-pool with threshold values and if it is not enabled on the queues, WRED/ECN are not effective based on global service-pool WRED thresholds.
To configure the weight factor for WRED and ECN capabilities, global buffer pools for multiple queues, and associating a service class with ECN marking, perform the following: 1 Configure the weight factor for the computation of average-queue size. This weight value applies to front-end ports. QOS-POLICY-OUT mode Dell(conf-qos-policy-out)#wred—profile weight number 2 Configure a WRED profile, and specify the threshold and maximum drop rate.
• • If single rate two color policer is configured along with this feature, then by default all packets less than PIR would be considered as “Green” But ‘Green’ packets matching the specific match criteria for which ‘color-marking’ is configured will be over-written and marked as “Yellow”.
Match qualifiers can be directly configured in the class-map command or it can be specified through one or more ACL which in turn specifies the combination of match qualifiers. Until Release 9.3(0.0), support is available for classifying traffic based on the 6-bit DSCP field of the IPv4 packet. As a part of this feature, the 2-bit ECN field of the IPv4 packet will also be available to be configured as one of the match qualifier.
The following combination of marking actions to be specified match sequence of the class-map command: • set a new DSCP for the packet • set the packet color as ‘yellow’ • set the packet color as ‘yellow’ and set a new DSCP for the packet This marking action to set the color of the packet is allowed only on the ‘match-any’ logical operator of the class-map.
ip access-list standard dscp_40_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 1 seq 10 permit any dscp 40 ecn 2 seq 15 permit any dscp 40 ecn 3 ! ip access-list standard dscp_50_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 50 ecn 0 ! ip access-list standard dscp_40_non_ecn seq 5 permit any dscp 40 ecn 0 ! class-map match-any class_dscp_40 match ip access-group dscp_40_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-group dscp_40_ecn ! class-map match-any class_dscp_50 match ip access-group dscp_50_non_ecn set-color yellow match ip access-gro
can be used by each port or queue either as a static partition or as a dynamic partition. With dynamic mode, you can specify the percentage of available buffer that is utilized by a queue. This dynamic partition or block is set to be two-thirds of the available buffers for all unicast queues and one-fifth of the available buffers for all multicast queues on these platforms. The maximum number of ports, including fan-out, supported is 104 and the maximum number of queues supported is 21.
EXEC/EXEC Privilege mode Dell#show hardware stack-unit 1 buffer-stats-snapshot unit 3 resource interface all queue mcast 3 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 1 (interface Fo 1/144) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 5 (interface Fo 1/148) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------MCAST 3 0 Unit 1 unit: 3 port: 9 (interface Fo 1/152) ---------------------
EXEC/EXEC Privilege mode Dell# show hardware buffer-stats-snapshot resource interface fortyGigE 0/0 queue all Unit 0 unit: 0 port: 1 (interface Fo 0/0) --------------------------------------Q# TYPE Q# TOTAL BUFFERED CELLS --------------------------------------UCAST 0 0 UCAST 1 0 UCAST 2 0 UCAST 3 0 UCAST 4 0 UCAST 5 0 UCAST 6 0 UCAST 7 0 UCAST 8 0 UCAST 9 0 UCAST 10 0 UCAST 11 0 MCAST 0 0 MCAST 1 0 MCAST 2 0 MCAST 3 0 MCAST 4 0 MCAST 5 0 MCAST 6 0 MCAST 7 0 MCAST 8 0 Quality of Service (QoS) 723
40 Routing Information Protocol (RIP) The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections and is based on a distance-vector algorithm. RIP is based on a distance-vector algorithm; it tracks distances or hop counts to nearby routers when establishing network connections. RIP protocol standards are listed in the Standards Compliance chapter.
Implementation Information Dell Networking OS supports both versions of RIP and allows you to configure one version globally and the other version on interfaces or both versions on the interfaces. The following table lists the defaults for RIP in Dell Networking OS. Table 79.
Enabling RIP Globally By default, RIP is not enabled in Dell Networking OS. To enable RIP globally, use the following commands. 1 Enter ROUTER RIP mode and enable the RIP process on Dell Networking OS. CONFIGURATION mode router rip 2 Assign an IP network address as a RIP network to exchange routing information.
192.161.1.0/24 auto-summary 192.162.3.0/24 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/4 192.162.3.0/24 auto-summary Dell#show ip rip database Total number of routes in RIP database: 978 160.160.0.0/16 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 160.160.0.0/16 auto-summary 2.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 2.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 4.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:01:22, Fa 1/49 4.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 8.0.0.0/8 [120/1] via 29.10.10.12, 00:00:26, Fa 1/49 8.0.0.0/8 auto-summary 12.0.0.
neighbor ip-address • You can use this command multiple times to exchange RIP information with as many RIP networks as you want. Disable a specific interface from sending or receiving RIP routing information. ROUTER RIP mode passive-interface interface Assigning a Prefix List to RIP Routes Another method of controlling RIP (or any routing protocol) routing information is to filter the information through a prefix list. A prefix list is applied to incoming or outgoing routes.
• map-name: the name of a configured route map. To view the current RIP configuration, use the show running-config command in EXEC mode or the show config command in ROUTER RIP mode. Setting the Send and Receive Version To change the RIP version globally or on an interface in Dell Networking OS, use the following command. To specify the RIP version, use the version command in ROUTER RIP mode.
To configure an interface to receive or send both versions of RIP, include 1 and 2 in the command syntax. The command syntax for sending both RIPv1 and RIPv2 and receiving only RIPv2 is shown in the following example. Dell(conf-if)#ip rip send version 1 2 Dell(conf-if)#ip rip receive version 2 The following example of the show ip protocols command confirms that both versions are sent out that interface.
The autosummary command requires no other configuration commands. To disable automatic route summarization, enter no autosummary in ROUTER RIP mode. NOTE: If you enable the ip split-horizon command on an interface, the system does not advertise the summarized address. Controlling Route Metrics As a distance-vector protocol, RIP uses hop counts to determine the best route, but sometimes the shortest hop count is a route over the lowest-speed link.
Example of the debug ip rip Command The following example shows the confirmation when you enable the debug function. Dell#debug ip rip RIP protocol debug is ON Dell# To disable RIP, use the no debug ip rip command. RIP Configuration Example The examples in this section show the command sequence to configure RIPv2 on the two routers shown in the following illustration — Core 2 and Core 3. The host prompts used in the following example reflect those names.
Core 2 RIP Output The examples in the section show the core 2 RIP output. Examples of the show ip Commands to View Core 2 Information • To display Core 2 RIP database, use the show ip rip database command. • To display Core 2 RIP setup, use the show ip route command. • To display Core 2 RIP activity, use the show ip protocols command. The following example shows the show ip rip database command to view the learned RIP routes on Core 2.
Output delay 8 milliseconds between packets Automatic network summarization is in effect Outgoing filter for all interfaces is Incoming filter for all interfaces is Default redistribution metric is 1 Default version control: receive version 2, send version 2 Interface Recv Send TenGigabitEthernet 2/4 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 2/5 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 2/3 2 2 TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 2 2 Routing for Networks: 10.300.10.0 10.200.10.0 10.11.20.0 10.11.10.
10.11.30.0/24 10.0.0.0/8 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.2.0/24 Core3# directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 3/11 auto-summary directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 3/23 auto-summary directly connected,TenGigabitEthernet 3/24 auto-summary The following command shows the show ip routes command to view the RIP setup on Core 3.
RIP Configuration Summary Examples of Viewing RIP Configuration on Core 2 and Core 3 The following example shows viewing the RIP configuration on Core 2. ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.11.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.11.20.2/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.200.10.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip address 10.250.10.1/24 no shutdown router rip version 2 10.200.10.0 10.300.10.0 10.11.10.0 10.11.20.
41 Remote Monitoring (RMON) RMON is an industry-standard implementation that monitors network traffic by sharing network monitoring information. RMON provides both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring facility and long-term statistics collection on Dell Networking Ethernet interfaces. RMON operates with the simple network management protocol (SNMP) and monitors all nodes on a local area network (LAN) segment. RMON monitors traffic passing through the router and segment traffic not destined for the router.
Setting the RMON Alarm To set an alarm on any MIB object, use the rmon alarm or rmon hc-alarm command in GLOBAL CONFIGURATION mode. • Set an alarm on any MIB object.
CONFIGURATION mode [no] rmon event number [log] [trap community] [description string] [owner string] • number: assigned event number, which is identical to the eventIndex in the eventTable in the RMON MIB. The value must be an integer from 1 to 65,535 and be unique in the RMON Event Table. • log: (Optional) generates an RMON log entry when the event is triggered and sets the eventType in the RMON MIB to log or logand-trap. Default is no log.
[no] rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner ownername] [buckets bucket-number] [interval seconds] • controlEntry: specifies the RMON group of statistics using a value. • integer: a value from 1 to 65,535 that identifies the RMON group of statistics. The value must be a unique index in the RMON History Table. • owner: (Optional) specifies the name of the owner of the RMON group of statistics. The default is a null-terminated string.
42 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.1w — that is essentially the same as spanningtree protocol (STP) but provides faster convergence and interoperability with switches configured with STP and multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP). Protocol Overview RSTP is a Layer 2 protocol — specified by IEEE 802.
• Dell Networking OS supports only one Rapid Spanning Tree (RST) instance. • All interfaces in virtual local area networks (VLANs) and all enabled interfaces in Layer 2 mode are automatically added to the RST topology. • Adding a group of ports to a range of VLANs sends multiple messages to the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) task, avoid using the range command. When using the range command, Dell Networking recommends limiting the range to five ports and 40 VLANs.
Enabling Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable RSTP globally on all participating bridges; it is not enabled by default. When you enable RSTP, all physical and port-channel interfaces that are enabled and in Layer 2 mode are automatically part of the RST topology. • Only one path from any bridge to any other bridge is enabled. • Bridges block a redundant path by disabling one of the link ports. To enable RSTP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the following commands.
Figure 110. Rapid Spanning Tree Enabled Globally To view the interfaces participating in RSTP, use the show spanning-tree rstp command from EXEC privilege mode. If a physical interface is part of a port channel, only the port channel is listed in the command output. Dell#show spanning-tree rstp Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.cbb4 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15, max hops 0 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.379, designated path cost 0 Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU : sent 121, received 5 The port is not in the Edge port mode Port 380 (TenGigabitEthernet 2/4) is designated Forwarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.380 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.cbb4 Designated port id is 128.
The following table displays the default values for RSTP. Table 81.
Enabling SNMP Traps for Root Elections and Topology Changes To enable SNMP traps, use the following command. • Enable SNMP traps for RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ collectively. snmp-server enable traps xstp Modifying Interface Parameters On interfaces in Layer 2 mode, you can set the port cost and port priority values. • Port cost — a value that is based on the interface type. The previous table lists the default values. The greater the port cost, the less likely the port is selected to be a forwarding port.
• Assign a number as the bridge priority or designate it as the primary or secondary root. PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE RSTP mode bridge-priority priority-value • priority-value The range is from 0 to 65535. The lower the number assigned, the more likely this bridge becomes the root bridge. The default is 32768. Entries must be multiples of 4096. Example of the bridge-priority Command A console message appears when a new root bridge has been assigned.
In the following example, the bold line indicates that the interface is in EdgePort mode. Dell(conf-if-te-2/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 no ip address switchport spanning-tree rstp edge-port shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-2/1)# Configuring Fast Hellos for Link State Detection Use RSTP fast hellos to achieve sub-second link-down detection so that convergence is triggered faster. The standard RSTP link-state detection mechanism does not offer the same low link-state detection speed.
43 Software-Defined Networking (SDN) The Dell Networking OS supports software-defined networking (SDN). For more information, see the SDN Deployment Guide.
44 Security This chapter describes several ways to provide security to the Dell Networking system. For details about all the commands described in this chapter, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide.
Enabling AAA Accounting The aaa accounting command allows you to create a record for any or all of the accounting functions monitored. To enable AAA accounting, use the following command. • Enable AAA accounting and create a record for monitoring the accounting function. CONFIGURATION mode aaa accounting {commands | exec | suppress | system level} {default | name} {start-stop | wait-start | stop-only} {tacacs+} The variables are: • system: sends accounting information of any other AAA configuration.
Example of Configuring AAA Accounting to Track EXEC and EXEC Privilege Level Command Use In the following sample configuration, AAA accounting is set to track all usage of EXEC commands and commands on privilege level 15.
NOTE: If a console user logs in with RADIUS authentication, the privilege level is applied from the RADIUS server if the privilege level is configured for that user in RADIUS, whether you configure RADIUS authorization. NOTE: RADIUS and TACACS servers support VRF-awareness functionality. You can create RADIUS and TACACS groups and then map multiple servers to a group. The group to which you map multiple servers is bound to a single VRF.
3 Assign a method-list-name or the default list to the terminal line. LINE mode login authentication {method-list-name | default} To view the configuration, use the show config command in LINE mode or the show running-config in EXEC Privilege mode. NOTE: Dell Networking recommends using the none method only as a backup. This method does not authenticate users. The none and enable methods do not work with secure shell (SSH). You can create multiple method lists and assign them to different terminal lines.
The following example shows enabling local authentication for console and remote authentication for the VTY lines. Dell(config)# aaa authentication enable mymethodlist radius tacacs Dell(config)# line vty 0 9 Dell(config-line-vty)# enable authentication mymethodlist Server-Side Configuration Using AAA authentication, the switch acts as a RADIUS or TACACS+ client to send authentication requests to a TACACS+ or RADIUS server.
Obscuring Passwords and Keys By default, the service password-encryption command stores encrypted passwords. For greater security, you can also use the service obscure-passwords command to prevent a user from reading the passwords and keys, including RADIUS, TACACS+ keys, router authentication strings, VRRP authentication by obscuring this information. Passwords and keys are stored encrypted in the configuration file and by default are displayed in the encrypted form when the configuration is displayed.
After you configure other privilege levels, enter those levels by adding the level parameter after the enable command or by configuring a user name or password that corresponds to the privilege level. For more information about configuring user names, refer to Configuring a Username and Password. By default, commands in Dell Networking OS are assigned to different privilege levels. You can access those commands only if you have access to that privilege level.
Configuring the Enable Password Command To configure Dell Networking OS, use the enable command to enter EXEC Privilege level 15. After entering the command, Dell Networking OS requests that you enter a password. Privilege levels are not assigned to passwords, rather passwords are assigned to a privilege level. You can always change a password for any privilege level. To change to a different privilege level, enter the enable command, then the privilege level.
• 2 Secret: Specify the secret for the user. Configure a password for privilege level. CONFIGURATION mode enable password [level level] [encryption-mode] password Configure the optional and required parameters: • level level: specify a level from 0 to 15. Level 15 includes all levels. • encryption-type: enter 0 for plain text or 7 for encrypted text. • password: enter a string up to 32 characters long. To change only the password for the enable command, configure only the password parameter.
The following example shows the Telnet session for user john. The show privilege command output confirms that john is in privilege level 8. In EXEC Privilege mode, john can access only the commands listed. In CONFIGURATION mode, john can access only the snmpserver commands. apollo% telnet 172.31.1.53 Trying 172.31.1.53... Connected to 172.31.1.53. Escape character is '^]'.
EXEC Privilege mode enable or enable privilege-level • If you do not enter a privilege level, Dell Networking OS sets it to 15 by default. Move to a lower privilege level. EXEC Privilege mode disable level-number • level-number: The level-number you wish to set. If you enter disable without a level-number, your security level is 1. RADIUS Remote authentication dial-in user service (RADIUS) is a distributed client/server protocol.
Idle Time Every session line has its own idle-time. If the idle-time value is not changed, the default value of 30 minutes is used. RADIUS specifies idle-time allow for a user during a session before timeout. When a user logs in, the lower of the two idle-time values (configured or default) is used. The idle-time value is updated if both of the following happens: • The administrator changes the idle-time of the line on which the user has logged in.
• Monitoring RADIUS (optional) For a complete listing of all Dell Networking OS commands related to RADIUS, refer to the Security chapter in the Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide. NOTE: RADIUS authentication and authorization are done in a single step. Hence, authorization cannot be used independent of authentication. However, if you have configured RADIUS authorization and have not configured authentication, a message is logged stating this.
Specifying a RADIUS Server Host When configuring a RADIUS server host, you can set different communication parameters, such as the UDP port, the key password, the number of retries, and the timeout. To specify a RADIUS server host and configure its communication parameters, use the following command. • Enter the host name or IP address of the RADIUS server host.
• Configure the number of times Dell Networking OS retransmits RADIUS requests. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server retransmit retries • • retries: the range is from 0 to 100. Default is 3 retries. Configure the time interval the system waits for a RADIUS server host response. CONFIGURATION mode radius-server timeout seconds • seconds: the range is from 0 to 1000. Default is 5 seconds. To view the configuration of RADIUS communication parameters, use the show running-config command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Use this command multiple times to configure multiple TACACS+ server hosts. 2 Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of the method list you wish to use with the TACAS+ authentication method. CONFIGURATION mode aaa authentication login {method-list-name | default} tacacs+ [...method3] The TACACS+ method must not be the last method specified. 3 Enter LINE mode. CONFIGURATION mode line {aux 0 | console 0 | vty number [end-number]} 4 Assign the method-list to the terminal line.
Monitoring TACACS+ To view information on TACACS+ transactions, use the following command. • View TACACS+ transactions to troubleshoot problems. EXEC Privilege mode debug tacacs+ TACACS+ Remote Authentication The system takes the access class from the TACACS+ server. Access class is the class of service that restricts Telnet access and packet sizes.
To view the TACACS+ configuration, use the show running-config tacacs+ command in EXEC Privilege mode. To delete a TACACS+ server host, use the no tacacs-server host {hostname | ip-address} command. freebsd2# telnet 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2202 Trying 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2202... Connected to 2200:2200:2200:2200:2200::2202. Escape character is '^]'.
ssh {hostname} [-l username | -p port-number | -v {1 | 2}| -c encryption cipher | -m HMAC algorithm hostname is the IP address or host name of the remote device. Enter an IPv4 or IPv6 address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). • • SSH V2 is enabled by default on all the modes. Display SSH connection information.
Example of Using SCP to Copy from an SSH Server on Another Switch The following example shows the use of SCP and SSH to copy a software image from one switch running SSH server on UDP port 99 to the local switch. Other SSH related command include: • crypto key generate : generate keys for the SSH server. • debug ip ssh : enables collecting SSH debug information. • ip scp topdir : identify a location for files used in secure copy transfer.
• rekey-limit: volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session. The range is from 1 to 4096 to megabytes. The default is 1024 megabytes. Examples The following example configures the time-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 30 minutes. Dell(conf)#ip ssh rekey time 30 The following example configures the volume-based rekey threshold for an SSH session to 4096 megabytes.
• hmac-sha2-256 The default HMAC algorithms are the following: • hmac-sha2-256 • hmac-sha1 • hmac-sha1-96 • hmac-md5 • hmac-md5-96 When FIPS is enabled, the default HMAC algorithm is hmac-sha2-256,hmac-sha1,hmac-sha1-96. Example of Configuring a HMAC Algorithm The following example shows you how to configure a HMAC algorithm list.
Configuring the SSH Server Cipher List To configure the cipher list supported by the SSH server, use the ip ssh server cipher cipher-list command in CONFIGURATION mode. cipher-list-: Enter a space-delimited list of ciphers the SSH server will support. The following ciphers are available. • 3des-cbc • aes128-cbc • aes192-cbc • aes256-cbc • aes128-ctr • aes192-ctr • aes256-ctr The default cipher list is aes256-ctr, aes256-cbc, aes192-ctr, aes192-cbc, aes128-ctr, aes128-cbc, 3des-cbc.
Secure Shell Authentication Secure Shell (SSH) is enabled by default using the SSH Password Authentication method. Enabling SSH Authentication by Password Authenticate an SSH client by prompting for a password when attempting to connect to the Dell Networking system. This setup is the simplest method of authentication and uses SSH version 1. To enable SSH password authentication, use the following command. • Enable SSH password authentication.
Example of Generating RSA Keys admin@Unix_client#ssh-keygen -t rsa Generating public/private rsa key pair. Enter file in which to save the key (/home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa): /home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa already exists. Overwrite (y/n)? y Enter passphrase (empty for no passphrase): Enter same passphrase again: Your identification has been saved in /home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa. Your public key has been saved in /home/admin/.ssh/id_rsa.pub. Configuring Host-Based SSH Authentication Authenticate a particular host.
10.16.127.201, ssh-rsa AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAABIwAAAIEA8K7jLZRVfjgHJzUOmXxuIbZx/AyW hVgJDQh39k8v3e8eQvLnHBIsqIL8jVy1QHhUeb7GaDlJVEDAMz30myqQbJgXBBRTWgBpLWwL/ doyUXFufjiL9YmoVTkbKcFmxJEMkE3JyHanEi7hg34LChjk9hL1by8cYZP2kYS2lnSyQWk= The following example shows creating rhosts. admin@Unix_client# ls id_rsa id_rsa.pub rhosts shosts admin@Unix_client# cat rhosts 10.16.127.201 admin Using Client-Based SSH Authentication To SSH from the chassis to the SSH client, use the following command.
VTY Line and Access-Class Configuration Various methods are available to restrict VTY access in Dell Networking OS. These depend on which authentication scheme you use — line, local, or remote. Table 82. VTY Access Authentication Method VTY access-class support? Username access-class support? Remote authorization support? Line YES NO NO Local NO YES NO TACACS+ YES NO YES (with Dell Networking OS version 5.2.1.0 and later) RADIUS YES NO YES (with Dell Networking OS version 6.1.1.
Dell(config-line-vty)#login authentication localmethod Dell(config-line-vty)#end VTY Line Remote Authentication and Authorization Dell Networking OS retrieves the access class from the VTY line. The Dell Networking OS takes the access class from the VTY line and applies it to ALL users. Dell Networking OS does not need to know the identity of the incoming user and can immediately apply the access class.
• System-Defined RBAC User Roles • Creating a New User Role • Modifying Command Permissions for Roles • Adding and Deleting Users from a Role • Role Accounting • Configuring AAA Authentication for Roles • Configuring AAA Authorization for Roles • Configuring an Accounting for Roles • Applying an Accounting Method to a Role • Displaying Active Accounting Sessions for Roles • Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC • Displaying User Roles • Displaying Accounting for Use
Configuring Role-based Only AAA Authorization You can configure authorization so that access to commands is determined only by the user’s role. If the user has no user role, access to the system is denied as the user will not be able to login successfully.
System-Defined RBAC User Roles By default, the Dell Networking OS provides 4 system defined user roles. You can create up to 8 additional user roles. NOTE: You cannot delete any system defined roles. The system defined user roles are as follows: • Network Operator (netoperator) - This user role has no privilege to modify any configuration on the switch. You can access Exec mode (monitoring) to view the current configuration and status information.
Consider the following when creating a user role: • Only the system administrator and user-defined roles inherited from the system administrator can create roles and user names. Only the system administrator, security administrator, and roles inherited from these can use the "role" command to modify command permissions. The security administrator and roles inherited by security administrator can only modify permissions for commands they already have access to.
The following output displays the modes available for the role command. Dell (conf)#role configure exec interface line route-map router ? Global configuration mode Exec Mode Interface configuration mode Line Configuration mode Route map configuration mode Router configuration mode Examples: Deny Network Administrator from Using the show users Command.
The following example removes the secadmin access to LINE mode and then verifies that the security administrator can no longer access LINE mode, using the show role mode configure line command in EXEC Privilege mode.
AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles This section describes how to configure AAA Authentication and Authorization for Roles.
Examples of Applying a Method List The following configuration example applies a method list: TACACS+, RADIUS and local: ! radius-server host 10.16.150.203 key ! tacacs-server host 10.16.150.203 key ! aaa authentication login ucraaa tacacs+ radius local aaa authorization exec ucraaa tacacs+ radius local aaa accounting commands role netadmin ucraaa start-stop tacacs+ ! The following configuration example applies a method list other than default to each VTY line.
Configuring TACACS+ and RADIUS VSA Attributes for RBAC For RBAC and privilege levels, the Dell Networking OS RADIUS and TACACS+ implementation supports two vendor-specific options: privilege level and roles. The Dell Networking vendor-ID is 6027 and the supported option has attribute of type string, which is titled “Force10-avpair”.
The following example shows you how to configure AAA accounting to monitor commands executed by the users who have a secadmin user role. Dell(conf)#aaa accounting command role secadmin default start-stop tacacs+ Applying an Accounting Method to a Role To apply an accounting method list to a role executed by a user with that user role, use the accounting command in LINE mode.
secadmin sysadmin MAC testadmin Exec Config Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol netadmin Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Routemap Protocol MAC Displaying Role Permissions Assigned to a Command To display permissions assigned to a command, use the show role command in EXEC Privilege mode. The output displays the user role and or permission level.
• If the credentials are invalid, the authentication fails. NOTE: 2FA does not support RADIUS authentications done with SSHv1, REST, Web UI, and OMI. Handling Access-Challenge Message To provide a two-step verification in addition to the username and password, NAS prompts for additional information. An AccessChallenge request is sent from the RADIUS server to NAS.
This module requires NAS for handling the access challenge from the RADIUS server. NAS sends the input OTP in an Access-Request to the RADIUS server, and the user authentication succeeds or fails depending upon the Access-Accept or Access-Reject response received at NAS from the RADIUS server. Configuring the System to Drop Certain ICMP Reply Messages You can configure the Dell Networking OS to drop ICMP reply messages.
Table 84.
45 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging provides the ability to add a second VLAN ID tag in an Ethernet frame and is referred to as VLAN stacking in the Dell Networking OS. VLAN Stacking VLAN stacking, also called Q-in-Q, is defined in IEEE 802.1ad — Provider Bridges, which is an amendment to IEEE 802.1Q — Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks. It enables service providers to use 802.
Figure 111. VLAN Stacking in a Service Provider Network Important Points to Remember • Interfaces that are members of the Default VLAN and are configured as VLAN-Stack access or trunk ports do not switch untagged traffic. To switch traffic, add these interfaces to a non-default VLAN-Stack-enabled VLAN. • Dell Networking cautions against using the same MAC address on different customer VLANs, on the same VLAN-Stack VLAN.
3 Enabling VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN. Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring the Protocol Type Value for the Outer VLAN Tag • Configuring Dell Networking OS Options for Trunk Ports • Debugging VLAN Stacking • VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks Creating Access and Trunk Ports To create access and trunk ports, use the following commands. • Access port — a port on the service provider edge that directly connects to the customer. An access port may belong to only one service provider VLAN.
Enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN To enable VLAN-Stacking for a VLAN, use the following command. • Enable VLAN-Stacking for the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible Example of Viewing VLAN Stack Member Status To display the status and members of a VLAN, use the show vlan command from EXEC Privilege mode. Members of a VLAN-Stackingenabled VLAN are marked with an M in column Q. NOTE: You must disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface before configuring it as a vlan-stack.
portmode hybrid 2 Add the port to a 802.1Q VLAN as tagged or untagged. INTERFACE VLAN mode [tagged | untagged] Example of Configuring a Trunk Port as a Hybrid Port and Adding it to Stacked VLANs In the following example, TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 is a trunk port that is configured as a hybrid port and then added to VLAN 100 as untagged VLAN 101 as tagged, and VLAN 103, which is a stacking VLAN.
Dell#debug member port tengigabitethernet 2/4 vlan id : 603 (MT), 100(T), 101(NU) Dell# VLAN Stacking in Multi-Vendor Networks The first field in the VLAN tag is the tag protocol identifier (TPID), which is 2 bytes. In a VLAN-stacking network, after the frame is double tagged, the outer tag TPID must match the TPID of the next-hop system. While 802.1Q requires that the inner tag TPID is 0x8100, it does not require a specific value for the outer tag TPID.
Figure 112.
Figure 113.
Figure 114. Single and Double-Tag TPID Mismatch VLAN Stacking Packet Drop Precedence VLAN stacking packet-drop precedence is supported on the switch. The drop eligible indicator (DEI) bit in the S-Tag indicates to a service provider bridge which packets it should prefer to drop when congested. Enabling Drop Eligibility Enable drop eligibility globally before you can honor or mark the DEI value. When you enable drop eligibility, DEI mapping or marking takes place according to the defaults.
Table 85. Drop Eligibility Behavior Ingress Egress DEI Disabled DEI Enabled Normal Port Normal Port Retain CFI Set CFI to 0. Trunk Port Trunk Port Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI. Retain outer tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0. Retain inner tag CFI Retain inner tag CFI Set outer tag CFI to 0 Set outer tag CFI to 0 Access Port Trunk Port To enable drop eligibility globally, use the following command. • Make packets eligible for dropping based on their DEI value.
Marking Egress Packets with a DEI Value On egress, you can set the DEI value according to a different mapping than ingress. For ingress information, refer to Honoring the Incoming DEI Value. To mark egress packets, use the following command. • Set the DEI value on egress according to the color currently assigned to the packet.
NOTE: The ability to map incoming C-Tag dot1p to any S-Tag dot1p requires installing up to eight entries in the Layer 2 QoS and Layer 2 ACL table for each configured customer VLAN. The scalability of this feature is limited by the impact of the 1:8 expansion in these content addressable memory (CAM) tables.
• vman-qos-dual-fp: mark the S-Tag dot1p and queue the frame according to the S-Tag dot1p. This method requires twice as many CAM entries as vman-qos and FP blocks in multiples of 2. The default is: 0 FP blocks for vman-qos and vman-qos-dual-fp. 2 The new CAM configuration is stored in NVRAM and takes effect only after a save and reload. EXEC Privilege mode copy running-config startup-config 3 Reload the system. reload 4 Map C-Tag dot1p values to a S-Tag dot1p value.
Figure 116. VLAN Stacking without L2PT You might need to transport control traffic transparently through the intermediate network to the other region. Layer 2 protocol tunneling enables BPDUs to traverse the intermediate network by identifying frames with the Bridge Group Address, rewriting the destination MAC to a user-configured non-reserved address, and forwarding the frames.
Figure 117. VLAN Stacking with L2PT Implementation Information • L2PT is available for STP, RSTP, MSTP, and PVST+ BPDUs. • No protocol packets are tunneled when you enable VLAN stacking. • L2PT requires the default CAM profile. Enabling Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. 1 Verify that the system is running the default CAM profile. Use this CAM profile for L2PT.
show cam-profile 2 Enable protocol tunneling globally on the system. CONFIGURATION mode protocol-tunnel enable 3 Tunnel BPDUs the VLAN. INTERFACE VLAN mode protocol-tunnel stp Specifying a Destination MAC Address for BPDUs By default, Dell Networking OS uses a Dell Networking-unique MAC address for tunneling BPDUs. You can configure another value. To specify a destination MAC address for BPDUs, use the following command.
Debugging Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling To debug Layer 2 protocol tunneling, use the following command. • Display debugging information for L2PT. EXEC Privilege mode debug protocol-tunnel Provider Backbone Bridging IEEE 802.1ad—Provider Bridges amends 802.1Q—Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks so that service providers can use 802.1Q architecture to offer separate VLANs to customers with no coordination between customers, and minimal coordination between customers and the provider. 802.
46 sFlow sFlow is a standard-based sampling technology embedded within switches and routers which is used to monitor network traffic. It is designed to provide traffic monitoring for high-speed networks with many switches and routers.
hardware sampling rate is backed-off from 512 to 1024. Note that port 1 maintains its sampling rate of 16384; port 1 is unaffected because it maintains its configured sampling rate of 16384.: • If the interface states are up and the sampling rate is not configured on the port, the default sampling rate is calculated based on the line speed. • If the interface states are shut down, the sampling rate is set using the global sampling rate.
Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 Global default extended maximum header size: 128 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.1, Agent IP addr: 1.1.1.
Example of the show sflow command when the sflow max-header-size extended is configured globally Dell(conf-if-te-1/10)#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Egress Management Interface sFlow services are disabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 86400 Global default extended maximum header size: 256 bytes Global extended information enabled: none 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 100.1.1.12, Agent IP addr: 100.1.1.
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Global) The first bold line indicates sFlow is globally enabled. The second bold lines indicate sFlow is enabled on Te 1/16 and Te 1/17 Dell#show sflow sFlow services are enabled Global default sampling rate: 32768 Global default counter polling interval: 20 1 collectors configured Collector IP addr: 133.33.33.53, Agent IP addr: 133.33.33.
Example of Viewing sFlow Configuration (Line Card) Dell#show sflow Stack-unit 1 Stack-unit 1 Samples rcvd from h/w Total UDP packets exported UDP packets exported via RPM UDP packets dropped :0 :0 :0 :36 Configuring Specify Collectors The sflow collector command allows identification of sFlow collectors to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. You can specify up to two sFlow collectors. If you specify two collectors, the samples are sent to both.
sFlow on LAG ports When a physical port becomes a member of a LAG, it inherits the sFlow configuration from the LAG port. Enabling Extended sFlow Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depend on the type of sampled packet. The platform supports extended-switch information processing only. Extended sFlow packs additional information in the sFlow datagram depending on the type of sampled packet. You can enable the following options: • extended-switch — 802.1Q VLAN ID and 802.
Important Points to Remember • To export extended-gateway data, BGP must learn the IP destination address. • If the IP destination address is not learned via BGP the Dell Networking system does not export extended-gateway data. • If the IP source address is learned via IGP, srcAS and srcPeerAS are zero. • The srcAS and srcPeerAS might be zero even though the IP source address is learned via BGP.
47 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is designed to manage devices on IP networks by monitoring device operation, which might require administrator intervention. NOTE: On Dell Networking routers, standard and private SNMP management information bases (MIBs) are supported, including all Get and a limited number of Set operations (such as set vlan and copy cmd).
• Transceiver Monitoring Protocol Overview Network management stations use SNMP to retrieve or alter management data from network elements. A datum of management information is called a managed object; the value of a managed object can be static or variable. Network elements store managed objects in a database called a management information base (MIB).
In this example, for a specified user and a group, the AES128-CFB algorithm, the authentication password to enable the server to receive packets from the host, and the privacy password to encode the message contents are configured. SHA authentication needs to be used with the AES-CFB128 privacy algorithm only when FIPS is enabled because SHA is then the only available authentication level.
Important Points to Remember • Typically, 5-second timeout and 3-second retry values on an SNMP server are sufficient for both LAN and WAN applications. If you experience a timeout with these values, increase the timeout value to greater than 3 seconds, and increase the retry value to greater than 2 seconds on your SNMP server. • User ACLs override group ACLs. Set up SNMP As previously stated, Dell Networking OS supports SNMP version 1 and version 2 that are community-based security models.
• auth — password privileges. Select this option to set up a user with password authentication. • priv — password and privacy privileges. Select this option to set up a user with password and privacy privileges. To set up user-based security (SNMPv3), use the following commands. • Configure the user with view privileges only (no password or privacy privileges).
Reading Managed Object Values You may only retrieve (read) managed object values if your management station is a member of the same community as the SNMP agent. Dell Networking supports RFC 4001, Textual Conventions for Internet Work Addresses that defines values representing a type of internet address. These values display for ipAddressTable objects using the snmpwalk command. There are several UNIX SNMP commands that read data. • Read the value of a single managed object.
Configuring Contact and Location Information using SNMP You may configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system or from the management station using SNMP. To configure system contact and location information from the Dell Networking system and from the management station using SNMP, use the following commands. • (From a Dell Networking system) Identify the system manager along with this person’s contact information (for example, an email address or phone number).
• Dell Networking enterpriseSpecific environment traps — fan, supply, and temperature. • Dell Networking enterpriseSpecific protocol traps — bgp, ecfm, stp, and xstp. To configure the system to send SNMP notifications, use the following commands. 1 Configure the Dell Networking system to send notifications to an SNMP server. CONFIGURATION mode snmp-server host ip-address [traps | informs] [version 1 | 2c |3] [community-string] To send trap messages, enter the keyword traps.
Example of Dell Networking Enterprise-specific SNMP Traps envmon STACK_STATE: Stack unit %d is in Active State STACKUNITUP: Stack unit 0 is up envmon CARD_SHUTDOWN: %sLine card %d down - %s CARD_DOWN: %sLine card %d down - %s LINECARDUP: %sLine card %d is up CARD_MISMATCH: Mismatch: line card %d is type %s - type %s required.
%SPANMGR-5-MSTP_TOPOLOGY_CHANGE: Topology change BridgeAddr: 0001.e801.fc35 Mstp Instance Id 0 port Te 1/8 transitioned from forwarding to discarding state.
Table 88. List of Syslog Server MIBS that have read access MIB Object OID Object Values Description dF10SysLogTraps 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.30.1.1 1 = reachable2 = unreachable Specifies whether the syslog server is reachable or unreachable. The following example shows the SNMP trap that is sent when connectivity to the syslog server is lost: DISMAN-EVENT-MIB::sysUpTimeInstance = Timeticks: (19738) 0:03:17.38 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID. 0 = OID: SNMPv2SMI::enterprises.6027.3.30.1.1.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.
MIB Object OID Object Values Description copySrcFileLocation and copySrcFileName. copySrcFileLocation .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.3 1 = flash 2 = slot0 3 = tftp Specifies the location of source file. • 4 = ftp If copySrcFileLocation is FTP or SCP, you must specify copyServerAddress, copyUserName, and copyUserPassword. 5 = scp 6 = usbflash copySrcFileName copyDestFileType .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.4 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.
MIB Object OID Object Values Description also specify copyUserPassword. copyUserPassword .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.10 Password for the server. Password for the FTP, TFTP, or SCP server. Copying a Configuration File To copy a configuration file, use the following commands. NOTE: In UNIX, enter the snmpset command for help using the following commands. Place the f10-copy-config.mib file in the directory from which you are executing the snmpset command or in the snmpset tool path.
• Copy the running-config to the startup-config from the UNIX machine. snmpset -v 2c -c public force10system-ip-address copySrcFileType.index i 2 copyDestFileType.index i 3 Examples of Copying Configuration Files The following examples show the command syntax using MIB object names and the same command using the object OIDs. In both cases, a unique index number follows the object. The following example shows copying configuration files using MIB object names. > snmpset -v 2c -r 0 -t 60 -c private -m .
• precede the values for copyUsername and copyUserPassword by the keyword s. Example of Copying Configuration Files via FTP From a UNIX Machine > snmpset -v 2c -c private -m ./f10-copy-config.mib 10.10.10.10 copySrcFileType.110 i 2 copyDestFileName.110 s /home/startup-config copyDestFileLocation.110 i 4 copyServerAddress.110 a 11.11.11.11 copyUserName.110 s mylogin copyUserPassword.110 s mypass FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copySrcFileType.110 = INTEGER: runningConfig(2) FTOS-COPY-CONFIG-MIB::copyDestFileName.
Additional MIB Objects to View Copy Statistics Dell Networking provides more MIB objects to view copy statistics, as shown in the following table. Table 90. Additional MIB Objects for Copying Configuration Files via SNMP MIB Object OID Values Description copyState .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.11 1= running Specifies the state of the copy operation. 2 = successful 3 = failed copyTimeStarted .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.5.1.1.1.1.
• the server OS is UNIX • you are using SNMP version 2c • the community name is public • the file f10-copy-config.mib is in the current directory NOTE: In UNIX, enter the snmpset command for help using this command. The following examples show the command syntax using MIB object names and the same command using the object OIDs. In both cases, the same index number used in the snmpset command follows the object. The following command shows how to get a MIB object value using the object name.
MIB Object OID Description dellNetIfTransReceivePowerLane2 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.13 Specifies Lane 2 Rx power value in dBm dellNetIfTransReceivePowerLane3 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.14 Specifies Lane 3 Rx power value in dBm dellNetIfTransReceivePowerLane4 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.15 Specifies Lane 4 Rx power value in dBm dellNetIfTransTemperature 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.
The output above displays that 24% of the flash memory is used. MIB Support to Display the Software Core Files Generated by the System Dell Networking provides MIB objects to display the software core files generated by the system. The chSysSwCoresTable contains the list of software core files generated by the system. The following table lists the related MIB objects. Table 93. MIB Objects for Displaying the Software Core Files Generated by the System MIB Object OID Description chSysSwCoresTable 1.3.6.
enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.4.2.1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5.1.1 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5.1.2 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5.1.3 enterprises.6027.3.10.1.2.10.1.5.2.1 = = = = = 0 "flashmntr" "l2mgr" "vrrp" Hex: 76 72 72 70 "sysd" Hex: 73 79 73 64 The output above displays that the software core files generated by the system. MIB Support for PFC Storm Control Dell Networking provides MIB objects to display the information for PFC Storm Control.
SNMP Walk Example Output snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.134.200 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.21 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.1.2097157.5 = INTEGER: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.1.2097157.6 = INTEGER: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.1.2097413.5 = INTEGER: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.1.2097413.6 = INTEGER: 1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.1.2097669.5 = INTEGER: 2 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.1.1.1.1.2097669.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.2.1.1.3.2097413.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.2.1.1.3.2097413.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.2.1.1.3.2097669.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.2.1.1.3.2097669.6 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.2.1.1.3.2097925.5 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.21.2.1.1.3.2097925.
MIB Object OID Description dellNetFpLossyServicePoolUsedBuffSize 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.23.1.3 Used Size of the lossy service-pool. dellNetFpLosslessServicePoolConfiguredBuf 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.23.1.4 fSize Configured size of the lossless service-pool. dellNetFpLosslessServicePoolUsedBuffSize Used size of the lossless service-pool. 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.23.1.5 SNMP Walk Output snmpwalk -v 2c -c public 10.16.210.86 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.23.1 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.23.1.2.1.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.16.2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.17.2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.18.2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.19.2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.20.2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.21.2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.22.2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.23.2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.24.2107012 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.25.
• .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.3.3 = INTEGER: 148847 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.3.4 = INTEGER: 4186108 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.1 = INTEGER: 28 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.2 = INTEGER: 28 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.3 = INTEGER: 2537 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.4.4 = INTEGER: 76200 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.1 = INTEGER: 40932 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.2 = INTEGER: 3922316 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.3 = INTEGER: 138868 .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.26.1.4.8.1.5.
MIB Support to Display Egress Queue Statistics Dell Networking OS provides MIB objects to display the information of the ECMP group count information. The following table lists the related MIB objects: Table 100. MIB Objects to display ECMP Group Count MIB Object OID Description dellNetInetCidrECMPGrpMax 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9.1.6 Total CAM for ECMP group. dellNetInetCidrECMPGrpUsed 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9.1.7 Used CAM for ECMP group. dellNetInetCidrECMPGrpAvl 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.9.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.10.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = "" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.10.1.1.1.32.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = "" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = "" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.1.4.20.1.1.1.32.1.4.20.1.1.1.1.4.20.1.1.1 = HexSTRING: 4C 76 25 F4 AB 02 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.9.1.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.10.1.1.4.100.100.100.0.24.1.4.30.1.1.1.1.4.30.1.1.1 = STRING: "Po 20" SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.1.32.1.4.10.1.1.1.1.4.10.1.1.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.10.1.1.2.32.1.4.127.0.0.1.1.4.127.0.0.1 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.11.1.1.4.20.1.1.0.24.0.0.0.0 = Gauge32: 0 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.9.1.5.1.
MIB Object OID Description entAliasMappingIdentifier 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2 Identifies a particular conceptual row associated with the indicated entPhysicalIndex and entLogicalIndex pair. Viewing the entAliasMappingTable MIB • To view the entAliasMappingTable generated by the system, use the following command. snmpwalk -v 2c -c public -On 10.16.150.97 1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1 .1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2.5.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.2097157 .1.3.6.1.2.1.47.1.3.2.1.2.9.0 = OID: .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.
dellNetFpIngressFCSDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.10 Ingress FCS Drops. dellNetFpIngressMTUExceeds 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.11 Ingress MTUExceeds. dellNetFpMMUHOLDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.12 MMU HOL Drops. dellNetFpMMUTxPurgeCellErr 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.13 Tx Purge Cell Error. dellNetFpMMUAgedDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.14 Aged Drops. dellNetFpEgressFCSDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.1.15 Egress FCS Drops. dellNetFpEgIPv4L3UCAgedDrops 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.3.
SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050116 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050244 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050372 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050500 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1050629 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1051141 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1051653 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1052165 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.1052677 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.27.1.3.1.28.
MIB Object OID Description dot3adAggEntry 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1 Contains a list of Aggregator parameters and indexed by the ifIndex of the Aggregator. dot3adAggMACAddress 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 Contains a six octet read–only value carrying the individual MAC address assigned to the Aggregator. dot3adAggActorSystemPriority 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2 Contains a two octet read–write value indicating the priority value associated with the Actor’s system ID.
Viewing the LAG MIB • To view the LAG MIB generated by the system, use the following command. snmpbulkget -v 2c -c LagMIB 10.16.148.157 1.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.1.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.2.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.3.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.3.1258356736 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.4.1258356224 iso.2.840.10006.300.43.1.1.1.1.4.
Displaying the Ports in a VLAN Dell Networking OS identifies VLAN interfaces using an interface index number that is displayed in the output of the show interface vlan command. Add Tagged and Untagged Ports to a VLAN The value dot1qVlanStaticEgressPorts object is an array of all VLAN members. The dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts object is an array of only untagged VLAN members. All VLAN members that are not in dot1qVlanStaticUntaggedPorts are tagged.
Managing Overload on Startup If you are running IS-IS, you can set a specific amount of time to prevent ingress traffic from being received after a reload and allow the routing protocol upgrade process to complete. To prevent ingress traffic on a router while the IS reload is implemented, use the following command. • Set the amount of time after an IS-IS reload is performed before ingress traffic is allowed at startup.
Fetch Dynamic MAC Entries using SNMP Dell Networking supports the RFC 1493 dot1d table for the default VLAN and the dot1q table for all other VLANs. NOTE: The 802.1q Q-BRIDGE MIB defines VLANs regarding 802.1d, as 802.1d itself does not define them. As a switchport must belong a VLAN (the default VLAN or a configured VLAN), all MAC address learned on a switchport are associated with a VLAN. For this reason, the Q-Bridge MIB is used for MAC address query.
Example of Fetching MAC Addresses Learned on a Port-Channel Using SNMP Use dot3aCurAggFdbTable to fetch the learned MAC address of a port-channel. The instance number is the decimal conversion of the MAC address concatenated with the port-channel number.
Table 105. MIB Objects for Viewing the System Image on Flash Partitions MIB Object OID Description MIB chSysSwInPartitionAImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.11 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition A. Chassis MIB chSysSwInPartitionBImgVers 1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.10.1.2.8.1.12 List the version string of the system image in Flash Partition B.
Example of Viewing Changed Interface State for Monitored Ports Layer 3 LAG does not include this support. SNMP trap works for the Layer 2 / Layer 3 / default mode LAG. SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.0 = Timeticks: (8500842) 23:36:48.42 SNMPv2-MIB::snmpTrapOID.0 = OID: IF-MIB::linkDown IF-MIB::ifIndex.33865785 = INTEGER: 33865785 SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.1.1.4.1.2 = STRING: "OSTATE_DN: Changed interface state Te 1/1" 2010-02-10 14:22:39 10.16.130.4 [10.16.130.4]: SNMPv2-MIB::sysUpTime.
Table 106. SNMP OIDs for Transceiver Monitoring Field (OID) Description SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.1 Device Name SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.2 Port SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.3 Optics Type SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.4 Vendor Name SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.5 Part Number SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.6 Serial Number SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.1.3.1.1.7 Transmit Power SNMPv2-SMI::enterprises.6027.3.11.
48 Stacking Using the Dell Networking OS stacking feature, you can interconnect multiple switch units with stacking ports or front end user ports. The stack becomes manageable as a single switch through the stack management unit. The system accepts Unit ID numbers from 0 to 6 and the S6000 supports stacking up to six units with Dell Networking OS version 9.7(0.0).
• Switch failure • Inter-switch stacking link failure • Switch insertion • Switch removal If the master switch goes off line, the standby replaces it as the new master and the switch with the next highest priority or MAC address becomes standby. Stack Master Election The stack elects a master and standby unit at bootup time based on two criteria. • Unit priority — User-configurable. The range is from 1 to 14. A higher value (14) means a higher priority. The default is 0.
5 5 0 1 up down AC up UNKNOWN down 6688 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------2 0 up up 7021 up 7072 2 1 up up 7072 up 7021 2 2 up up 7021 up 7021 5 0 up up 7072 up 7021 5 1 up up 7021 up 6971 5 2 up up 7072 up 7021 Speed in RPM Dell# Virtual IP You can manage the stack using a single IP, known as a virtual IP, that is retained in the stack even after a failover.
Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------0 Management online S6000 1-0 (0-3387) 128 1 Member not present 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present 6 Member not present [output omitted] Standalone#show system | grep priority Master priority : 0 -----------STACK BEFORE CONNECTION---------------Stack#show system brief Stack MAC : 00:01:e8:d5:f9:6f -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Port
Stacking LAG When multiple links are used between stack units, Dell Networking OS automatically bundles them in a stacking LAG to provide aggregated throughput and redundancy. The stacking LAG is established automatically and transparently by Dell Networking OS (without user configuration) after peering is detected and behaves as follows: • The stacking LAG dynamically aggregates; it can lose link members or gain new links.
Dell Networking OS elects a new standby unit. Dell Networking OS resets the failed master unit: after online, it becomes a member unit; the remaining members remain online. Example of Stack Manager Redundancy Management Access on Stacks You can access the stack via the console port or VTY line. • Console access — You may access the stack through the console port of the master unit (stack manager) only.
Stacking Installation Tasks The following are the stacking installation tasks. • Create a Stack • Add Units to an Existing Stack • Split a Stack Create a Stack Stacking is enabled on the device using the front end ports. No configuration is allowed on front end ports used for stacking. Stacking can be made between 40G ports of two units. The stack links between the two units are grouped into a single LAG. Stack Group/Port Numbers By default, each unit in Standalone mode is numbered stack-unit 0.
• before the management unit downloads its Dell Networking OS version 9.7.0.0 or later to the new unit. The syslog includes the unit number, previous version, and version being downloaded. • when the firmware synchronization is complete. • if the system check fails, a message such as a hardware incompatibility message or incompatible uboot version is generated. If the unit is placed in a card problem state, the management unit also generates an SNMP trap.
To create a new stack, use the following commands. 1 Power up all units in the stack. 2 Verify that each unit has the same Dell Networking OS version prior to stacking them together. EXEC Privilege mode show version 3 Manually configure unit numbers for each unit, so that the stacking is deterministic upon boot up. EXEC Privilege mode stack-unit stack—unit—number renumber stack—unit—number. Renumbering causes the unit to reboot. The stack-unit default for all new units is stack-unit 0.
Example of a Syslog Figure 120. Creating a new stack In the above example, stack unit 1 is the master management unit, stack unit 2 is the standby unit. The cables are connected to each unit.
-- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Member not present S6000 1 Member not present 2 Standby online S6000 S6000 1-0(0-3387) 128 3 Member not present S6000 4 Member not present 5 Management online S6000 S6000 1-0(0-3387) 128 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) --------------------------------------------------------------------------2 0 up AC up 6720 2 1 up AC up 6688 5
stack-unit stack-unit-number renumber stack-unit-new-number 3 (OPTIONAL) On the new unit, assign a management priority based on whether you want the new unit to be the stack manager. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unit stack-unit-number priority priority-number 4 Assign a stack group to each unit. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unitstack-unit-number stack-group stack-group-number 5 Connect the new unit to the stack using stacking cables.
• 5 Dell> enable • Dell# configure Configure the ports on the added switch for stacking. CONFIGURATION mode stack-unit 0 stack-group group-number 6 • stack-unit 0: defines the default ID unit-number in the initial configuration of a switch. • stack-group group-number: configures a port for stacking. Save the stacking configuration on the ports. EXEC Privilege mode write memory 7 Reload the switch.
• If one of the new stacks receives the master and the standby management units, it is unaffected by the split. • If one of the new stacks receives only the master unit, that unit remains the stack manager, and Dell Networking OS elects a new standby management unit. • If one of the new stacks receives only the standby unit, it becomes the master unit of the new stack, and Dell Networking OS elects a new standby unit.
• show system Display most of the information in show system, but in a more convenient tabular form. EXEC Privilege mode • show system brief Display the same information in show system, but only for the specified unit. EXEC Privilege mode • show system stack-unit Display topology and stack link status for the entire stack. EXEC Privilege mode show system stack-ports [status | topology] Examples of the show system Commands Display information about a switch stack using the show system command.
Dell Networking OS Version : 1-0(0-3387) Jumbo Capable : yes POE Capable : no FIPS Mode : disabled Burned In MAC : 90:b1:1c:f4:a7:c7 No Of MACs : 3 -- Power Supplies -Unit Bay Status Type FanStatus FanSpeed(rpm) ------------------------------------------------------------5 0 up AC up 6688 5 1 down UNKNOWN down 0 -- Fan Status -Unit Bay TrayStatus Fan0 Speed Fan1 Speed -----------------------------------------------------------5 0 up up 6971 up 7072 5 1 up up 7072 up 6971 5 2 up up 6971 up 7021 Speed in RPM
2/0 2/4 5/4 5/120 Dell# 5/120 2/4 42 42 42 42 up up up up down up down up Influencing Management Unit Selection on a Stack Stack priority is the system variable that Dell Networking OS uses to determine which units in the stack are the master and standby management units. If multiple units tie for highest priority, the unit with the highest MAC address prevails.
Resetting a Unit on a Stack You may reset any stack unit except for the master management unit, as shown in the following message. % Error: Reset of master unit is not allowed. To rest a unit on a stack, use the following commands. • Reload a stack-unit. EXEC Privilege mode reset stack-unit unit-number • Reload a member unit, from the unit itself. EXEC Privilege mode reset-self • Reset a stack-unit when the unit is in a problem state.
The following example shows the parameters for the management unit in the stack. Dell#show system stack-unit 5 -- Unit 5 -Unit Type : Management Unit Status : online Next Boot : online Required Type : S6000 - 32-port TE/FG (SI) Current Type : S6000 - 32-port TE/FG (SI) Master priority : 234881024 Hardware Rev : 4.0 Num Ports : 128 Up Time : 1 day, 0 hr, 0 min Dell Networking OS Version : 1-0(0-3666) Jumbo Capable : yes POE Capable : no FIPS Mode : disabled Boot Flash : 3.1.1.3 Boot Selector : 3.1.0.
Remove Units or Front End Ports from a Stack To remove units or front end ports from a stack, use the following instructions. • Removing a Unit from a Stack • Removing Front End Port Stacking Removing a Unit from a Stack The running-configuration and startup-configuration are synchronized on all stack units. A stack member that is disconnected from the stack maintains this configuration. To remove a stack member from the stack, disconnect the stacking cables from the unit.
no stack-unit id stack-group id 2 Save the stacking configuration on the ports. EXEC Privilege mode write memory 3 Reload the switch. EXEC Privilege mode reload After the units are reloaded, the system reboots. The units come up as standalone units after the reboot completes. Troubleshoot a Stack To troubleshoot a stack, use the following recovery tasks.
Example of Card Problem Error on a Stack - Different Dell Networking OS Versions Dell#show system brief Stack MAC Reload-Type : 90:b1:1c:f4:a7:c7 : normal-reload [Next boot : normal-reload] -- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Member not present S6000 unknown 128 1 Member not present 2 Standby online S6000 S6000 1-0(0-3387) 128 3 Member not present S6000 4 Member not present 5 Management online
49 Storm Control Storm control allows you to control unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast traffic on Layer 2 and Layer 3 physical interfaces. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) Behavior: Dell Networking OS supports unknown-unicast, muticast, and broadcast control for Layer 2 and Layer 3 traffic. To view the storm control broadcast configuration show storm-control broadcast | multicast | unknown-unicast | pfc-llfc[interface] command.
• The storm control is calculated in packets per second. • Configure storm control. • INTERFACE mode Configure the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface (ingress only). INTERFACE mode storm-control broadcast packets_per_second in • Configure the packets per second of multicast traffic allowed on C-Series or S-Series interface (ingress only) network only.
Detect PFC Storm The following section explains the procedure to detect the PFC storm. You can detect the PFC storm by polling the lossless queues in a port or priority periodically. When the queue depth is not equal to zero or when the queue has traffic after subsequent number of polling, then the port or priority is detected to have the PFC storm. • • • Use the polling—interval {interval in milli-seconds} command to set the polling interval. The queue traffic and egress counters are polled.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------Te 0/0 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/1 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 Te 0/2 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/3 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/4 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/5 3 2 0 0 4 2 0 0 5 2 0 0 6 2 0 0 Te 0/80 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 Dell# 884 Storm Control
50 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) The spanning tree protocol (STP) is supported on Dell Networking OS.
Configure Spanning Tree Configuring spanning tree is a two-step process.
Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode All interfaces on all switches that participate in spanning tree must be in Layer 2 mode and enabled. Figure 121. Example of Configuring Interfaces for Layer 2 Mode To configure and enable the interfaces for Layer 2, use the following command. 1 If the interface has been assigned an IP address, remove it. INTERFACE mode no ip address 2 Place the interface in Layer 2 mode. INTERFACE switchport 3 Enable the interface.
Example of the show config Command To verify that an interface is in Layer 2 mode and enabled, use the show config command from INTERFACE mode. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)# Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally Enable the spanning tree protocol globally; it is not enabled by default.
no disable Examples of Verifying Spanning Tree Information To disable STP globally for all Layer 2 interfaces, use the disable command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode. To verify that STP is enabled, use the show config command from PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode.
Adding an Interface to the Spanning Tree Group To add a Layer 2 interface to the spanning tree topology, use the following command. • Enable spanning tree on a Layer 2 interface. INTERFACE mode spanning-tree 0 Modifying Global Parameters You can modify the spanning tree parameters. The root bridge sets the values for forward-delay, hello-time, and max-age and overwrites the values set on other bridges participating in STP.
The range is from 1 to 10. • the default is 2 seconds. Change the max-age parameter (the refresh interval for configuration information that is generated by recomputing the spanning tree topology). PROTOCOL SPANNING TREE mode max-age seconds The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds. To view the current values for global parameters, use the show spanning-tree 0 command from EXEC privilege mode. Refer to the second example in Enabling Spanning Tree Protocol Globally.
CAUTION: Enable PortFast only on links connecting to an end station. PortFast can cause loops if it is enabled on an interface connected to a network. To enable PortFast on an interface, use the following command. • Enable PortFast on an interface.
• Disable spanning tree on the interface (the no spanning-tree command in INTERFACE mode). • Disabling global spanning tree (the no spanning-tree in CONFIGURATION mode). Figure 123. Enabling BPDU Guard Dell Networking OS Behavior: BPDU guard and BPDU filtering both block BPDUs, but are two separate features. BPDU guard: • • is used on edgeports and blocks all traffic on edgeport if it receives a BPDU. drops the BPDU after it reaches the RP and generates a console message.
---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- --- ---------------Te 1/6 Root 128.263 128 20000 FWD 20000 P2P No Te 1/7 ErrDis 128.264 128 20000 EDS 20000 P2P No Dell(conf-if-te-1/7)#do show ip interface brief tengigabitEthernet 1/7 Interface IP-Address OK Method Status Protocol TenGigabitEthernet 1/7 unassigned YES Manual up up Selecting STP Root The STP determines the root bridge, but you can assign one bridge a lower priority to increase the likelihood that it becomes the root bridge.
In STP topology 3 (shown in the lower middle), if you have enabled the root guard feature on the STP port on Switch C that connects to device D, and device D sends a superior BPDU that would trigger the election of device D as the new root bridge, the BPDU is ignored and the port on Switch C transitions from a forwarding to a root-inconsistent state (shown by the green X icon). As a result, Switch A becomes the root bridge. Figure 124.
• Enable root guard on a port or port-channel interface. INTERFACE mode or INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode spanning-tree {0 | mstp | rstp | pvst} rootguard • • • • 0: enables root guard on an STP-enabled port assigned to instance 0. mstp: enables root guard on an MSTP-enabled port. rstp: enables root guard on an RSTP-enabled port. pvst: enables root guard on a PVST-enabled port.
lower left), Switch C does not receive BPDUs from Switch B. When the max-age timer expires, the STP port on Switch C becomes unblocked and transitions to Forwarding state. A loop is created as both Switch A and Switch C transmit traffic to Switch B. As shown in the following illustration (STP topology 2, upper right), a loop can also be created if the forwarding port on Switch B becomes busy and does not forward BPDUs within the configured forward-delay time.
Configuring Loop Guard Enable STP loop guard on a per-port or per-port channel basis. The following conditions apply to a port enabled with loop guard: • Loop guard is supported on any STP-enabled port or port-channel interface.
Example of Viewing STP Guard Configuration Dell#show spanning-tree 0 guard Interface Name Instance Sts Guard type --------- -------- --------- ---------Te 1/1 0 INCON(Root) Rootguard Te 1/2 0 LIS Loopguard Te 1/3 0 EDS (Shut) Bpduguard Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 899
51 SupportAssist SupportAssist sends troubleshooting data securely to Dell. SupportAssist in this Dell Networking OS release does not support automated email notification at the time of hardware fault alert, automatic case creation, automatic part dispatch, or reports. SupportAssist requires Dell Networking OS 9.9(0.0) and SmartScripts 9.7 or later to be installed on the Dell Networking device. For more information on SmartScripts, see Dell Networking Open Automation guide. Figure 126.
Configuring SupportAssist Using a Configuration Wizard You are guided through a series of queries to configure SupportAssist. The generated commands are added to the running configuration, including the DNS resolve commands, if configured. This command starts the configuration wizard for the SupportAssist. At any time, you can exit by entering Ctrl-C. If necessary, you can skip some data entry. Enable the SupportAssist service.
making such transfers, Dell shall ensure appropriate protection is in place to safeguard the Collected Data being transferred in connection with SupportAssist. If you are downloading SupportAssist on behalf of a company or other legal entity, you are further certifying to Dell that you have appropriate authority to provide this consent on behalf of that entity.
support-assist activity {full-transfer | core-transfer} start now Dell#support-assist activity full-transfer start now Dell#support-assist activity core-transfer start now Configuring SupportAssist Activity SupportAssist Activity mode allows you to configure and view the action-manifest file for a specific activity. To configure SupportAssist activity, use the following commands. 1 Move to the SupportAssist Activity mode for an activity. Allows you to configure customized details for a specific activity.
action-manifest remove Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-full-transfer)# Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)#action-manifest remove custom_event_file1.json Dell(conf-supportassist-act-event-transfer)# 6 Enable a specific SupportAssist activity. By default, the full transfer includes the core files. When you disable the core transfer activity, the full transfer excludes the core files.
Configuring SupportAssist Person SupportAssist Person mode allows you to configure name, email addresses, phone, method and time zone for contacting the person. SupportAssist Person configurations are optional for the SupportAssist service. To configure SupportAssist person, use the following commands. 1 Configure the contact name for an individual.
SUPPORTASSIST SERVER mode [no] proxy-ip-address {ipv4-address | ipv6-address}port port-number [ username userid password [encryption-type] password ] Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)#proxy-ip-address 10.0.0.1 port 90 username test password 0 test1 Dell(conf-supportassist-serv-default)# 3 Enable communication with the SupportAssist server.
activity event-transfer enable action-manifest install default ! activity core-transfer enable ! contact-company name Dell street-address F lane , Sector 30 address city Brussels state HeadState country Belgium postalcode S328J3 ! contact-person first Fred last Nash email-address primary des@sed.com alternate sed@dol.com phone primary 123422 alternate 8395729 preferred-method email time-zone zone +05:30 start-time 12:23 end-time 15:23 ! server Dell enable url http://1.1.1.
52 System Time and Date System time and date settings and the network time protocol (NTP) are supported on Dell Networking OS. You can set system times and dates and maintained through the NTP. They are also set through the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) command line interfaces (CLIs) and hardware settings. The Dell Networking OS supports reaching an NTP server through different VRFs. You can configure a maximum of eight logging servers across different VRFs or the same VRF.
Following conventions established by the telephone industry [BEL86], the accuracy of each server is defined by a number called the stratum, with the topmost level (primary servers) assigned as one and each level downwards (secondary servers) in the hierarchy assigned as one greater than the preceding level. Dell Networking OS synchronizes with a time-serving host to get the correct time. You can set Dell Networking OS to poll specific NTP time-serving hosts for the current time.
Related Configuration Tasks • Configuring NTP Broadcasts • Disabling NTP on an Interface • Configuring a Source IP Address for NTP Packets (optional) Enabling NTP NTP is disabled by default. To enable NTP, specify an NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes. To specify multiple servers, enter the command multiple times. You may specify an unlimited number of servers at the expense of CPU resources. • Specify the NTP server to which the Dell Networking system synchronizes.
Disabling NTP on an Interface By default, NTP is enabled on all active interfaces. If you disable NTP on an interface, Dell Networking OS drops any NTP packets sent to that interface. To disable NTP on an interface, use the following command. • Disable NTP on the interface. INTERFACE mode ntp disable To view whether NTP is configured on the interface, use the show config command in INTERFACE mode. If ntp disable is not listed in the show config command output, NTP is enabled.
To configure NTP authentication, use the following commands. 1 Enable NTP authentication. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authenticate 2 Set an authentication key. CONFIGURATION mode ntp authentication-key number md5 key Configure the following parameters: • • 3 number: the range is from 1 to 4294967295. This number must be the same as the number in the ntp trusted-key command. key: enter a text string. This text string is encrypted. Define a trusted key.
1w6d23h : NTP: rcv packet from 192.168.1.1 leap 0, mode 4, version 3, stratum 1, ppoll 1024 rtdel 0000 (0.000000), rtdsp AF587 (10959.090820), refid 4C4F434C (76.79.67.76) ref CD7E14FD.43F7CED9 (16:29:49.265 UTC Wed Apr 1 2009) org CD7F5368.D0535000 (15:8:24.813 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) rec CD7F5368.D0000000 (15:8:24.812 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) xmt CD7F5368.D0000000 (15:8:24.812 UTC Thu Apr 2 2009) inp CD7F5368.D1974000 (15:8:24.
Configuring a Custom-defined Period for NTP time Synchronization You can configure the system to send an audit log message to a syslog server if the time difference from the NTP server is greater than a threshold value (offset-threshold). However, time synchronization still occurs. To configure the offset-threshold, follow this procedure. • Specify the threshold time interval before which the system generates an NTP audit log message if the system time deviates from the NTP server.
Setting the Timezone Universal time coordinated (UTC) is the time standard based on the International Atomic Time standard, commonly known as Greenwich Mean time. When determining system time, include the differentiator between UTC and your local timezone. For example, San Jose, CA is the Pacific Timezone with a UTC offset of -8. To set the clock timezone, use the following command. • Set the clock to the appropriate timezone.
• end-day: enter the number of the day. The range is from 1 to 31. You can enter the name of a month to change the order of the display to time day month year. • end-year: enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. • end-time: enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. • offset: (OPTIONAL) enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
Examples of the clock summer-time recurring Command The following example shows the clock summer-time recurring command.
53 Tunneling Tunnel interfaces create a logical tunnel for IPv4 or IPv6 traffic. Tunneling supports RFC 2003, RFC 2473, and 4213. DSCP, hop-limits, flow label values, open shortest path first (OSPF) v2, and OSPFv3 are supported. Internet control message protocol (ICMP) error relay, PATH MTU transmission, and fragmented packets are not supported.
Dell(conf-if-tu-2)#show config ! interface Tunnel 2 no ip address ipv6 address 2::1/64 tunnel destination 90.1.1.1 tunnel source 60.1.1.1 tunnel mode ipv6ip no shutdown The following sample configuration shows a tunnel configured in IPIP mode (IPv4 tunnel carries IPv4 and IPv6 traffic): Dell(conf)#interface tunnel 3 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel source 5::5 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel destination 8::9 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#tunnel mode ipv6 Dell(conf-if-tu-3)#ip address 3.1.1.
Configuring a Tunnel Interface You can configure the tunnel interface using the ip unnumbered and ipv6 unnumbered commands. To configure the tunnel interface to operate without a unique explicit IP or IPv6 address, select the interface from which the tunnel borrows its address. The following sample configuration shows how to use the interface tunnel configuration commands. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 20.1.1.
Configuring Tunnel source anylocal Decapsulation The tunnel source anylocal command allows a multipoint receive-only tunnel to decapsulate tunnel packets addressed to any IPv4 or IPv6 (depending on the tunnel mode) address configured on the switch that is operationally UP. The source anylocal parameters can be used for packet decapsulation instead of the ip address or interface (tunnel allowremote command), but only on multipoint receive-only mode tunnels.
54 Upgrade Procedures To find the upgrade procedures, go to the Dell Networking OS Release Notes for your system type to see all the requirements needed to upgrade to the desired Dell Networking OS version. To upgrade your system type, follow the procedures in the Dell Networking OS Release Notes. Get Help with Upgrades Direct any questions or concerns about the Dell Networking OS upgrade procedures to the Dell Technical Support Center. You can reach Technical Support: • On the web: http://www.dell.
55 Virtual LANs (VLANs) Virtual LANs (VLANs) are a logical broadcast domain or logical grouping of interfaces in a local area network (LAN) in which all data received is kept locally and broadcast to all members of the group. When in Layer 2 mode, VLANs move traffic at wire speed and can span multiple devices. The system supports up to 4093 port-based VLANs and one default VLAN, as specified in IEEE 802.1Q.
Default VLAN When you configure interfaces for Layer 2 mode, they are automatically placed in the Default VLAN as untagged interfaces. Only untagged interfaces can belong to the Default VLAN. The following example displays the outcome of placing an interface in Layer 2 mode. To configure an interface for Layer 2 mode, use the switchport command.
VLANs and Port Tagging To add an interface to a VLAN, the interface must be in Layer 2 mode. After you place an interface in Layer 2 mode, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN. Dell Networking OS supports IEEE 802.1Q tagging at the interface level to filter traffic. When you enable tagging, a tag header is added to the frame after the destination and source MAC addresses. That information is preserved as the frame moves through the network.
• Configure a port-based VLAN (if the VLAN-ID is different from the Default VLAN ID) and enter INTERFACE VLAN mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface vlan vlan-id To activate the VLAN, after you create a VLAN, assign interfaces in Layer 2 mode to the VLAN. Example of Verifying a Port-Based VLAN To view the configured VLANs, use the show vlan command in EXEC Privilege mode.
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/2 Dell#config Dell(conf)#interface vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#tagged po 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show conf ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address tagged Port-channel 1 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM Status Q * 1 Inactive 2 Active T T 3 Active T T 4 Active T Ports Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/2 Po1(So 0/0-1) When you r
Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 Status Active Active 3 Active Q U T T T T Ports Te 1/2 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/3 Po1(So 0/0-1) Te 1/1 4 Inactive Dell#conf Dell(conf)#interface vlan 4 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#untagged tengigabitethernet 1/2 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#show config ! interface Vlan 4 no ip address untagged TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#end Dell#show vlan Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs NUM * 1 2 3 4 Status Q Inactive Active T T Active T T Active U Ports Po1(So 0/0-1)
Native VLAN support breaks this barrier so that you can connect a port to both VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware stations. Such ports are referred to as hybrid ports. Physical and port-channel interfaces may be hybrid ports. Native VLAN is useful in deployments where a Layer 2 port can receive both tagged and untagged traffic on the same physical port. The classic example is connecting a voice-over-IP (VOIP) phone and a PC to the same port of the switch.
56 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) Virtual link trunking (VLT) allows physical links between two Dell switches to appear as a single virtual link to the network core or other switches such as Edge, Access, or top-of-rack (ToR). As a result, the two physical switches appear as a single switch to the connected devices. Overview In a traditional switched topology as shown below, spanning tree protocols (STPs) are used to block one or more links to prevent loops in the network.
Figure 130. VLT providing multipath VLT reduces the role of spanning tree protocols (STPs) by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches and supporting a loop-free topology. To prevent the initial loop that may occur prior to VLT being established, use a spanning tree protocol. After VLT is established, you may use rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) to prevent loops from forming with new links that are incorrectly connected and outside the VLT domain.
Figure 131. Example of VLT Deployment VLT offers the following benefits: • • • • • • • • • • • • Allows a single device to use a LAG across two upstream devices. Eliminates STP-blocked ports. Provides a loop-free topology. Uses all available uplink bandwidth. Provides fast convergence if either the link or a device fails. Optimized forwarding with virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP). Provides link-level resiliency. Assures high availability. Active-Active load sharing with VRRP.
VLT Terminology The following are key VLT terms. • Virtual link trunk (VLT) — The combined port channel between an attached device and the VLT peer switches. • VLT backup link — The backup link monitors the connectivity between the VLT peer switches. The backup link sends configurable, periodic keep alive messages between the VLT peer switches. • VLT interconnect (VLTi) — The link used to synchronize states between the VLT peer switches. Both ends must be on 10G or 40G interfaces.
Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains In a VLT domain, the MAC address of any host connected to the VLT peers is synchronized between the VLT nodes. In the following example, VLAN 10 is spanned across three VLT domains. Figure 132. Layer-2 Traffic in VLT Domains If Host 1 from a VLT domain sends a frame to Host 2 in another VLT domain, the frame can use any link shown to reach Host 2.
30 30 30 30 30 30 a0:00:a1:00:00:07 a0:00:a1:00:00:08 a0:00:a1:00:00:09 a0:00:a1:00:00:0a a0:00:a1:00:00:0b a0:00:a1:00:00:0c Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active (N) Po 11 Active Po 11 Active VLT-10-PEER-2#show vlt statistics mac VLT MAC Statistics -------------------L2 Info Pkts sent:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Sent:7 L2 Info Pkts Rcvd:0, L2 Mac-sync Pkts Rcvd:9 L2 Reg Request sent:0 L2 Reg Request rcvd:0 L2 Reg Response sent:0 L2
Figure 133. VLT on Core Switches The aggregation layer is mostly in the L2/L3 switching/routing layer. For better resiliency in the aggregation, Dell Networking recommends running the internal gateway protocol (IGP) on the VLTi VLAN to synchronize the L3 routing table across the two nodes on a VLT system. Enhanced VLT Enhanced VLT (eVLT)) refers to the ability to connect two VLT domains.
Figure 134. Enhanced VLT Configure Virtual Link Trunking VLT requires that you enable the feature and then configure the same VLT domain, backup link, and VLT interconnect on both peer switches. Important Points to Remember • You cannot enable stacking simultaneously with VLT. If you enable both at the same time, unexpected behavior occurs. • VLT port channel interfaces must be switch ports. • If you include RSTP on the system, configure it before VLT. Refer to Configure Rapid Spanning Tree.
• If the DHCP server is located on the ToR and the VLTi (ICL) is down due to a failed link when a VLT node is rebooted in BMP mode, it is not able to reach the DHCP server, resulting in BMP failure. • If the source is connected to an orphan (non-spanned, non-VLT) port in a VLT peer, the receiver is connected to a VLT (spanned) port-channel, and the VLT port-channel link between the VLT peer connected to the source and ToR is down, traffic is duplicated due to route inconsistency between peers.
• • Separately configure each VLT peer switch with the same VLT domain ID and the VLT version. If the system detects mismatches between VLT peer switches in the VLT domain ID or VLT version, the VLT Interconnect (VLTi) does not activate. To find the reason for the VLTi being down, use the show vlt statistics command to verify that there are mismatch errors, then use the show vlt brief command on each VLT peer to view the VLT version on the peer switch.
• • To connect servers and access switches with VLT peer switches, you use a VLT port channel, as shown in Overview. Up to 96 port-channels are supported; up to 16 member links are supported in each port channel between the VLT domain and an access device. • The discovery protocol running between VLT peers automatically generates the ID number of the port channel that connects an access device and a VLT switch.
• • • VRRP elects the router with the highest priority as the master in the VRRP group. To ensure VRRP operation in a VLT domain, configure VRRP group priority on each VLT peer so that a peer is either the master or backup for all VRRP groups configured on its interfaces. For more information, see Setting VRRP Group (Virtual Router) Priority. • To verify that a VLT peer is consistently configured for either the master or backup role in all VRRP groups, use the show vrrp command on each peer.
• Configure any ports at the edge of the spanning tree’s operating domain as edge ports, which are directly connected to end stations or server racks. Disable RSTP on ports connected directly to Layer 3-only routers not running STP or configure them as edge ports. • Ensure that the primary VLT node is the root bridge and the secondary VLT peer node has the second-best bridge ID in the network.
VLT Port Delayed Restoration When a VLT node boots up, if the VLT ports have been previously saved in the start-up configuration, they are not immediately enabled. To ensure MAC and ARP entries from the VLT per node are downloaded to the newly enabled VLT node, the system allows time for the VLT ports on the new node to be enabled and begin receiving traffic. The delay-restore feature waits for all saved configurations to be applied, then starts a configurable timer.
Figure 135. PIM-Sparse Mode Support on VLT On each VLAN where the VLT peer nodes act as the first hop or last hop routers, one of the VLT peer nodes is elected as the PIM designated router. If you configured IGMP snooping along with PIM on the VLT VLANs, you must configure VLTi as the static multicast router port on both VLT peer switches. This ensures that for first hop routers, the packets from the source are redirected to the designated router (DR) if they are incorrectly hashed.
Each VLT peer runs its own PIM protocol independently of other VLT peers. To ensure the PIM protocol states or multicast routing information base (MRIB) on the VLT peers are synced, if the incoming interface (IIF) and outgoing interface (OIF) are Spanned, the multicast route table is synced between the VLT peers. To verify the PIM neighbors on the VLT VLAN and on the multicast port, use the show ip pim neighbor, show ip igmp snooping mrouter, and show running config commands.
Figure 136. Packets without peer routing enabled If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as a proxy gateway for its connected VLT peer as shown in the image below. Even though the gateway address of the packet is different, Peer-1 routes the packet to its destination on behalf of Peer-2 to avoid sub-optimal routing. Figure 137. Packets with peer routing enabled Benefits of Peer Routing • • Avoids sub-optimal routing • Reduces latency by avoiding another hop in the traffic path.
• You can reduce the number of VLTi port channel members based on your specific design. With peer routing, you need not configure VRRP for the participating VLANs. As both VLT nodes act as a gateway for its peer, irrespective of the gateway IP address, the traffic flows upstream without any latency. There is no limitation for the number of VLANS. VLT Unicast Routing VLT unicast routing is a type of VLT peer routing that locally routes unicast packets destined for the L3 endpoint of the VLT peer.
The advantages of syncing the multicast routes between VLT peers are: • VLT resiliency — After a VLT link or peer failure, if the traffic hashes to the VLT peer, the traffic continues to be routed using multicast until the PIM protocol detects the failure and adjusts the multicast distribution tree. • Optimal routing — The VLT peer that receives the incoming traffic can directly route traffic to all downstream routers connected on VLT ports.
RSTP Configuration RSTP is supported in a VLT domain. Before you configure VLT on peer switches, configure RSTP in the network. RSTP is required for initial loop prevention during the VLT startup phase. You may also use RSTP for loop prevention in the network outside of the VLT port channel. For information about how to configure RSTP, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP). Run RSTP on both VLT peer switches.
Configure RSTP on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 1) Dell_VLTpeer1(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer1(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 4096 Configure RSTP on VLT Peers to Prevent Forwarding Loops (VLT Peer 2) Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#protocol spanning-tree rstp Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#no disable Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-rstp)#bridge-priority 0 Configuring VLT To configure VLT, use the following procedure.
3 Add one or more port interfaces to the port channel. INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode channel-member interface interface: specify one of the following interface types: 4 • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a 40-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fortyGigE then the slot/port information. Ensure that the port channel is active.
VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode primary-priority value The priority values are from 1 to 65535. The default is 32768. If the primary peer fails, the secondary peer (with the higher priority) takes the primary role. If the primary peer (with the lower priority) later comes back online, it is assigned the secondary role (there is no preemption). 6 (Optional) Prevent a possible loop during the bootup of a VLT peer switch or a device that accesses the VLT domain.
CONFIGURATION mode vlt domain domain-id The range of domain IDs from 1 to 1000. 2 Enter an amount of time, in seconds, to delay the restoration of the VLT ports after the system is rebooted. CONFIGURATION mode delay-restore delay-restore-time The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 90 seconds. Reconfiguring the Default VLT Settings (Optional) To reconfigure the default VLT settings, use the following commands. 1 Enter VLT-domain configuration mode for a specified VLT domain.
Connecting a VLT Domain to an Attached Access Device (Switch or Server) To connect a VLT domain to an attached access device, use the following commands. On a VLT peer switch: To connect to an attached device, configure the same port channel ID number on each peer switch in the VLT domain. 1 Configure the same port channel to be used to connect to an attached device and enter interface configuration mode. CONFIGURATION mode interface port-channel id-number 2 Remove an IP address from the interface.
The range of domain IDs is from 1 to 1000. 2 Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 3 Enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-down-vlan vlan interface number Configuring Enhanced VLT (Optional) To configure enhanced VLT (eVLT) between two VLT domains on your network, use the following procedure.
The format is aaaa.bbbb.cccc. Also reconfigure the same MAC address on the VLT peer switch. Use this command to minimize the time required for the VLT system to synchronize the default MAC address of the VLT domain on both peer switches when one peer switch reboots. 7 When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch. To explicitly configure the default values on each peer switch, use the following command.
16 Enable peer routing. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-routing If you enable peer routing, a VLT node acts as the proxy gateway for its peer. 17 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 1. 18 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the first VLT node in Domain 2. 19 Repeat steps 1 through 16 for the VLT peer node in Domain 2. To verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the show commands described in Verifying a VLT Configuration.
show running-config entity 12 Verify that VLT is running. EXEC mode show vlt brief or show vlt detail 13 Verify that the VLT LAG is running in both VLT peer units. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show interfaces interface Example of Configuring VLT In the following sample VLT configuration steps, VLT peer 1 is Dell-2, VLT peer 2 is Dell-4, and the ToR is S60-1.
2 Configure the VLT peer link port channel id in VLT peer 1 and VLT peer 2. 3 In the Top of Rack unit, configure LACP in the physical ports (shown for VLT peer 1 only. Repeat steps for VLT peer 2. The bold vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 indicates that port-channel 2 is the port-channel id configured in VLT peer 2).
Role Role Priority ICL Link Status HeartBeat Status VLT Peer Status Version Local System MAC address Remote System MAC address Remote system version Delay-Restore timer Delay-Restore Abort Threshold Peer-Routing Peer-Routing-Timeout timer Multicast peer-routing timeout Dell# : : : : : : : : : : Secondary 32768 Up Up Up 6(3) 00:01:e8:8a:e9:91 00:01:e8:8a:e9:76 6(3) 90 seconds : : : : 60 seconds Disabled 0 seconds 150 seconds Verify that the VLT LAG is up in VLT peer unit.
Configure both ends of the VLT interconnect trunk with identical PVST+ configurations. When you enable VLT, the show spanningtree pvst brief command output displays VLT information. Dell#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 1000 brief VLAN 1000 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 90b1.1cf4.9b79 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 90b1.1cf4.
Figure 138. Dell-1 Switch Configuration In the following output, RSTP is enabled with a bridge priority of 0. This ensures that Dell-1 becomes the root bridge. Dell#1#show run | find protocol protocol spanning-tree pvst no disable vlan 1,20,800,900 bridge-priority 0 The following output shows the existing VLANs.
The following is the configuration in interfaces: Dell#1#sh run int ma0/0 interface ManagementEthernet 0/0 description Used_for_VLT_Keepalive ip address 10.10.10.1/24 no shutdown (The management interfaces are part of a default VRF and are isolated from the switch’s data plane.) In Dell-1, te 0/0 and te 0/1 are used for VLTi.
Port channel 2 connects the access switch A1. Dell#1#sh run int po2 interface Port-channel 2 description port-channel_to_access_switch_A1 no ip address portmode hybrid switchport vlt-peer-lag port-channel 2 no shutdown Vlan 20 is used in Dell-1, Dell-2, and R1 to form OSPF adjacency. When OSPF is converged, the routing tables in all devices are synchronized. Dell#1#sh run int vlan 20 interface Vlan 20 description OSPF PEERING VLAN ip address 192.168.20.
----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: Destination VRF: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.10.10.2 Up default 1 3 34998 4 5 Use the show vlt detail command to verify that VLT is functional and that the correct VLANs are allowed.
Verify if peer routing has populated the CAM table with the correct information using the show cam mac command.
The following example shows that te 0/0 and te 0/1 are included in port channel 10. Also note that configuration on the VLTi links does not contain the switchport command. Dell-2#sh run int po10 interface Port-channel 10 description VLTi Port-Channel no ip address channel-member TenGigabitEthernet 0/0-1 no shutdown Te 0/4 connects to the access switch A1.
The following output shows Dell-2 is configured with VLT domain 1. The peer-link port-channel command makes port channel 10 as the VLTi link. The peer-routing command enables peer routing between VLT peers in VLT domain 1. The IP address configured with the backup-destination command is the management IP address of the VLT peer (Dell-1). A priority value of 55000 makes Dell-2 as the secondary VLT peer. Dell-2#sh run | find vlt vlt domain 1 peer-link port-channel 10 back-up destination 10.10.10.
network 192.168.20.0/29 area 0 passive-interface default no passive-interface vlan 20 While the passive-interface default command prevents all interfaces from establishing an OSPF neighborship, the no passive-interface vlan 20 command allows the interface for VLAN 20, the OSPF peering VLAN, to establish OSPF adjacencies. The following output displays that Dell-1 forms neighborship with Dell-2 and R1. Dell-2#show ip ospf neighbor Neighbor ID Pri State 172.17.1.1 1 FULL/DR 172.15.1.
R1#show run int port-channel 1 interface Port-channel1 switchport ip address 192.168.20.3 255.255.255.248 R1#show run | find router router ospf 1 router-id 172.15.1.1 passive-interface default no passive-interface Port-channel1 network 2.2.2.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 3.3.3.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 network 4.4.4.0 0.0.0.255 area 0 (The above subnets correspond to loopback interfaces lo2, lo3 and lo4. These three loopback interfaces are advertised to the VLT pair, Dell#1 and Dell#2) network 172.15.1.0 0.0.0.
This default route is configured for testing purposes, as described in the next section. The access switch (A1) is used to generate ICMP test PINGs to a loopback interface on CR1. This default route points to Dell#2’s VLAN 800 SVI interface. It’s in place to ensure that routed test traffic has Dell#2’s MAC address as the destination address in the Ethernet frame’s header When A1 sends a packet to R1, the VLT peers act as the default gateway for each other.
Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# vlt-peer-lag port-channel 100 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-po-100)# no shutdown Add links to the eVLT port-channel on Peer 1. Domain_1_Peer1(conf)#interface range tengigabitethernet 1/16 - 17 Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16-17)# port-channel-protocol LACP Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16-17)# port-channel 100 mode active Domain_1_Peer1(conf-if-range-te-1/16-17)# no shutdown Next, configure the VLT domain and VLTi on Peer 2.
Domain_1_Peer4#no shutdown Domain_2_Peer4(conf)#vlt domain 200 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-link port-channel 1 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# back-up destination 10.18.130.12 Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# system-mac mac-address 00:0b:00:0b:00:0b Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# peer-routing Domain_2_Peer4(conf-vlt-domain)# unit-id 1 Configure eVLT on Peer 4.
Verifying a VLT Configuration To monitor the operation or verify the configuration of a VLT domain, use any of the following show commands on the primary and secondary VLT switches. • Display information on backup link operation. EXEC mode • show vlt backup-link Display general status information about VLT domains currently configured on the switch.
HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 3 34998 1026 1025 Dell_VLTpeer2# show vlt backup-link VLT Backup Link ----------------Destination: Peer HeartBeat status: HeartBeat Timer Interval: HeartBeat Timeout: UDP Port: HeartBeat Messages Sent: HeartBeat Messages Received: 10.11.200.20 Up 1 3 34998 1030 1014 The following example shows the show vlt brief command.
VLT Role ---------VLT Role: System MAC address: System Role Priority: Local System MAC address: Local System Role Priority: Secondary 00:01:e8:8a:df:bc 32768 00:01:e8:8a:df:e6 32768 The following example shows the show running-config vlt command. Dell_VLTpeer1# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.18 Dell_VLTpeer2# show running-config vlt ! vlt domain 30 peer-link port-channel 60 back-up destination 10.11.200.
Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 0, Address 0001.e88a.dff8 We are the root Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Interface Designated Name PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID PortID ---------- -------- ---- ------- -------- - ------- ------------Po 1 128.2 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.2 Po 3 128.4 128 200000 DIS 0 0 0001.e88a.dff8 128.4 Po 4 128.
NUM Status Description Q Ports 10 Active U Po110(Fo 1/56) T Po100(Fo 1/48,52) Configuring Virtual Link Trunking (VLT Peer 2) Enable VLT and create a VLT domain with a backup-link VLT interconnect (VLTi). Dell_VLTpeer2(conf)#vlt domain 999 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#peer-link port-channel 100 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#back-up destination 10.11.206.23 Dell_VLTpeer2(conf-vlt-domain)#exit Configure the backup link.
Troubleshooting VLT To help troubleshoot different VLT issues that may occur, use the following information. NOTE: For information on VLT Failure mode timing and its impact, contact your Dell Networking representative. Table 109. Troubleshooting VLT Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take Bandwidth monitoring A syslog error message and an SNMP trap is generated when the VLTi bandwidth usage goes above the 80% threshold and when it drops below 80%.
Description Behavior at Peer Up Behavior During Run Time Action to Take information, refer to the Release Notes for this release. VLT LAG ID is not configured on A syslog error message is one VLT peer generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. VLT LAG ID mismatch A syslog error message is generated. The peer with the VLT configured remains active. Verify the VLT LAG ID is configured correctly on both VLT peers.
Keep the following points in mind when you configure VLT nodes in a PVLAN: • Configure the VLTi link to be in trunk mode. Do not configure the VLTi link to be in access or promiscuous mode. • You can configure a VLT LAG or port channel to be in trunk, access, or promiscuous port modes when you include the VLT LAG in a PVLAN. The VLT LAG settings must be the same on both the peers. If you configure a VLT LAG as a trunk port, you can associate that LAG to be a member of a normal VLAN or a PVLAN.
PVLAN Operations When One VLT Peer is Down When a VLT port moves to the Admin or Operationally Down state on only one of the VLT nodes, the VLT Lag is still considered to be up. All the PVLAN MAC entries that correspond to the operationally down VLT LAG are maintained as synchronized entries in the device. These MAC entries are removed when the peer VLT LAG also becomes inactive or a change in PVLAN configuration occurs.
Table 110.
VLT LAG Mode Peer1 PVLAN Mode of VLT VLAN Peer2 ICL VLAN Membership Mac Synchronization Peer1 Peer2 - Primary VLAN Y - Primary VLAN X No No Promiscuous Access Primary Secondary No No Trunk Access Primary/Normal Secondary No No Configuring a VLT VLAN or LAG in a PVLAN You can configure the VLT peers or nodes in a private VLAN (PVLAN).
7 Enter the port-channel number that acts as the interconnect trunk. VLT DOMAIN CONFIGURATION mode peer-link port-channel id-number 8 (Optional) To configure a VLT LAG, enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN where the VLT forwards packets received on the VLTi from an adjacent peer that is down.
• Specified with this command even before they have been created. • Amended by specifying the new secondary VLAN to be added to the list. Proxy ARP Capability on VLT Peer Nodes The proxy ARP functionality is supported on VLT peer nodes. A proxy ARP-enabled device answers the ARP requests that are destined for the other router in a VLT domain. The local host forwards the traffic to the proxy ARP-enabled device, which in turn transmits the packets to the destination. By default, proxy ARP is enabled.
When a VLT node detects peer up, it does not perform proxy ARP for the peer IP addresses. IP address synchronization occurs again between the VLT peers. Proxy ARP is enabled only if you enable peer routing on both the VLT peers. If you disable peer routing by using the no peerroutingcommand in VLT DOMAIN node, a notification is sent to the VLT peer to disable the proxy ARP.
INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL mode vlan-stack {access | trunk} 2 Configure VLAN as VLAN-stack compatible on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode vlan-stack compatible 3 Add the VLT LAG as a member to the VLAN-stack on both the peers. INTERFACE VLAN mode member port-channel port—channel ID 4 Verify the VLAN-stack configurations.
Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 no shutdown Dell# Configure the VLAN as a VLAN-Stack VLAN and add the VLT LAG as Members to the VLAN Dell(conf)#interface vlan 50 Dell(conf-if-vl-50)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 10 Dell(conf-if-vl-50-stack)#member port-channel 20 Dell#show running-config interface vlan 50 ! interface Vlan 50 vlan-stack compatible member
Dell(conf-if-po-10)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 10 ! interface Port-channel 10 no ip address switchport vlan-stack access vlt-peer-lag port-channel 10 no shutdown Dell# Dell(conf)#interface port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#switchport Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlt-peer-lag port-channel 20 Dell(conf-if-po-20)#vlan-stack trunk Dell(conf-if-po-20)#no shutdown Dell#show running-config interface port-channel 20 ! interface Port-channel 20 no ip address switchport vlan-stack trunk vlt-
IPv6 Peer Routing in VLT Domains Overview VLT enables the physical links between two devices that are called VLT nodes or peers, and within a VLT domain, to be considered as a single logical link to external devices that are connected using LAG bundles to both the VLT peers. This capability enables redundancy without the implementation of Spanning tree protocol (STP), thereby providing a loop-free network with optimal bandwidth utilization.
Synchronization of IPv6 ND Entries in a Non-VLT Domain Layer 3 VLT provides a higher resiliency at the Layer 3 forwarding level. Routed VLT allows you to replace VRRP with routed VLT to route the traffic from Layer 2 access nodes. With ND synchronization, both the VLT nodes perform Layer 3 forwarding on behalf of each other. Synchronization of NDPM entries learned on non-VLT interfaces between the non-VLT nodes.
Figure 140. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Consider a sample scenario as shown in the following figure in which two VLT nodes, Unit1 and Unit2, are connected in a VLT domain using an ICL or VLTi link. To the south of the VLT domain, Unit1 and Unit2 are connected to a ToR switch named Node B. Also, Unit1 is connected to another node, Node A, and Unit2 is linked to a node, Node C.
Figure 141. Sample Configuration of IPv6 Peer Routing in a VLT Domain Neighbor Solicitation from VLT Hosts Consider a case in which NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node1 on the VLT interface and NS for VLT node1 IP reaches VLT node2 due to LAG level hashing in the ToR. When VLT node1 receives NS from VLT VLAN interface, it unicasts the NA packet on the VLT interface. When NS reaches VLT node2, it is flooded on all interfaces including ICL.
Neighbor Advertisement from Non-VLT Hosts Consider a situation in which NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node1 on a non-VLT interface and NA for VLT node1 reaches VLT node2 on a non-VLT interface. When VLT node1 receives NA on a VLT interface, it learns the Host MAC address on the received interface. This learned neighbor entry is synchronized to VLT node2 as it is learned on ICL.
When VLT node receives traffic from north bound intended to the non-VLT host, it does neighbor entry lookup and routes traffic to VLT interface. If traffic reaches wrong VLT peer, it routes the traffic over ICL. Non-VLT host to Non-VLT host traffic flow When VLT node receives traffic from non-VLT host intended to the non-VLT host, it does neighbor entry lookup and routes traffic over ICL interface. If traffic reaches wrong VLT peer, it routes the traffic over ICL.
57 VLT Proxy Gateway The virtual link trucking (VLT) proxy gateway feature allows a VLT domain to locally terminate and route L3 packets that are destined to a Layer 3 (L3) end point in another VLT domain. Enable the VLT proxy gateway using the link layer discover protocol (LLDP) method or the static configuration. For more information, see the Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Figure 142. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway Guidelines for Enabling the VLT Proxy Gateway Keep the following points in mind when you enable a VLT proxy gateway: • Proxy gateway is supported only for VLT; for example, across a VLT domain. • You must enable the VLT peer-routing command for the VLT proxy gateway to function.
• You cannot change the VLT LAG to a legacy LAG when it is part of proxy-gateway. • You cannot change the link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) port channel interface to a legacy LAG when you enable a proxy gateway. • Dell Networking recommends the vlt-peer-mac transmit command only for square VLTs without diagonal links. • The virtual router redundancy (VRRP) protocol and IPv6 routing is not supported. • Private VLANs (PVLANs) are not supported.
• You must configure the interface proxy gateway LLDP to enable or disable a proxy-gateway LLDP TLV on specific interfaces. • The interface is typically a VLT port-channel that connects to a remote VLT domain. • The new proxy gateway TLV is carried on the physical links under the port channel only. • You must have at least one link connection to each unit of the VLT domain. Following are the prerequisites for Proxy Gateway LLDP configuration: • You must globally enable LLDP.
LLDP VLT Proxy Gateway in a Square VLT Topology Figure 143. Sample Configuration for a VLT Proxy Gateway • The preceding figure shows a sample square VLT Proxy gateway topology. There are no diagonal links in the square VLT connection between the C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in the VLT domain 2. This causes sub-optimal routing.
• Any L3 packet, when it gets an L3 hit and is routed, it has a time to live (TTL) decrement as expected. • You can disable the VLT Proxy Gateway for a particular VLAN using an "Exclude-VLAN" configuration. The configuration has to be done in both the VLT domains [C and D in VLT domain 1 and C1 and D1 in VLT domain 2].
Figure 144. VLT Domain Configuration Dell-1 and Dell-2 constitute VLT domain 120. Dell-3 and Dell-4 constitute VLT domain 110. These two VLT domains are connected using a VLT LAG P0 50. To know how to configure the interfaces in VLT domains, see the Configuring VLT section. Dell-1 VLT Configuration vlt domain 120 peer-link port-channel 120 back-up destination 10.1.1.
switchport no spanning-tree vlt-peer-lag port-channel 50 no shutdown Note that on the inter-domain link, the switchport command is enabled. On a VLTi link between VLT peers in a VLT domain, the switchport command is not used. VLAN 100 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between Dell-1 and Dell-2. interface Vlan 100 description OSPF Peering VLAN to Dell-2 ip address 10.10.100.1/30 ip ospf network point-to-point no shutdown VLAN 101 is used as the OSPF peering VLAN between the two VLT domains.
The following output shows that Dell-1 forms OSPF neighborship with Dell-2. Dell-2#sh ip ospf nei Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.100.1 Vl 100 0 Dell-3 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
The following output shows that Dell-4 and VLT domain 120 form OSPF neighborship with Dell-3. Dell-3#sh ip ospf nei ! Neighbor ID Pri State Dead Time Address Interface Area 4.4.4.4 1 FULL/ - 00:00:33 10.10.101.1 Vl 101 0 1.1.1.1 1 FULL/ - 00:00:34 10.10.102.2 Vl 102 0 Dell-4 VLT Configuration vlt domain 110 peer-link port-channel 110 back-up destination 10.1.1.
58 Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) is supported on Dell Networking OS. Overview The switch acts as the VXLAN gateway and performs the VXLAN Tunnel End Point (VTEP) functionality. VXLAN is a technology where in the data traffic from the virtualized servers is transparently transported over an existing legacy network. Figure 145.
Components of VXLAN network VXLAN provides a mechanism to extend an L2 network over an L3 network. In short, VXLAN is an L2 overlay scheme over an L3 network and this overlay is termed as a VXLAN segment.
VXLAN Hypervisor It is the VTEP that connects the Virtual Machines (VM) to the underlay legacy network to the physical infrastructure. Service Node(SN) It is also another VTEP, but it is fully managed by NSX. The purpose of SN is to be the central replication engine for flooded packets Legacy TOR It is a TOR switch, which performs routing or switching decisions.
Components of VXLAN Frame Format Some of the important fields of the VXLAN frame format are described below: Outer Ethernet Header: Outer IP Header: The Outer Ethernet Header consists of the following components: • Destination Address: Generally, it is a first hop router's MAC address when the VTEP is on a different address. • Source Address : It is the source MAC address of the router that routes the packet.
To view the certificate, use the following command: • show file flash://vtep-cert.
You can create a logical network by creating a logical switch. The logical network acts as the forwarding domain for workloads on the physical as well as virtual infrastructure. Figure 149. Create Logical Switch 5 Create Logical Switch Port A logical switch port provides a logical connection point for a VM interface (VIF) and a L2 gateway connection to an external network. It binds the virtual access ports in the GW to logical network (VXLAN) and VLAN. Figure 150.
The platform supports only the instance ID 1 in the initial release. 3 controller VxLAN INSTANCE mode controller controller IDip address port port-number tcp|ptcp|pssl|ssl The port number range is from 1 to 6632. The default port number is 6632. The default connection type is ssl. 4 gateway-ip VxLAN INSTANCE mode gateway-ip IP address 5 max-back off (Optional) VxLAN INSTANCE mode max_backoff time The range is from 1000-180000. The default value is 30000 milliseconds.
Tunnel Key : 2 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 192.168.122.133 : vxlan_over_ipv4 (up) Port Vlan Bindings: Te 0/80: VLAN: 0 (0x80000001), Fo 0/124: VLAN: 0 (0x80000004), The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance statistics interface command.
The following example shows the show vxlan vxlan-instance logical-network command. Dell#show vxlan vxlan-instance 1 logical-network Instance : 1 Total LN count : 1 Name bffc3be0-13e6-4745-9f6b-0bcbc5877f01 4656 VNID Dell#$n-instance 1 logical-network n 2a8d5d19-8845-4365-ad04-243f0b6df252 Name : 2a8d5d19-8845-4365-ad04-243f0b6df252 Description : Tunnel Key : 2 VFI : 28674 Unknown Multicast MAC Tunnels: 192.168.122.
Examples of the show bfd neighbors command. To verify that the session is established, use the show bfd neighbors command. Dell_GW1#show bfd neighbors * Ad Dn B C I O O3 R M V VT * * * * * * - Active session role Admin Down BGP CLI ISIS OSPF OSPFv3 Static Route (RTM) MPLS VRRP Vxlan Tunnel LocalAddr 1.0.1.1 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 3.3.3.3 RemoteAddr 1.0.1.2 192.168.122.135 192.168.122.136 192.168.122.137 192.168.122.138 192.168.122.
VXLAN-INSTANCE mode local-vtep-ip IP Address 4 Create a VNI profile to associate with remote VTEP configuration. VXLAN-INSTANCE mode vni—profile profile name 5 Associate VNID to the VNI profile. VNI-PROFILE mode vnid VNID Range 6 Create a remote tunnel and associate the remote VTEP to the VNID. VXLAN-INSTANCE mode remote—vtep—ip remote IP Address vni-profile profile name 7 Enable the VXLAN. VXLAN-INSTANCE mode no shutdown 8 Enable VXLAN instance on the interface.
Admin State Local vtep ip Port List : Up : 101.101.101.101 : Fo 0/116 The following example displays VTEP to VNI mapping for a specific remote VTEP. Dell# show vxlan Remote Vtep IP VNI profile VNID count VNID list Remote Vtep IP VNI profile VNID count VNID list vtep-vni-map : 10.10.10.10 : Profile1 : 4 : 100, 200, 300, 400 : : : : 10.10.10.11 Profile2 3 100, 200, 500 The following example displays VXLAN statistics for a specific port and VLAN combination.
59 Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows a physical router to partition itself into multiple Virtual Routers (VRs). The control and data plane are isolated in each VR so that traffic does NOT flow across VRs.Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) allows multiple instances of a routing table to co-exist within the same router at the same time. VRF Overview VRF improves functionality by allowing network paths to be segmented without using multiple devices.
Figure 151. VRF Network Example VRF Configuration Notes Although there is no restriction on the number of VLANs that can be assigned to a VRF instance, the total number of routes supported in VRF is limited by the size of the IPv4 CAM. VRF is implemented in a network device by using Forwarding Information Bases (FIBs). A network device may have the ability to configure different virtual routers, where entries in the FIB that belong to one VRF cannot be accessed by another VRF on the same device.
If the next-hop IP in a static route VRF statement is VRRP IP of another VRF, this static route does not get installed on the VRRP master. VRF supports some routing protocols only on the default VRF (default-vrf) instance. Table 1 displays the software features supported in VRF and whether they are supported on all VRF instances or only the default VRF. Table 111. Software Features Supported on VRF Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF 802.
Feature/Capability Support Status for Default VRF Support Status for Non-default VRF IS-IS Yes Yes BGP Yes Yes ACL Yes No Multicast No No NDP Yes Yes RAD Yes Yes DHCP DHCP requests are not forwarded across VRF instances. The DHCP client and server must be on the same VRF instance.
Assigning an Interface to a VRF You must enter the ip vrf forwarding command before you configure the IP address or any other setting on an interface. NOTE: You can configure an IP address or subnet on a physical or VLAN interface that overlaps the same IP address or subnet configured on another interface only if the interfaces are assigned to different VRFs. If two interfaces are assigned to the same VRF, you cannot configure overlapping IP subnets or the same IP address on them.
show ip vrf [vrf-name] Assigning an OSPF Process to a VRF Instance OSPF routes are supported on all VRF instances. See the Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2) chapter for complete OSPF configuration information. Assign an OSPF process to a VRF instance . Return to CONFIGURATION mode to enable the OSPF process. The OSPF Process ID is the identifying number assigned to the OSPF process, and the Router ID is the IP address associated with the OSPF process.
Task Command Syntax Command Mode 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 43, Gratuitous ARP sent: 0 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Configuring Management VRF You can assign a management interface to a management VRF. 1 Create a management VRF. CONFIGURATION ip vrf management 2 Assign a management port to a management VRF.
management route ip-address mask managementethernet ormanagement route ipv6-address prefixlength managementethernet You can also have the management route to point to a front-end port in case of the management VRF. For example: management route 2::/64 tengigabitethernet 1/1. • Configure a static entry in the IPv6 neighbor discovery. CONFIGURATION ipv6 neighbor vrf management 1::1 tengigabitethernet 1/1 xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx Sample VRF Configuration The following configuration illustrates a typical VRF set-up.
Figure 153. Setup VRF Interfaces The following example relates to the configuration shown in the above illustrations. Router 1 ip vrf blue 1 ! ip vrf orange 2 ! ip vrf green 3 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet no ip address switchport no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 10.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface TenGigabitEthernet ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 20.0.0.
ip vrf forwarding green ip address 30.0.0.1/24 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 128 ip vrf forwarding blue ip address 1.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 192 ip vrf forwarding orange ip address 2.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.1/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.1 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 10.0.0.
ip address 2.0.0.2/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! interface Vlan 256 ip vrf forwarding green ip address 3.0.0.2/24 tagged TenGigabitEthernet 3/1 no shutdown ! router ospf 1 vrf blue router-id 1.0.0.2 network 11.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 1.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/1 ! router ospf 2 vrf orange router-id 2.0.0.2 network 21.0.0.0/24 area 0 network 2.0.0.0/24 area 0 passive-interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/2 ! ip route vrf green30.0.0.0/24 3.0.0.
Dell#show ip route vrf orange Codes: C - connected, S - static, R - RIP, B - BGP, IN - internal BGP, EX - external BGP,LO - Locally Originated, O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set C C O Destination ----------2.0.0.0/24 20.0.
O - OSPF, IA - OSPF inter area, N1 - OSPF NSSA external type 1, N2 - OSPF NSSA external type 2, E1 - OSPF external type 1, E2 - OSPF external type 2, i - IS-IS, L1 - IS-IS level-1, L2 - IS-IS level-2, IA - IS-IS inter area, * - candidate default, > - non-active route, + - summary route Gateway of last resort is not set Destination Gateway ----------------C 1.0.0.0/24 Direct, Vl 128 O 10.0.0.0/24 via 1.0.0.1, Vl 128 C 11.0.0.
interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 ip vrf forwarding VRF2 ip address 140.0.0.1/24 ip route vrf VRF1 20.0.0.0/16 140.0.0.2 vrf VRF2 ip route vrf VRF2 40.0.0.0/16 120.0.0.2 vrf VRF1 Dynamic Route Leaking Route Leaking is a powerful feature that enables communication between isolated (virtual) routing domains by segregating and sharing a set of services such as VOIP, Video, and so on that are available on one routing domain with other virtual domains.
ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-Shared is created and the interface 1/4 is assigned to this VRF. 2 Configure the export target in the source VRF:. ip route-export 1:1 3 Configure VRF-red. ip vrf vrf-red interface-type slot/port ip vrf forwarding VRF-red ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 4 Configure the import target in VRF-red. ip route-import 1:1 5 Configure the export target in VRF-red.
ip vrf ip ip ! ip vrf ! ip vrf ip ip ip VRF-Blue route-export route-import 3:3 1:1 VRF-Green VRF-shared route-export route-import route-import 1:1 2:2 3:3 Show routing tables of all the VRFs (without any route-export and route-import tags being configured) Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Red O 11.1.1.1/32 via 111.1.1.1 110/0 C 111.1.1.0/24 Direct, Te 1/11 0/0 00:00:10 22:39:59 Dell# show ip route vrf VRF-Blue O 22.2.2.2/32 via 122.2.2.2 110/0 00:00:11 C 122.2.2.
C 122.2.2.0/24 O 44.4.4.4/32 00:00:11 Direct, VRF-Blue:Te 1/22 0/0 via 144.4.4.4 110/0 C Direct, Te 1/4 144.4.4.0/24 0/0 22:39:61 00:32:36 Important Points to Remember • If the target VRF conatins the same prefix as either the sourced or Leaked route from some other VRF, then route Leaking for that particular prefix fails and the following error-log is thrown. SYSLOG (“Duplicate prefix found %s in the target VRF %d”, address, import_vrf_id) with The type/level is EVT_LOGWARNING.
ip address ip—address mask A non-default VRF named VRF-red is created and the interface is assigned to this VRF. 2 Define a route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol. Dell(config)route-map export_ospfbgp_protocol permit 10 3 Define the matching criteria for the exported routes. Dell(config-route-map)match source-protocol ospf Dell(config-route-map)match source-protocol bgp This action specifies that the route-map contains OSPF and BGP as the matching criteria for exporting routes from vrf-red.
O 44.4.4.4/32 via vrf-red:144.4.4.4 0/0 00:32:36 << only OSPF and BGP leaked from VRF-red Important Points to Remember • Only Active routes are eligible for leaking. For example, if VRF-A has two routes from BGP and OSPF, in which the BGP route is not active. In this scenario, the OSPF route takes precedence over BGP. Even though the Target VRF-B has specified filtering options to match BGP, the BGP route is not leaked as that route is not active in the Source VRF.
60 Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP Overview VRRP is designed to eliminate a single point of failure in a statically routed network. VRRP specifies a MASTER router that owns the next hop IP and MAC address for end stations on a local area network (LAN).
Figure 154. Basic VRRP Configuration VRRP Benefits With VRRP configured on a network, end-station connectivity to the network is not subject to a single point-of-failure. End-station connections to the network are redundant and are not dependent on internal gateway protocol (IGP) protocols to converge or update routing tables. VRRP Implementation Within a single VRRP group, up to 12 virtual IP addresses are supported.
Table 113. Recommended VRRP Advertise Intervals Recommended Advertise Interval Groups/Interface Total VRRP Groups Groups/Interface Less than 250 1 second 12 Between 250 and 450 2–3 seconds 24 Between 450 and 600 3–4 seconds 36 Between 600 and 800 4 seconds 48 Between 800 and 1000 5 seconds 84 Between 1000 and 1200 7 seconds 100 Between 1200 and 1500 8 seconds 120 VRRP Configuration By default, VRRP is not configured.
INTERFACE mode no vrrp-group vrid Examples of Configuring and Verifying VRRP The following examples how to configure VRRP. Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 1/1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)# The following examples how to verify the VRRP configuration. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ip address 10.10.10.
1 Set the backup switches to VRRP version to both. Dell_backup_switch1(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-100)#version both Dell_backup_switch2(conf-if-te-1/2-vrid-100)#version both 2 Set the master switch to VRRP protocol version 3. Dell_master_switch(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-100)#version 3 3 Set the backup switches to version 3.
Examples of the Configuring and Verifying a Virtual IP Address The following example shows how to configure a virtual IP address. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.1 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.2 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#virtual-address 10.10.10.3 The following example shows how to verify a virtual IP address configuration. NOTE: In the following example, the primary IP address and the virtual IP addresses are on the same subnet.
• Configure the priority for the VRRP group. INTERFACE -VRID mode priority priority The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 100. Examples of the priority Command Dell(conf-if-te-1/2)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-te-1/2-vrid-111)#priority 125 To verify the VRRP group priority, use the show vrrp command. Dellshow vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1, VRID: 111, Net: 10.10.10.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 255, Master: 10.10.10.
Examples of the authentication-type Command The bold section shows the encryption type (encrypted) and the password. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type ? Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#authentication-type simple 7 force10 The following example shows verifying the VRRP authentication configuration using the show conf command. The bold section shows the encrypted password.
Changing the Advertisement Interval By default, the MASTER router transmits a VRRP advertisement to all members of the VRRP group every one second, indicating it is operational and is the MASTER router. If the VRRP group misses three consecutive advertisements, the election process begins and the BACKUP virtual router with the highest priority transitions to MASTER.
Track an Interface or Object You can set Dell Networking OS to monitor the state of any interface according to the virtual group. Each VRRP group can track up to 12 interfaces and up to 20 additional objects, which may affect the priority of the VRRP group. If the tracked interface goes down, the VRRP group’s priority decreases by a default value of 10 (also known as cost). If the tracked interface’s state goes up, the VRRP group’s priority increases by 10.
• (Optional) Display the configuration of tracked objects in VRRP groups on a specified interface. EXEC mode or EXEC Privilege mode show running-config interface interface Examples of Configuring and Viewing the track Command The following example shows how to configure tracking using the track command. Dell(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 111 Dell(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-111)#track Tengigabitethernet 1/2 The following example shows how to verify tracking using the show conf command.
The following example shows verifying the VRRP configuration on an interface. Dell#show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 1/8 interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/8 no ip address ipv6 address 2007::30/64 vrrp-ipv6-group 1 track 2 priority-cost 20 track 3 priority-cost 30 virtual-address 2007::1 virtual-address fe80::1 no shutdown Setting VRRP Initialization Delay When configured, VRRP is enabled immediately upon system reload or boot.
Sample Configurations Before you set up VRRP, review the following sample configurations. VRRP for an IPv4 Configuration The following configuration shows how to enable IPv4 VRRP. This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. To support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on, be sure that you make the necessary changes.
Examples of Configuring VRRP for IPv4 and IPv6 The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv4 Router 2. R2(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 2/31 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#ip address 10.1.1.1/24 R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#vrrp-group 99 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#priority 200 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#virtual 10.1.1.3 R2(conf-if-te-2/31-vrid-99)#no shut R2(conf-if-te-2/31)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 2/31 ip address 10.1.1.1/24 ! vrrp-group 99 priority 200 virtual-address 10.1.1.
Figure 156. VRRP for an IPv6 Configuration NOTE: In a VRRP or VRRPv3 group, if two routers come up with the same priority and another router already has MASTER status, the router with master status continues to be MASTER even if one of two routers has a higher IP or IPv6 address. The following example shows configuring VRRP for IPv6 Router 2 and Router 3. Configure a virtual link local (fe80) address for each VRRPv3 group created for an interface.
R2(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address fe80::10 R2(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-10)#virtual-address 1::10 R2(conf-if-te-1/1-vrid-10)#no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1)#show config interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 ipv6 address 1::1/64 vrrp-group 10 priority 100 virtual-address fe80::10 virtual-address 1::10 no shutdown R2(conf-if-te-1/1)#end R2#show vrrp -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 1/1, IPv6 VRID: 10, Version: 3, Net:fe80::201:e8ff:fe6a:c59f VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:
VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Scenario The following example shows how to enable VRRP in a non-VLAN. The following example shows a typical use case in which you create three virtualized overlay networks by configuring three VRFs in two switches. The default gateway to reach the Internet in each VRF is a static route with the next hop being the virtual IP address configured in VRRP. In this scenario, a single VLAN is associated with each VRF.
Figure 157. VRRP in a VRF: Non-VLAN Example Example of Configuring VRRP in a VRF on Switch-1 (Non-VLAN) Switch-1 S1(conf)#ip vrf default-vrf 0 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S1(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S1(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#ip address 10.10.1.5/24 S1(conf-if-te-1/1)#vrrp-group 11 % Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 11 in VRF 1 will be 177.
% Info: The VRID used by the VRRP group 15 in VRF 3 will be 243. S1(conf-if-te-1/3-vrid-105)#priority 255 S1(conf-if-te-1/3-vrid-105)#virtual-address 20.1.1.5 S1(conf-if-te-1/3)#no shutdown Dell#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 2/8 -----------------TenGigabitEthernet 2/8, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.
This VLAN scenario often occurs in a service-provider network in which you configure VLAN tags for traffic from multiple customers on customer-premises equipment (CPE), and separate VRF instances associated with each VLAN are configured on the provider edge (PE) router in the point-of-presence (POP).
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) VRRP in VRF: Switch-2 VLAN Configuration Switch-2 S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-1 1 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-2 2 ! S2(conf)#ip vrf VRF-3 3 ! S2(conf)#interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 S2(conf-if-te-1/1)#no ip address S2(conf-if-te-1/1)#switchport S2(conf-if-te-1/1)#no shutdown ! S2(conf-if-te-1/1)#interface vlan 100 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip vrf forwarding VRF-1 S2(conf-if-vl-100)#ip address 10.10.1.
00:00:5e:00:01:0a Virtual IP address: 20.1.1.100 Authentication: (none) Dell#show vrrp vrf vrf2 port-channel 1 -----------------Port-channel 1, IPv4 VRID: 1, Version: 2, Net: 10.1.1.1 VRF: 2 vrf2 State: Master, Priority: 100, Master: 10.1.1.1 (local) Hold Down: 0 sec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 1 sec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 419, Gratuitous ARP sent: 1 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:01:01 Virtual IP address: 10.1.1.
Figure 158. VRRP for IPv6 Topology NOTE: This example does not contain comprehensive directions and is intended to provide guidance for only a typical VRRP configuration. You can copy and paste from the example to your CLI. Be sure you make the necessary changes to support your own IP addresses, interfaces, names, and so on.
NOTE: The virtual IPv6 address you configure should be the same as the IPv6 subnet to which the interface belongs.
Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe80::255 Dell#show vrrp tengigabitethernet 2/8 TenGigabitEthernet 2/8, IPv6 VRID: 255, Version: 3, Net: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed VRF: 0 default State: Master, Priority: 110, Master: fe80::201:e8ff:fe8a:e9ed (local) Hold Down: 0 centisec, Preempt: TRUE, AdvInt: 100 centisec Accept Mode: FALSE, Master AdvInt: 100 centisec Adv rcvd: 0, Bad pkts rcvd: 0, Adv sent: 120 Virtual MAC address: 00:00:5e:00:02:ff Virtual IP address: 10:1:1::255 fe
61 Debugging and Diagnostics This chapter describes debugging and diagnostics for the device. Offline Diagnostics The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. The diagnostics tests are grouped into three levels: • Level 0 — Level 0 diagnostics check for the presence of various components and perform essential path verifications. In addition, Level 0 diagnostics verify the identification registers of the components on the board.
EXEC Privilege mode show system brief 3 Start diagnostics on the unit. diag stack-unit stack-unit-number When the tests are complete, the system displays the following message and automatically reboots the unit. Dell#00:09:42 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-SU-1.txt Diags completed... Rebooting the system now!!! Mar 12 10:40:35: %S6000:0 %DIAGAGT-6-DA_DIAG_DONE: Diags finished on stack unit 0 Dell#00:09:42 : Diagnostic test results are stored on file: flash:/TestReport-SU-0.
0 0 0 0 1 2 up up absent up up 19275 19275 up up 19275 19275 Speed in RPM The following example shows the diag command (standalone unit). Dell#diag stack-unit 1 level0 Warning - diagnostic execution will cause multiple link flaps on the peer side - advisable to shut directly connected ports Proceed with Diags [confirm yes/no]: yes Dell#Dec 15 04:14:07: %S4820:0 %DIAGAGT-6-DA_DIAG_STARTED: Starting diags on stack unit 1 00:12:10 : System may take additional time for Driver Init.
Test 4.000 - Psu0 Source Type Test .................................. PASS diagS6000IsPsuGood[954]: ERROR: Psu:1, Power supply is not present. Test 4.001 - Psu1 Source Type Test .................................. NOT PRESENT Test 4 - Psu Source Type Test ....................................... NOT PRESENT Test 5.000 - Psu0 Status Monitor Test ............................... PASS diagS6000PsuStatusMonitorTest[1099]: ERROR: Psu:1, It is not present... Test 5.001 - Psu1 Status Monitor Test ....................
Test Test Test Test Test Test Test Test 15 - CPU Sdram Presence Test ................................... 16 - CPU Sdram Size Test ...................................... 17.000 - System Cpld Access Test ............................... 17.001 - Master Cpld Access Test ............................... 17.002 - Slave Cpld Access Test ................................ 17 - Cpld Access Test .......................................... 18 - CFast Presence Test .......................................
QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP QSFP 52 52 52 52 52 52 52 CheckCodeBase = 0x26 Serial ID Extended Fields BR max = 0 BR min = 0 Vendor SN = QC050955 Datecode = 120205 CheckCodeExt = 0x2b QSFP 52 Diagnostic Information =================================== QSFP 52 Rx Power measurement type =================================== QSFP 52 Temp High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Voltage High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Bias High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 RX Power High Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Temp Low Alarm threshold QSFP 52 Volt
Minor Off Minor Major Off Major Shutdown Unit2 55 60 75 80 85 ---------------------------------------------------------------Minor Off Minor Major Off Major Shutdown Unit3 55 60 75 80 85 Troubleshoot an Over-temperature Condition To troubleshoot an over-temperature condition, use the following information. 1 Use the show environment commands to monitor the temperature levels. 2 Check air flow through the system. Ensure that the air ducts are clean and that all fans are working correctly.
OID String OID Name Description NOTE: These OIDs only generate if you enable the enable opticinfo-update-interval is enabled command. Hardware MIB Buffer Statistics .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.4 dellNetFpPacketBufferTable View the modular packet buffers details per stack unit and the mode of allocation. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.5 dellNetFpStatsPerPortTable View the forwarding plane statistics containing the packet buffer usage per port per stack unit. .1.3.6.1.4.1.6027.3.27.1.
Troubleshooting Packet Loss The show hardware stack-unit command is intended primarily to troubleshoot packet loss. To troubleshoot packet loss, use the following commands.
4 5 6 7 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Example of show hardware drops interface interface Dell#show hardware drops interface tengigabitethernet 2/1 Drops in Interface Te 2/1: --- Ingress Drops --Ingress Drops IBP CBP Full Drops PortSTPnotFwd Drops IPv4 L3 Discards Policy Discards Packets dropped by FP (L2+L3) Drops Port bitmap zero Drops Rx VLAN Drops --- Ingress MAC counters--Ingress FCSDrops Ingress MTUExceeds --- MMU Drops --Ingress MMU Drops HOL DROPS(TOTAL) HOL DROPS on COS0
Dataplane Statistics The show hardware stack-unit cpu data-plane statistics command provides insight into the packet types coming to the CPU. The show hardware stack-unit cpu party-bus statistics command displays input and output statistics on the party bus, which carries inter-process communication traffic between CPUs. The command output in the following example has been augmented, providing detailed RX/ TX packet statistics on a per-queue basis.
1649566 packets, 1935316203 bytes 0 errors Display Stack Port Statistics The show hardware stack-unit stack-port command displays input and output statistics for a stack-port interface.
RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - RUNT frame counter Fragment counter VLAN tagged packets 64 Byte Frame Counter 64 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/frame Counter Unicast Packet Cou
RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX - VLAN tagged packets 64 Byte Frame Counter 64 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/frame Counter Unicast Packet Counter Multicast Packet Counter Broadcast Fr
RX - PFC Frame Priority 6 RX - PFC Frame Priority 7 RX - Debug Counter 0 RX - Debug Counter 1 RX - Debug Counter 2
Example of a Mini Core Text File VALID MAGIC -----------------PANIC STRING ----------------panic string is : ---------------STACK TRACE START--------------0035d60c : 00274f8c : 0024e2b0 : 0024dee8 : 0024d9c4 : 002522b0 : 0026a8d0 : 0026a00c : ----------------STACK TRACE END-----------------------------------FREE MEMORY--------------uvmexp.
62 Standards Compliance This chapter describes standards compliance for Dell Networking products. NOTE: Unless noted, when a standard cited here is listed as supported by the Dell Networking OS, the system also supports predecessor standards. One way to search for predecessor standards is to use the http://tools.ietf.org/ website. Click “Browse and search IETF documents,” enter an RFC number, and inspect the top of the resulting document for obsolescence citations to related RFCs.
SFF-8431 SFP+ Direct Attach Cable (10GSFP+Cu) MTU 9,216 bytes RFC and I-D Compliance Dell Networking OS supports the following standards. The standards are grouped by related protocol. The columns showing support by platform indicate which version of Dell Networking OS first supports the standard. General Internet Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general internet protocols. Table 115.
General IPv4 Protocols The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for general IPv4 protocols. Table 116. General IPv4 Protocols R F C # Full Name Z-Series S-Series 79 Internet Protocol 1 7.6.1 79 Internet Control 2 Message Protocol 7.6.1 82 An Ethernet Address 6 Resolution Protocol 7.6.1 10 Using ARP to 27 Implement Transparent Subnet Gateways 7.6.1 10 DOMAIN NAMES 3 IMPLEMENTATION 5 AND SPECIFICATION (client) 7.6.
R F C # Full Name Z-Series S-Series 21 Dynamic Host 31 Configuration Protocol 7.6.1 23 Virtual Router 38 Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 7.6.1 3 Using 31-Bit Prefixes 0 on IPv4 Point-to21 Point Links 7.7.1 3 DHCP Relay Agent 0 Information Option 46 7.8.1 3 0 6 9 7.8.1 VLAN Aggregation for Efficient IP Address Allocation 31 Protection Against a 28 Variant of the Tiny Fragment Attack 7.6.
RF C# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 246 Transmission of 4 IPv6 Packets over Ethernet Networks 7.8.1 267 5 7.8.1 IPv6 Jumbograms 2711 IPv6 Router Alert Option 8.3.12.0 358 IPv6 Global 7 Unicast Address Format 7.8.1 400 IPv6 Scoped 7 Address Architecture 8.3.12.0 429 Internet 1 Protocol Version 6 (IPv6) Addressing Architecture 7.8.1 444 3 7.8.1 Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMPv6) for the IPv6 Specification 486 Neighbor 1 Discovery for IPv6 8.3.12.
Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for BGP protocols. Table 118. Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) RFC# Full Name S-Series/Z-Series 1997 BGP ComAmtturnibituitees 7.8.1 2385 Protection of BGP Sessions via the TCP MD5 Signature Option 7.8.1 2439 BGP Route Flap Damping 7.8.1 2545 Use of BGP-4 Multiprotocol Extensions for IPv6 Inter-Domain Routing 2796 BGP Route Reflection: An Alternative to Full Mesh Internal BGP (IBGP) 7.8.
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for IS-IS protocol. Table 120.
Multicast The following table lists the Dell Networking OS support per platform for Multicast protocol. Table 122. Multicast RFC# Full Name Z-Series S-Series 1112 Host Extensions for IP Multicasting 7.8.1 2236 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 2 7.8.1 3376 Internet Group Management Protocol, Version 3 7.8.1 3569 An Overview of SourceSpecific Multicast (SSM) 7.8.
RFC# Full Name S4810 1850 OSPF Version 2 Management Information Base 7.6.1 1901 Introduction to Community-based SNMPv2 7.6.1 2011 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Internet Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2012 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the Transmission Control Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2013 SNMPv2 Management Information Base for the User Datagram Protocol using SMIv2 7.6.1 2024 Definitions of Managed Objects for Data Link Switching using SMIv2 7.6.
RFC# Full Name S4810 2674 Definitions of Managed Objects for Bridges with Traffic Classes, Multicast Filtering and Virtual LAN Extensions 7.6.1 2787 Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 7.6.1 2819 Remote Network Monitoring Management Information 7.6.1 Base: Ethernet Statistics Table, Ethernet History Control Table, Ethernet History Table, Alarm Table, Event Table, Log Table 2863 The Interfaces Group MIB 7.6.
RFC# Full Name S4810 isisISAdjAreaAddrTable isisISAdjIPAddrTable isisISAdjProtSuppTable draft-ietf-netmod-interfaces-cfg-03 Defines a YANG data model for the configuration of network interfaces. Used in the Programmatic Interface RESTAPI feature. 9.2(0.0) IEEE 802.1AB Management Information Base module for LLDP configuration, statistics, local system data and remote systems data components. 7.7.1 IEEE 802.1AB The LLDP Management Information Base extension module for IEEE 802.
RFC# Full Name S4810 FORCE10-SYSTEM-COMPONENT-MIB Force10 System Component MIB (enables the user to view CAM usage information) 7.6.1 FORCE10-TC-MIB Force10 Textual Convention 7.6.1 FORCE10-TRAP-ALARM-MIB Force10 Trap Alarm MIB 7.6.1 MIB Location You can find Force10 MIBs under the Force10 MIBs subhead on the Documentation page of iSupport: https://www.force10networks.com/CSPortal20/KnowledgeBase/Documentation.
63 X.509v3 Dell Networking OS supports X.509v3 standards. Topics: • • • • • • • • • Introduction to X.509v3 certification X.509v3 support in Dell Networking OS Information about installing CA certificates Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Information about installing trusted certificates Transport layer security (TLS) Online certificate status protocol (OSCP) Verifying certificates Event logging Introduction to X.509v3 certification X.
1 An entity or organization that wants a digital certificate requests one through a CSR. 2 To request a digital certificate through a CSR, a key pair is generated and the CSR is signed using the secret private key. The CSR contains information identifying the applicant and the applicant's public key. This public key is used to verify the signature of the CSR and the Distinguished Name (DN). 3 This CSR is sent to a Certificate Authority (CA).
The Root CA generates a private key and a self-signed CA certificate. The Intermediate CA generates a private key and a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). Using its private key, the root CA signs the intermediate CA’s CSR generating a CA certificate for the Intermediate CA. This intermediate CA can then sign certificates for hosts in the network and also for further intermediate CAs.
During the initial TLS protocol negotiation, both participating parties also check to see if the other’s certificate is revoked by the CA. To do this check, the devices query the CA’s designated OCSP responder on the network. The OCSP responder information is included in the presented certificate, the Intermediate CA inserts the info upon signing it, or it may be statically configured on the host. Information about installing CA certificates Dell Networking OS enables you to download and install X.
crypto ca-cert install {path} Information about Creating Certificate Signing Requests (CSR) Certificate Signing Request (CSR) enables a device to get a X.509v3 certificate from a CA. In order for a device to get a X.509v3 certificate, the device first requests a certificate from a CA through a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). While creating a CSR, you need to provide the information about the certificate and the private key details.
• Organization Name • Organization Unit Name • Common Name • Email address • Validity • Length • Alternate Name NOTE: The command contains multiple options with the Common Name being a required field and blanks being filled in for unspecified fields. Information about installing trusted certificates Dell Networking OS also enables you to install a trusted certificate. The system can then present this certificate for authentication to clients such as SSH and HTTPS.
TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_128_CBC_SHA256 TLS_RSA_WITH_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 When not operating in FIPS mode, the system may support TLS 1.0 up to 1.
Configuring OCSP setting on CA You can configure the CA to contact multiple OCSP servers. To configure OCSP server for a CA, perform the following step: In the certificate mode, enter the following command: ocsp-server URL [nonce] [sign-requests] NOTE: If you have an IPv6 address in the URL, then enclose this address in square brackets. For example, http:// [1100::203]:6514.
NOTE: A CA certificate can also be revoked. Verifying Server certificates Verifying that server certificates are mandatory in the TLS protocol. As a result, all TLS-enabled applications require certificate verification, including Syslog servers. The system checks the Server certificates against installed CA certificates. Verifying client certificates Verifying that client certificates are optional in the TLS protocol and is not explicitly required by Common Criteria.
